M2LT Project Manual & Specifications

Project Manual &
Specifications
January 7, 2015
DJ&A, P.C. Engineers. Planners. Surveyors.

3203 Russell Street / Missoula, MT 59801
Ph: 406/721-4320 F: 406/549-6371
www.djanda.com
since 1973
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT
00100
INVITATION TO BID
00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00300
BID FORM
00430
BID BOND FORM
00500
AGREEMENT FORM MISSOULA COUNTY
00510
NOTICE OF AWARD
00550
NOTICE TO PROCEED
00610
PERFORMANCE BOND
00615
PAYMENT BOND
00620
CONTRACTORS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
00625
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
00630
WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE
00635
CHANGE ORDER
00640
FIELD ORDER
00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
00810
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
00900
REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS (FHWA-1273)
00910
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH BUY AMERICA LAW AND PROVISION
00920
MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE RATES
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
01030
PERMITS
01041
PROJECT COORDINATION AND SCHEDULE
01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
01090
REFERENCES
01300
SUBMITTALS
01400
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL AND OWNER QUALITY ASSURANCE
01500
CONSTRUCTION AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01570
CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC CONTROL
01600
SOIL EROSION AND POLLUTION CONTROL
01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01710
MOBILIZATION
01800
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
DIVISION 2 SITE WORK
02110
GEOTEXTILES
02112
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, CONCRETE, CURB, SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS,
AND/OR OTHER ITEMS
02113
ADJUSTING EXISTING MANHOLES, LAMPHOLES, INLETS, WATER VALVE BOXES,
WATER SERVICES AND FIRE HYDRANTS TO GRADE
02114
RELOCATING OR REMOVING UTILITY POLES, STREET SIGNS, MAILBOXES, AND
FENCES
02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
02236
STABILIZED RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT BASE COURSE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1 of 2
02401
02402
02403
02406
02407
02502
02510
02528
02529
02581
02725
02810
02900
02910
02950
02960
RETAINING WALLS
SOIL NAIL RETAINING WALLS
GRAVITY OR MSE RETAINING WALLS
GEOSYNTHETIC REINFORCED SOIL SLOPES
UNIAXIAL GEOGRID
ASPHALT PRIME AND/OR TACK COAT
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS, APPROACHES, CURB TURN FILLETS, VALLEY
GUTTERS AND MISCELLANEOUS NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND MARKERS (PRE-FORMED PLASTIC, PAINTS AND
ENAMELS)
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
LANDSCAPING
SEEDING
BICYCLE AND PEDESTRIAN COUNTERS
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
03210
REINFORCING STEEL
03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 4 BRIDGE
04000
BRIDGE SPECIAL PROVISIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 00100
INVITATION TO BID
Separate sealed bids for construction of the Missoula to Lolo Trail Project will be received by
Missoula County at the office of Missoula County Public Works at 6089 Training Drive,
Missoula, MT 59808 until 10:00 a.m. local time on February 3, 2015, and then publicly opened
and read aloud.
The project consists of constructing a paved bicycle and pedestrian trail between the
communities of Missoula and Lolo within public right of way. Primary work items include trail
excavation, constructing embankments, retaining walls, recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) base
course, asphalt concrete pavement, concrete bridge deck retrofit, fencing, railing, concrete curb
and gutter, concrete sidewalk, traffic control, landscaping, and associated work.
The contract documents consisting of Drawings and Project Manual may be examined or
obtained at the office of DJ&A, P.C. at 3203 S. Russell Street, Missoula, MT 59801 in
accordance with Article 2.01 of Instructions To Bidders. Required deposit is $125.00 per set,
which is not refundable.
In addition, the Drawings and Project Manual may also be examined at the following locations:
Missoula Plans Exchange, 201 N. Russell, Missoula, MT 59801
Montana Plans Exchange, 2303 Hwy 2 East, Kalispell, MT 59901
There will be a Pre-Bid Conference at the office of Missoula County Public Works at 6089
Training Drive, Missoula, MT 59808 at 1:30 p.m. local time on January 20, 2015. Interested
CONTRACTORS are encouraged to attend.
CONTRACTOR and any of the CONTRACTORS subcontractors bidding or doing work on this
project will be required to be registered with the Montana Department of Labor and Industry
(DLI). Forms for registration are available from the Department of Labor and Industry, P.O. Box
8011, 1805 Prospect, Helena, Montana 59604-8011. Information on registration can be obtained
by calling 1-406-444-7734. All laborers and mechanics employed by CONTRACTOR or
subcontractors in performance of the construction work shall be paid wages at rates as may be
required by the laws of Missoula County and the state of Montana. The CONTRACTOR must
ensure that employees and applicants for employment are not discriminated against because of
their race, color, religion, sex or national origin.
Each bid or proposal must be accompanied by a Certified Check, Cashiers Check, or Bid Bond
payable to Missoula County Public Works Dept., in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of
the total amount of the bid. Successful BIDDERS shall furnish an approved Performance Bond
and a Labor and Materials Payment Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of
Section 00100 6th Edition

INVITATION TO BID
Page 1 of 2
the contract amount. Insurance as required shall be provided by the successful BIDDER(s) and a
certificate(s) of that insurance shall be provided.
This project is funded in part with grant/loan funding from the US Department of
Transportations Transportation Investment Generating Economic Recovery (TIGER)
Discretionary Grant Program.
Award of the project will be contingent upon receiving funding and award concurrence from the
Federal Highway Administration
No bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled time for the public opening of bids, which is 10:00
a.m. local time, February 3, 2015.
The right is reserved to reject any or all proposals received, to waive informalities, to postpone
the award of the contract for a period of not to exceed sixty (60) days, and to accept the lowest
responsive and responsible bid which is in the best interest of the OWNER.
Missoula County is an Equal Opportunity Employer.
Published in Missoula, Montana, this 11th, 18th and 25th day of January, 2015.
Gregory H. Robertson, P.E., AICP, CFM
Chief Public Works Officer
Missoula County Government
6089 Training Drive
Missoula, MT 59801

INVITATION TO BID
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ARTICLE 1- DEFINED TERMS

1.01
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated in the
General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these
Instructions To Bidders have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both
the singular and plural thereof:
A.
Bidder - The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to OWNER
B.
Issuing Office - The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued
and where the bidding procedures are to be administered.
C.
Successful Bidder - The lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid

to whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNERs evaluations as hereinafter
provided) makes an award.
ARTICLE 2- COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.01
Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any,
stated in the Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the Issuing Office. The deposit will
not be refunded.
2.02
Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; the Owner does not
assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.03
The Owner in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms do so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant
for any other use.
ARTICLE 3- QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

3.01
To demonstrate Bidders qualifications to perform the Work, within five (5) days of
OWNERs request, Bidder shall submit written evidence, such as financial data, previous
experience in performing comparable work, present commitments and other such data as
may be called for in the Special Provisions.
In determining the lowest responsible bid, the following elements will be considered:
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
Page 1 of 13
whether the BIDDER involved (a) maintains a permanent place of business; (b) has
adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously; (c) has a
suitable financial status to meet obligations incident to the work; and (d) has appropriate
technical experience.
Each BIDDER may be required to show that former work performed by him has been
handled in such a manner that there are no just or proper claims pending against such
work. No BIDDER will be acceptable if he is engaged on any other work which impairs
his ability to finance his contract. The BIDDER shall demonstrate his ability by meeting
all requirements herein stipulated, if asked for them.
3.02
Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidders
representations and certifications.
ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA

AND SITE
4.01
Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A.
B.
4.02
The Special Provisions identify:

1.
Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

contiguous to the Site that OWNER has used in preparing the Bidding
Documents.
2.
Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface

and subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground
Facilities) that OWNER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents.
Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.02.A will be made

available by OWNER to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are
not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein
upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General
Conditions has been identified and established in paragraph 4.02 of the
Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or
conclusion Bidder draws from any technical data or any other data,
interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings.
Underground Facilities
A.
Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect
to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based upon
Page 2 of 13
information and data furnished to OWNER by owners of such Underground

Facilities, including OWNER, or others. OWNER does not assume responsibility
for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided otherwise
elsewhere.
4.03
Hazardous Environmental Condition

A.
The Special Provisions identify those reports and drawings relating to a

Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that OWNER
has used in preparing the Bidding Documents.
B.
Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.03.A will be made

available by OWNER to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are
not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein
upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in the Special Provisions has
been identified and established in paragraph 4.06 of the Supplementary
Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder
draws from any technical data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or
information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.
4.04
Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective

Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities and other physical
conditions, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or
unanticipated conditions appear in paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General
Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to
prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if
any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous
Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or
indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be
within the scope of the Work appear in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.
4.05
Upon request, OWNER will provide Bidder access to the site to conduct such
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary
for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill and compact all holes and clean up and restore
the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations,
tests, and studies. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relative
to excavation and utility locates.
4.06
A.
Reference is made to the Special Provisions for the identification of the general
nature of other work that is to be performed at the Site by OWNER or others
(such as utilities and other prime contractors) that relates to the Work for which a
Bid is to be submitted. On request, OWNER will provide to each bidder for
examination access to or copies of Contract Documents (other than portions
Page 3 of 13
thereof related to price) for such work.

B.
4.07
Paragraph 6.13.C of the General Conditions indicates that if an Owner safety

program exists, it will be noted in the Special Provisions.
It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

A.
Examine and carefully study the Biding Documents including any Addenda and
the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents;
B.
Visit the site and become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local,
and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;
including but not limited to those general and local conditions affecting
transportation, disposal, handling and storage facilities, availability of labor,
water, power, roads, climactic conditions and seasons, physical conditions at the
work Sites and project area as a whole, job site topography and ground
conditions, equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during work
prosecution,
C.
Become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to all Federal, State and Local Laws
and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work;
D.
Carefully study all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except
underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Special Provisions as
provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and carefully study all
reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site
which have been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph
4.06 of the General Conditions;
E.
Obtain and carefully study (or assume responsibility for doing so) all additional or
supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data
concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or
contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the
Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences
and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto;
F.
Agree at the time of submitting its bid that no further examinations,

investigations, exploration, tests, studies or data are necessary for the
determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within
the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents;
Page 4 of 13
4.08
G.
Become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER and
others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicted in the Bidding Documents;
H.
Correlate the information know to Bidder, information and observations obtained

from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents,
and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and
data with the Bidding Documents.
I.
Promptly give OWNER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or

discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that
the written resolution thereof by OWNER is acceptable to the Bidders; and
J.
Determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the
Work.
The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that

Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the
Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding
Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the
Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given OWNER written notice of all conflicts, errors,
ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in Bidding Documents and the
written resolutions thereof by OWNER are generally sufficient to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work.
ARTICLE 5 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

5.01
A pre-Bid conference will be held at the time and place listed in the Invitation To Bid.
Representatives of OWNER will be present to discuss the project. Bidders are
encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. OWNER will transmit to all
prospective bidders of record such Addenda as OWNER considers necessary in response
to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will
not be binding or legally effective.
ARTICLE 6- SITE AND OTHER AREAS

6.01
The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto
required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of
materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for
by CONTRACTOR Easement for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
Page 5 of 13
facilities are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided in the
Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 7-INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

7.01
All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted
to OWNER in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by OWNER
in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties
recorded by OWNER as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less
than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only
questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other
interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. All questions must be
submitted via email to Greg Robertson at groberts@co.missoula.mt.us .
7.02
Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct or change the Bidding Documents as deemed
advisable by OWNER.
7.03
Any addenda issued during the time of bidding, or forming a part of the Contract
Documents loaned to the Bidder for the preparation of his proposal, shall be covered in
the Bid and shall be made a part of the Agreement. Receipt of each addendum shall be
acknowledged in the Bid. Any Bid in which all issued addenda are not acknowledged
will be considered incomplete and will not be read.
ARTICLE 8-BID SECURITY

8.01
A Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in an amount of

ten percent (10%) of Bidders maximum Bid price and in the form of cash, a cashiers
check, certified check, bank money order, or bank draft, in any case drawn and issued by
a national banking association located in Montana or by any banking corporation
incorporated under the laws of Montana; or a Bid Bond (on a form attached if a form is
prescribed) issued by a surety authorized to do business in Montana meeting the
requirements of Paragraphs 5.01 and 5.02 of the General Conditions.
8.02
The Bid Security of the Successful BIDDER will be retained until such BIDDER has
executed the Contract Documents and furnished the required contract security and met
the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned.
If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish
the required contract security within fifteen (15) days after the Notice of Award,
OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have a
reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of
(7) seven days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or (61) sixty-one days after the
Page 6 of 13
Bid opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned.
8.03
Bid security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes do not have a reasonable chance
of receiving the award will be returned within seven days after Bid opening.
ARTICLE 9- CONTRACT TIMES

9.01
The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a)
Substantially Completed and (b) also completed and ready for final payment are set forth
in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 10- LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

10.01 For each calendar day the contract remains uncompleted after the specified contract
completion time, including approved adjustments, a daily charge will be made against the
contract. This daily charge, determined from the table below will be deducted from any
money due the Contractor. This deduction is for liquidated damages for added Owner
contract administration costs for failure to complete the work on time.
ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT
From More Than
$0
$ 50,000
$100,000
$ 500,000
$ 1,000,000
$ 2,000,000
$ 5,000,000
$ 10,000,000
To and Including
$ 50,000
$ 100,000
$ 500,000
$ 1,000,000
$ 2,000,000
$ 5,000,000
$ 10,000,000
DAILY CHARGE
Calendar Day
$ 478
$ 618
$ 967
$ 1,171
$ 1,505
$ 2,341
$ 2,804
$ 3,379
ARTICLE 11- SUBSTITUTE AND OR-EQUAL ITEMS

11.01 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or
described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or orequal items. Whenever it is indicted in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or or
equal item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if
acceptable to OWNER, application for such acceptance will not be considered by
OWNER until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission
of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by OWNER is set forth in
Paragraphs 6.05 of the General Conditions and may be supplemented in the General
Requirements or Special Provisions.
Page 7 of 13
ARTICLE 12 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS

12.01 If the Special Provisions require or the OWNER would request the identity of certain
Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals or entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance
of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, the apparent Successful
Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall will within five (5) days after Bid
opening submit to OWNER a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals or
entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required.
Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information
regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such
Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity if requested by OWNER. If OWNER alters
due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier,
individual or entity OWNER may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent
Successful Bidder to submit a substitute, without an increase in the Bid.
12.02 If the apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the OWNER
may determine such Bidder to be non-responsive and reject the Bid. Declining to make
requested substitution will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid Security of any
Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual or entity so listed and against which
OWNER makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be
deemed acceptable to OWNER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the
Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in Paragraph 6.06 of the General
Conditions.
12.03 CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual,
or entity against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.
12.04 CONTRACTOR shall submit form showing acceptance by all Subcontractors to
required contract provisions contained in FHWA 1273.
ARTICLE 13- PREPARATION OF BID

13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be
obtained from the OWNER. Bids shall be strictly in accordance with the prescribed form.
Any modifications thereof or deviations there from may be considered as sufficient cause
for rejection. Bids carrying riders or qualifications to the Bid being submitted may be
rejected as irregular.
13.02 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed by printing in ink or by typewriter and the
Bid signed. A Bid price shall be indicated for each Bid item listed therein, or the words
No Bid, No Change, or Not Applicable entered.
Page 8 of 13
13.03 Bids by a corporation must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vicepresident or other corporate officer who is authorized to bind the corporation, and the
corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The
corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. The Bid
of a corporation, which is signed by a person other than a corporate officer, must be
accompanied by evidence of authority to sign.
13.04 A bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership
must be shown below the signature.
13.05 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a
member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The State of formation of the
firm and the official address of the firm must be shown below the signature.
13.06 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidders name and official address.
13.07 A Bid by a Joint Venture shall be executed by each Joint Venturer in the manner indicated
on the Bid form. The official address of the Joint Venture must be shown below the
signature.
13.08 All signatures are to be in ink and names must be typed or printed below the signature.
The title of the person(s) executing the Bid shall be clearly indicated beneath the
signature.
13.09 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of
which must be filled in on the Bid Form). Bids in which all issued addenda are not
acknowledged will be considered incomplete and will not be read.
13.010 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown.
13.011 Current Montana Contractors registration number, if any, must be shown.
ARTICLE 14- BASIS OF BID; EVALUATION OF BIDS

14.01 Bids.
A.
Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price and/or lump sum basis for each item of
Work listed in the Bid schedule as provided in the Bid form. The Bid will not be
considered unless the Bid Form contains prices for all unit price and/or lump sum
items, and options, as shown on the Bid Form. Bids and totals shall be shown
legibly in their proper locations. The total amount of the Bid shall be legibly
written and numerically presented in the proper places and the Bid Form shall be
Page 9 of 13
manually signed.
B.
The total of all estimated prices for the work will be determined as the sum of the
products of the estimated quantity of each item and the unit price bid for the item.
The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with
paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions.
C.
Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit price will be
resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of
any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the
correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of
the words.
D.
There are two base bid schedules and one optional bid schedule as part of this
project. The sum total of the TWO BASE BID SCHEDULES ONLY will be
used to determine the low bidder for the project. The prices contained in the
Optional Bid Schedule will not be used to determine the low bidder. The
Optional Bid Schedule will be awarded at the discretion of Missoula County
based on available funds. Missoula County may exercise its right to award the
work associated with Optional Bid Schedule up to 90 calendar days after the bid
opening date to the Successful Bidder.
ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITTAL OF BID

15.01 Each prospective Bidder is to execute one copy of the Bidding Documents. The Bid form
is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security along with additional documents,
if any, as identified in the Special Provisions.
15.02 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place
indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope,
plainly marked with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the
Project for which the bid is submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and, shall be
accompanied by the Bid Security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail
or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a
separate envelope plainly marked on the outside with the notation BID ENCLOSED. A
mailed bid shall be addressed to the address shown in the Invitation To Bid.
15.03
A.
The Bid will not be considered unless accompanied by proper Bid Security in
accordance with Article 8 of these Instruction to Bidders.
B.
Alternative Bids will not be considered unless called for.

Page 10 of 13
C.
Bids by telephone, telegraph, fax or other telecommunication systems will not be

considered.
ARTICLE 16- MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

16.01 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by art appropriate document duly executed in the
manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids as called for in the Invitation
to Bid. Requests for modification or withdrawal must be written and must be signed in
the same manner and by the same person(s) who signed the Bid.
16.02 If, within twenty-four hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written
notice with OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction
of OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid,
that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the
Work is rebid or negotiated, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the
Work.
ARTICLE 17- OPENING OF BIDS

17.01 Bids will be opened at the time set for opening in the Invitation to Bid and, unless
obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base
Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of
Bids.
ARTICLE 18 BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

18.01 All bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid
opening, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid
security prior to the end of this period.
ARTICLE 19- AWARD OF CONTRACT

19.01 OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, including without limitation,
nonconforming, non responsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. OWNER further
reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry
and evaluation, to be non-responsible. OWNER also reserves the right to waive all
informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract
terms with the Successful Bidder. OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any
Page 11 of 13
Bidder if OWNER believes it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an
award to that Bidder whether because Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified
or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria
established by OWNER.
19.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or
different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder
has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for disqualification of the
Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that bidder has an interest.
19.03 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the
prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be
requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
19.04 In evaluating Bidders, OWNER will consider the qualifications of Bidders and may
consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other
individuals or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities must be submitted as provided
in the Special Provisions.
19.05 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to establish the
responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors,
Suppliers, individuals or entities to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
19.06 If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will award the Contract to the responsible
bidder whose Bid, conforming with all material terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents, is lowest price, in the best interest of the Project, and other factors
considered, The OWNER reserves the right to accept or reject the Bids, or portions of
Bids if denoted in the Bid as separate schedules, and to award more than one Bid or
schedule for the same Bid if any of the aforementioned combination of Bids or schedules
will be in the best interest of the OWNER. The OWNER reserves the right to cancel the
award of any Agreement at any time before the complete execution of said Agreement by
all parties without any liability against the OWNER.
ARTICLE 20 CONTRACT SECURITY

20.01 Article 5 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary
Conditions, sets forth OWNERs requirements as to Performance Bond, Payment Bond,
and certificates of insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed
Agreement to OWNER, it must be accompanied by such Bonds and insurance.

Page 12 of 13
ARTICLE 21- SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

21.01 When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be
accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with the
other Contract Documents which are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto.
Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver at least six
(6) counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER. Within fifteen
(15) days thereafter OWNER shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Successful
Bidder with a complete set of the Drawings and Specifications.
ARTICLE 22- STATE LAWS AND REGULATIONS

22.01 All applicable laws, ordinances and the rules and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract throughout. State
laws and ordinances which the CONTRACTOR must comply with, include but are not
limited to, those involving workmens compensation insurance, contractor registration,
employment preference to Montana contractors and Montana residents, and gross receipts
tax.1
END OF SECTION 00200

Page 13 of 13
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:
Missoula to Lolo Trail_
(Name of Project)
_____________________________Missoula County
(Location)
CONTRACT IDENTIFICATION AND NUMBER:
Missoula to Lolo Trail

Missoula County Project #12-5736
THIS BID SUBMITTED TO:
(Organization)
(Street; P.O. Box)
(City)
(State)
(Zip Code)
1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents, to perform and furnish all
Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times
indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents.
2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, and
Instructions to Bidders, including without limitations those dealing with the disposition of Bid
Security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the Bid opening, or
for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.

BID FORM
Page 1 of 11
3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as set forth in the Agreement, that:
A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, other related data
identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby
acknowledged:
Addendum No.
___________
___________
___________
Addendum Date
__________
__________
__________
B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general,
local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work
C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and
Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Bidder has carefully studied all (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities)
which have been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General
Conditions, and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazard Environmental Condition, if any, which has
been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.
E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so)
all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data
concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site
which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the
Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto.
F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, studies or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at
the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the
Bidding Documents.
G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of the Work to be performed by Owner and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations
obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data with the Bidding
Documents.

BID FORM
Page 2 of 11
I. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution
thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder .
J. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted.
4.01 Bidder further represents that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf
of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or
rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly
induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or
induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by
collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over Owner.
The Bidder certifies that no official of the Owner, Engineer or any member of such officials
immediate family, has direct or indirect interest in the pecuniary profits or Contracts of the Bidder.
5.01 The Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the
following price(s):
BASE SCHEDULE (COUNTY)
ITEM NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
101
MOBILIZATION
LPSM
102
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
LPSM
103
SOIL EROSION CONTROL
LPSM
104
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
22.0
ACRE
105
REMOVAL OF GUARDRAIL
226
LNFT
106
REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT, ASPHALT
7700
SQYD
107
REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER
1750
LNFT
108
REMOVAL OF SIDEWALK
790
SQYD
109
REMOVAL OF UTILITY POLE
EACH
110
EXCAVATION
14500
CUYD
111
SUB-EXCAVATION
500
CUYD
112
IMPORTED BORROW
92500
TON
113
RECYCLED ASPHALT BASE
5400
CUYD
114
MINOR HOT ASPHALT PAVEMENT
4800
TON
115
GEOGRID, BIAXIAL
9550
SQYD
116
PERMANENT TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT
2850
SQYD
117
18-INCH PIPE CULVERT
12
LNFT
118
80
LNFT

BID FORM
Page 3 of 11
UNIT
PRICE
AMOUNT
119
16
LNFT
120
FLARED END SECTION, FET
EACH
121
SUMP
EACH
122
RETAINING WALL
1154
SQYD
123
CURB AND GUTTER, CONCRETE
1950
LNFT
124
SIDEWALK, CONCRETE 4" THICKNESS
2200
SQYD
125
700
SQYD
126
TRUNCATED DOMES
1100
SQFT
127
BOULDER PLACEMENT
22
EACH
128
GAURDRAIL SYSTEM
550.0
LNFT
129
GUARDRAIL END TERMINAL
EACH
130
REMOVE AND RESET GUARDRAIL SYSTEM
850
LNFT
131
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
30000
EACH
132
PLACE CONSERVED TOPSOIL
13.0
ACRE
133
13.0
ACRE
21
EACH
135
SEEDING, DRY METHOD

SIGN SYSTEM, PERMANENT TRAFFIC
CONTROL
SIGN SYSTEM, PEDESTRIAN SIGNS
20
EACH
136
REMOVE AND RESET SIGN
54
EACH
137
REMOVE AND REPLACE MAILBOX
EACH
138
WOOD POST AND POLE FENCE
6700
LNFT
139
SMOOTH WIRE, WOOD POST FENCE
600
LNFT
140
HANDRAIL
400
LNFT
141
4" DIA CONDUIT CROSSING TRAIL
600
LNFT
142
PAVEMENT MARKINGS, EPOXY
LPSM
143
300800
EACH
EACH
EACH
EACH
14
EACH
EACH
149
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

RELOCATE EXISTING UTILITIES,
OVERHEAD STREET LAMP
RELOCATE EXISTING UTILITIES TRAIL
LIGHT
CAP EXISTING WELL
PUSH BUTTON, PEDESTRIAN, APS WITH
VOICE MESSAGING
SIGNAL POLE, PEDESTRIAN, TYPE I-100,
CONCRETE BASE
LED COUNTDOWN SIGNAL INDICATOR
14
EACH
150
PULL BOX, COMPOSITE, TYPE 2
EACH
151
REMOVE SIGNAL POLE, PEDESTRIAN
EACH
152
BICYCLE AND PEDESTRIAN COUNTER
EACH
153
W-BEAM GUARDRAIL STIFFENING & RUB

RAIL
3450
LNFT
134
144
145
146
147
148

BID FORM
Page 4 of 11
$1.00
$30,000
154
CONCRETE - CLASS DECK
95
CUYD
155
SCUPPER
16
EACH
156
JOINT SEALS - SILICONE
15
LNFT
157
REINFORCING STEEL - EPOXY COATED
11000
LB
158
STRUCTURAL STEEL - MISC.
LPSM
159
PEDESTRIAN RAIL
358
LNFT
160
HAND RAIL
354
LNFT
161
REMOVE BRIDGE RAIL
701
LNFT
162
POLYMER OVERLAY
395
SQYD
163
PREPARE DECK
625
SQYD
BASE SCHEDULE (COUNTY) PRICE $____________________________________________

(Figures)
BASE SCHEDULE (COUNTY) PRICE _____________________________________________
(Words)
BASE SCHEDULE (CITY)

ITEM NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
201
MOBILIZATION
LPSM
202
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
LPSM
203
SOIL EROSION CONTROL
LPSM
204
3.00
ACRE
205
REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT, ASPHALT
1650
SQYD
206
REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER
130
LNFT
207
REMOVAL OF SIDEWALK
80
SQYD
208
REMOVAL OF CHAINLINK FENCE & HEDGE
2000
LNFT
209
EXCAVATION
550
CUYD
210
IMPORTED BORROW
8950
TON
211
ROOT INHIBITOR
LPSM
212
RECYCLED ASPHALT BASE
1000
CUYD
213
MINOR HOT ASPHALT PAVEMENT
900
TON
214
28
LNFT
215
160
LNFT
th
Section 00300 6 Edition

BID FORM
Page 5 of 11
UNIT
PRICE
AMOUNT
216
SUMP
EACH
217
CATCH BASIN
EACH
218
RETAINING WALL
85
SQYD
219
CURB AND GUTTER, CONCRETE
3550
LNFT
220
35
SQYD
221
50
SQYD
222
TRUNCATED DOMES
130
SQFT
223
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
5000
EACH
224
PLACE TOPSOIL
800
CUYD
225
SEEDING, DRY METHOD
1.5
ACRE
226
SIGN SYSTEM, PERMANENT TRAFFIC CONTROL
EACH
227
REMOVE AND RESET SIGN
EACH
228
REMOVE AND RESET CHAINLINK FENCE, 6 FT

TALL
890
LNFT
229
TEMPORARY FENCE
700
LNFT
230
REMOVE AND REPLACE MAILBOX
EACH
231
RELOCATE FIRE HYDRANT
EACH
232
4" DIA CONDUIT CROSSING
350
LNFT
233
PAVEMENT MARKINGS, EPOXY
LPSM
234
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
45000
EACH
235
PUSH BUTTON, PEDESTRIAN, APS WITH VOICE

MESSAGING
EACH
236
IRRIGATION WELL
EACH
$1.00
$5,000
BASE SCH. (CITY) PRICE $_______________________________________________

(Figures)
BASE SCH. (CITY) PRICE ________________________________________________
(Words)
TOTAL ESTIMATED PRICE BASE BID $________________________________________
(COUNTY + CITY)
(Figures)
TOTAL ESTIMATED PRICE BASE BID $________________________________________
(COUNTY + CITY)
(Words)
CONTRACT TIME = 200 WORKING DAYS [BASE BID (COUNTY) + BASE BID (CITY)]

BID FORM
Page 6 of 11
OPTIONAL BID SCHEDULE 1
ITEM NO.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
UNIT
401
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
LPSM
402
1-3/4 CAL. B&B DECIDUOUS TREES
38
EACH
403
B&B CONIFER TREES
14
EACH
404
LANDSCAPE SHRUBS
89
EACH
405
LANDSCAPE GRASSES
82
EACH
406
LANDSCAPE MULCH, 4 DEPTH
7500
SQFT
407
LANDSCAPE EDGER
340
LNFT
408
TOPSOIL IN LANDSCAPE POCKETS, 8 INCH

ADDITIONAL DEPTH
200
CUYD
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
TOTAL ESTIMATED PRICE $_______________________________________________

(Figures)
TOTAL ESTIMATED PRICE $_______________________________________________
(Words)
Note: No additional contract time will be allowed with the selection of this bid option.
A. Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with paragraph 11.03.B. of the General
Conditions.
B. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the
purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on
actual quantities provided, determined as provided in the Contract Documents.
C. The undersigned agrees that the unit prices shall govern in checking the Bid, and should
a discrepancy exist in the Total Estimated Price and Total Amount of Unit Prices Bid as listed
above after extensions are checked and corrections made, if any, the Total Amount of Unit Prices
Bid as corrected shall be used in awarding this Contract.
D. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids.
6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially completed and competed and ready for final
payment in accordance with 14.07 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the
number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.

BID FORM
Page 7 of 11
6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of
failure to complete the Work within the times specified above, which shall be stated in the
Agreement.
7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of the Bid:
A. Required Bid security in the amount of 10% of the maximum Bid price including
alternates, if any, and in the form of a Bid Bond identified in the Instructions To Bidders.

BID FORM
Page 8 of 11
8.01 The terms used in this Bid with the initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in the
Instructions To Bidders, General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.
SUBMITTED on
,
(Date)
Montana Contractor's Registration # (if any)
Employers Tax ID No. ____________________________________________

If BIDDER is:
An Individual:
(Name typed or printed)
By:
(Individual's Signature)
Doing business as:
Business Address:
Phone No.:
FAX No:
A Partnership:
(Partnership Name)
By:
(Signature)
(Name, typed or printed)
Business Address:
Phone No.:
FAX No:

BID FORM
Page 9 of 11
A Corporation:
(Corporation Name)
State of Incorporation:
Type(General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability):
By:
(Signature of person authorized to sign)
Title:
Attest:
(Signature)
Business Address:
Phone No.:
FAX No:
Date of Qualification To Do Business Is:
(Corporate Seal)
A Joint Venture:
Each Joint Venture Must Sign
Joint Venturer Name:

(Name)
By:
(Signature of Joint Venture Partner)
Name:
(Name, printed or typed)
Title:
Business Address:
Phone No.:
FAX No:

BID FORM
Page 10 of 11
Joint Venturer Name:

(Name)
By:
(Signature of Joint Venture Partner)
Name:
(Name, printed or typed)
Title:
Business Address:
Phone No.:
FAX No:
Address of Joint Venture for Receipt of Official Communication:

Address:
Phone No.:
FAX No:
(Each Joint Venture must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership and
corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.)
END OF SECTION

BID FORM
Page 11 of 11
PENAL SUM FORM
BID BOND
Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
BIDDER (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
BID
Bid Due Date:
Description (Project Name and Include Location):
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Bid due date):
Penal sum
(Words)
$
(Figures)
Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause
this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
BIDDER
SURETY
(Seal)
(Seal)
Bidders Name and Corporate Seal
Suretys Name and Corporate Seal
By:
By:
Signature
Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)
Print Name
Print Name
Title
Title
Attest:
Attest:
Signature
Signature
Title
Title
Note: Above addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional
parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
EJCDC C-430 Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form)
Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 1 of 2
PENAL SUM FORM

1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors,
and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of
the penal sum is the extent of Bidders and Suretys liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this
Bond shall be Owners sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the
Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation shall be null and void if:
3.1
Owner accepts Bidders Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or
any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding
Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2
All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
3.3
Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents
(or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when
required by Paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after
receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable
promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of
Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award
including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Suretys written
consent.
6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default
required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after Bid due
date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in
the state in which the Project is located.
8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses
shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United
States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective
upon receipt by the party concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the
authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and
deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any
applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at
length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall
govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.
11. The term Bid as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.
EJCDC C-430 Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form)
Page 2 of 2
MISSOULA COUNTY
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
This is only an example of a standard agreement between Missoula
County and an independent contractor and is not intended to be the
final binding agreement. Some language in this contract will need to be
adjusted to reflect specific requirements outlined in the bid documents.
This Agreement is entered into by and between Missoula County, a political
subdivision of the State of Montana, hereinafter referred to as the County, and
(insert Contractor name) hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, identified
as follows:
Independent Contractor Name:
Principal Contact:
Mailing Address:
Telephone Number:
E-mail Address of Principal Contact:
Independent Contractor Certificate Number:
Identification Number on IRS Form W-9 as provided by law.

1. Purpose
The County desires to obtain the expertise and effort of the Contractor and the
Contractor is willing to perform work for the County upon the terms and
conditions set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, County and Contractor agree
as follows.
2. Independent Contractor
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an Independent Contractor Certificate
from the Montana Department of Labor and Industry as provided in Section 3971-417 MCA. Contractor shall provide a copy of the Certificate at the time the
Agreement is signed and shall promptly notify County of any change in status of
Contractors Certificate.
Contractor is engaged in an independently established trade, occupation,
profession or business. The parties agree Contractor is an independent
contractor and not an employee or agent of Missoula County. Contractor shall
not be entitled to workers compensation or other benefits of employment with
County. Contractor will perform or provide its services free from the supervision,
direction or control of the County except to specify the time and place of
performance. County will not be responsible for the provision, security or
protection of Contractors supplies or equipment.
SECTION 00500-M2LT-CA-AGREEMENT FORM-COUNTY.docx
Page 1 of 10
Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all taxes arising out of the
Contractors activities provided under this Agreement, including but not limited to,
federal, and state income tax, social security tax, unemployment insurance tax
and any other taxes or business license fees as may be required by law.
If required by the laws of this State, the Contractor shall maintain in full force and
effect a policy of workers compensation insurance covering the Contractor
during the term of this Agreement. Proof of insurance shall be required from the
Contractor by the County as part of this Agreement.
3. Required Work or Product
The Contractor shall provide the specific services or tasks or work products as
shown in the attached Exhibit A, which lists the scope of services relating to this
Project. By this reference, Exhibit A is made a part of the Agreement.
Review scope of services to ensure that it is consistent with general terms
of this agreement. The contract can be amended to conform to the scope
of services subject to attorney approval.
4. Performance Schedule and County Assistance
The work will be substantially complete within 160 working days as defined in
Section 1.02 of the General Conditions. Working days will not be counted during
winter shut down as defined in Section 2.08 of the General Conditions.
Contractor shall commence performance of this Agreement on the ________day
of________, 20___ and shall complete performance of this Agreement by the
_____day of __________, 20___.
If substantial completion is not achieved by the ____ day of ________, 20__ the
Contractor will be assessed liquidated damages for each additional calendar day
required to achieve substantial completion. According to the liquidated damages
table found in Section 00200 that was made available to the contractor at the
time the project was advertised, the daily cost for liquidated damages will be
$_____________.
The County shall be responsible for assisting with the performance of this
Agreement by doing or providing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5. Place where service will be rendered
Page 2 of 10
The Contractor will perform most services required by this Agreement at a

location of Contractors discretion. In addition, the Contractor will perform
services on the telephone and at such other places as necessary to perform
these services in accordance with this Agreement.
6. Compensation for Services
For the satisfactory completion of the services to be performed under Exhibit A,
County will pay the Contractor a sum not to exceed $________________
(___________________________Dollars). Invoices must be submitted to the
Principal Contact for the County identified in Paragraph 11 of this Agreement by
the Contractor with complete supporting documentation in order for Contractor to
receive payment.
7. Other Payments
All other payments or reimbursements other than those made to compensate for
completion of services performed which are to be made under this Agreement
shall not exceed $___________(_________________Dollars).
Requests for
payment must be submitted to the Principal Contact for the County, as identified
in Paragraph 11, with complete supporting documentation.
Other payments shall be made at the times, in the amounts, for the purposes,
and to the following parties:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
8.
Public Works Contracts
For public works contracts as defined in 18-2-401, MCA in which the total cost of
the contract is $25,000 or more involving public funds, Contractor agrees to:
a. Give preference to the employment of bona fide Montana residents in
the performance of the work;
b. Include provisions for work that is performed at a project location to:
i. Pay the travel allowance that is in effect and applicable to the
district in which the work is being performed; and
ii. Pay the standard prevailing rate of wages, including fringe benefits,
that is in effect and applicable to the district in which the work is
being performed;
c. Post a copy of the applicable prevailing wage rates in a prominent and
accessible site at the project location; and,
d. Maintain payroll records capable of certification for at least three years
after completion of work under the Agreement.
Page 3 of 10
If the term of the contract is more than 30 months, add:

Contractor further agrees to increase the standard prevailing rate of wages by
3% every 12 months after the contract award date and apply the adjustment
every 12 months for the duration of the contract.
9. Insurance
Consult the Risk Manager about insurance requirements for general
liability, professional liability (aka errors and omissions), and automobile
liability insurance.
Contractor will/will not be required to maintain general liability insurance in the
amount of one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence and two million
($2,000,000) in the aggregate. Contractor will/will not be required to provide
professional liability insurance.
Delete the following paragraph for automobile liability insurance if the Risk
Manager does not require it.
Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile occurrence coverage
with combined single limits for bodily injury, personal injury and property
damage of $500,000 per occurrence and $1,000,000 aggregate per year to
cover such claims as may be caused by any act, omission, or negligence of
Contractor and its employees, agents, representatives, assigns or
subcontractors.
All insurance policies required must be from an insurance carrier licensed to do
business in the State of Montana. Contractor agrees to furnish proof of required
insurance to the County prior to commencing work under this Agreement.
County must be listed as an additional insured on the general liability insurance
certificate for this Agreement unless otherwise specified by the County.
10. Records
Contractor shall maintain sufficient records incident to the performance of this
Agreement to enable the County to document the performance of the Agreement.
Contractor shall allow access to those records by the County and the County
Auditor, any independent auditor employed by the County and to representatives
of the state or federal government. Records shall be retained for at least three
years after completion of the Agreement.
11. Principal Contact for the County
Page 4 of 10
The County official with whom the Contractor must communicate regarding this
Agreement and who shall have the authority to accept completion of performance
and to submit requests for payment to the County Auditor and Commissioners is:
Name:
Title:
Address:
Telephone No.
Email Address:
12. Ownership and Publication of Materials
All reports, information, data and other materials prepared by the Contractor
pursuant to this Agreement are the property of the County, which has the
exclusive and unrestricted authority to release, publish or otherwise use, in whole
or in part, information relating thereto. No material produced in whole or in part
under this Agreement may be copyrighted or patented in the United States or in
any other country without the prior written approval of the County.
13. Release of Information
No information relevant to any work completed or in progress shall be disclosed
to the third parties or released by the Contractor without prior approval of the
County.
14. Termination
Select the desired termination provision. If unsure which to use, consult
the County Attorneys office.
For mutual termination, select:
This Agreement may be terminated at any time by mutual written and
signed consent of both parties.
For unilateral termination, select:
This Agreement may be terminated by either party unilaterally by giving
notice of termination in writing at least _____ days prior to the date of the
intended termination.
If the Agreement is terminated prior to completion, County shall be responsible
for paying Contractor for completed and accepted work and billed to the County
as provided in Paragraphs 6 and 7 within thirty (30) days of termination.
15. Failure to Perform
Page 5 of 10
Upon any material default or substantial failure to perform this Agreement by

either party, the other party shall be entitled to the following remedy:
a) Stop performing or accepting performance of the contracted work until
the matter is resolved;
b) Within a reasonable time of discovery of the defect of failure to
perform, mail a written description of the defect or failure to the other party, and:
1) If the defect or failure to perform can be cured, demand specific
remedial action within a reasonable time certain; or
2) If the defect or failure to perform cannot be cured, specify any
alternative performance which would be acceptable in lieu of the required
performance and a time within which the alternative performance would be
required; or
3) If the defect or failure to perform cannot be cured and no
reasonable alternative performance is acceptable, notify the other party of the
termination of the Agreement as of a date certain and state therein whether an
action for breach of Agreement will be brought.
4) Where appropriate, obtain completion of the performance of the
remaining balance of the Agreement with the original party.
c) If the defect or failure to perform is not corrected or alternative
performance completed within the time certain specified, the party alleging
breach may initiate an action in the District Court of the Fourth Judicial District,
Missoula County. If an action is brought, the prevailing party shall be entitled to
attorneys fees as well as other costs of suit.
16. Income Tax Designation
In the event that the Internal Revenue Services should determine that the
Contractor is, according to IRS guidelines, an employee subject to withholding
and social security contributions, the Contractor shall acknowledge, as the
Contractor acknowledges herein, that all payments to the Contractor are gross
payments and the Contractor is responsible for all income taxes and social
security payments received prior to such IRS determination.
17. Indemnification
Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the County, its employees
and agents, from all claims, liabilities, causes of action or judgments, including
costs and attorney fees, asserted by or awarded to third parties as a result of any
negligent action or omission or willful misconduct of the Contractor, its
employees or agents.
County shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, its employees
and agents, from all claims, liabilities, demands, causes of action or judgments,
including costs and attorney fees, asserted by or awarded to third parties as a
Page 6 of 10
result of any negligent action or omission or willful misconduct of the County, its
employees or agents.
18. Entire Agreement, Modifications and Non-Assignment
This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the parties. All
preliminary negotiations and agreements are merged herein. This Agreement
cannot be changed or modified in any manner except by a written agreement
signed by both parties.
No obligation or right hereunder may be assigned, transferred, subcontracted or
otherwise given to or imposed on any other party in the absence of a written
agreement signed by both parties.
Page 7 of 10
19. Warranty
Contractor warrants that all services will be performed in a professional manner
and in accordance with the standards of Contractors industry. Contractor
acknowledges that it will be liable for any breach of this Warranty.
20. Compliance with Laws and Non-Discrimination
Contractor agrees to comply with all federal, state and local laws, rules and
regulations. In accordance with 49-3-207 MCA, all hiring must be on the basis
of merit and qualifications; and there may not be discrimination on the basis of
race, color, religion, creed, political ideas, sex, age, marital status, physical or
mental disability, or national origin by the persons performing the contract.
21. Place of Performance, Construction and Venue
Contractor and County agree that performance of this Agreement is in Missoula
County, Montana. In the event of litigation concerning it, venue is in the 4th
Judicial District, in and for the County of Missoula, State of Montana. This
Agreement will be construed under and governed by the laws of the State of
Montana.
22. Severability
If any part of this Agreement is hereafter held to be void, illegal or unenforceable,
the validity of the remaining portion or provisions will not be affected hereby.
Page 8 of 10
Insert project description here (in case the signature page becomes
detached from the body of the Agreement):
DATED this _____day of ______________, 20___.
CONTRACTOR:
________________________
BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS

Missoula County, Montana
________________________
Chair
_______________________
Commissioner
________________________
Commissioner
ATTEST:
________________________
Clerk & Recorder
Page 9 of 10
Exhibit A Missoula County Independent Contractor Agreement

Project: Enter project description here.
Referenced to and made a part of the Independent Contractor Agreement
between Missoula County and _____________
dated ___________, 20__.
Under the terms of the Independent Contractor Agreement, ______________ will
provide the following services or tasks or work products:
Page 10 of 10
Notice of Award
Date: __________________
Project:
Owner:
Owner's Contract No.:
Contract:
Engineer's Project No.:
Bidder:
Bidder's Address: [send Notice of Award Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested]
You are notified that your Bid dated

for the above Contract has been considered. You are the
Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for
[Indicate total Work, alternates, or sections of Work awarded.]
The Contract Price of your Contract is
Dollars ($
).
[Insert appropriate data if unit prices are used. Change language for cost-plus contracts.]
copies of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award.
sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within [15] days of the date you receive this
Notice of Award.
1. Deliver to the Owner [
] fully executed counterparts of the Contract Documents.
2. Deliver with the executed Contract Documents the Contract security [Bonds] as specified in the
Instructions to Bidders (Article 20), General Conditions (Paragraph 5.01), and Supplementary
Conditions (Paragraph SC-5.01).
3. Other conditions precedent:
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in
default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.
Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed
counterpart of the Contract Documents.
Owner
By:
Authorized Signature
Title
Copy to Engineer
EJCDC C-510 Notice of Award

Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.
Page 1 of 1
Notice to Proceed
Date: _________________
Project:
Owner:
Contract:
Contractor:
Contractor's Address: [send Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested]
You are notified that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run
on
. On or before that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the
Contract Documents. In accordance with Article 4 of the Agreement, the date of Substantial
Completion is
, and the date of readiness for final payment is
[(or) the number of
days to achieve Substantial Completion is
, and the number of days to achieve readiness for
final payment is
].
Before you may start any Work at the Site, Paragraph 2.01.B of the General Conditions
provides that you and Owner must each deliver to the other (with copies to Engineer and other
identified additional insureds and loss payees) certificates of insurance which each is required to
purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Also, before you may start any Work at the Site, you must:
__________________________________ [add other requirements].
Owner
Given by:
Authorized Signature
Title
Date
Copy to Engineer
EJCDC C-550 Notice to Proceed
Page 1 of 1
PERFORMANCE BOND
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business):
CONTRACT
Effective Date of Agreement:
Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Effective Date of
Agreement):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause
this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
SURETY
(Seal)
Contractor's Name and Corporate Seal

By:
(Seal)
By:
Signature
Print Name
Print Name
Title
Title
Attest:
Attest:
Signature
Signature
Title
Title
Note: Provide execution by additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
EJCDC C-610 Performance Bond

Page 1 of 3
Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns to Owner for the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by
reference.
1. If Contractor performs the Contract, Surety and Contractor have no obligation under this Bond, except to
participate in conferences as provided in Paragraph 2.1.
2. If there is no Owner Default, Suretys obligation under this Bond shall arise after:
2.1 Owner has notified Contractor and Surety, at the addresses described in Paragraph 9 below, that
Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a
conference with Contractor and Surety to be held not later than 15 days after receipt of such notice
to discuss methods of performing the Contract. If Owner, Contractor, and Surety agree, Contractor
shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive
Owners right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and
2.2 Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated Contractors right to complete
the Contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after Contractor
and Surety have received notice as provided in Paragraph 2.1; and
2.3 Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to:
1. Surety in accordance with the terms of the Contract; or
2. Another contractor selected pursuant to Paragraph 3.3 to perform the Contract.
3. When Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 2, Surety shall promptly, and at Suretys expense,
take one of the following actions:
3.1 Arrange for Contractor, with consent of Owner, to perform and complete the Contract; or
3.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Contract itself, through its agents or through independent
contractors; or
3.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to Owner for a contract
for performance and completion of the Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution
by Owner and contractor selected with Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and
payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Contract, and
pay to Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 5 in excess of the Balance of the
Contract Price incurred by Owner resulting from Contractor Default; or
3.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and
with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:
1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to Owner and, as soon as
practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to Owner; or
2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify Owner citing reasons therefor.
4. If Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 3 with reasonable promptness, Surety shall be
deemed to be in default on this Bond 15 days after receipt of an additional written notice from Owner to
Surety demanding that Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and Owner shall be entitled to enforce
any remedy available to Owner. If Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 3.4, and Owner refuses the
payment tendered or Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice Owner shall be
entitled to enforce any remedy available to Owner.
5. After Owner has terminated Contractors right to complete the Contract, and if Surety elects to act under
Paragraph 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3 above, then the responsibilities of Surety to Owner shall not be greater than those
of Contractor under the Contract, and the responsibilities of Owner to Surety shall not be greater than those
of Owner under the Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by Owner
of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Contract, Surety is obligated
without duplication for:
Page 2 of 3
5.1 The responsibilities of Contractor for correction of defective Work and completion of the Contract;
5.2 Additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from Contractors Default, and
resulting from the actions of or failure to act of Surety under Paragraph 3; and
5.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract, actual damages
caused by delayed performance or non-performance of Contractor.
6. Surety shall not be liable to Owner or others for obligations of Contractor that are unrelated to the
Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such
unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than Owner
or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors.
7. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
8. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent
jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located, and shall be instituted within
two years after Contractor Default or within two years after Contractor ceased working or within two years
after Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the
provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to
sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
9. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature
page.
10. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory requirement in the location where the
Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement shall be
deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory requirement shall be deemed
incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common
law bond.
11. Definitions.
11.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the
Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to Contractor of any
amounts received or to be received by Owner in settlement of insurance or other Claims for
damages to which Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on
behalf of Contractor under the Contract.
11.2 Contract: The agreement between Owner and Contractor identified on the signature page,
including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.
11.3 Contractor Default: Failure of Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform
or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Contract.
11.4 Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay Contractor
as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or otherwise comply with the other terms
thereof.
FOR INFORMATION ONLY (Name, Address and Telephone)
Surety Agency or Broker:
Owners Representative (Engineer or other party):

Page 3 of 3
PAYMENT BOND
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of

Business):
CONTRACT
Effective Date of Agreement:
Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Effective Date of
Agreement):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each
cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
SURETY
(Seal)
(Seal)
Contractor's Name and Corporate Seal

By:

By:
Signature
Print Name
Print Name
Title
Title
Attest:
Attest:
Signature
Signature
Title
Title
Note: Provide execution by additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
EJCDC C-615 Payment Bond

Page 1 of 3
1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns to Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished by Claimants for use
in the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.
2. With respect to Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor:
2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and
2.2 Defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless Owner from all claims, demands, liens, or suits alleging
non-payment by Contractor by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials, or equipment
for use in the performance of the Contract, provided Owner has promptly notified Contractor and
Surety (at the addresses described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens, or suits and
tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to Contractor and Surety, and provided
there is no Owner Default.
3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor promptly makes payment,
directly or indirectly, for all sums due.
4. Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until:
4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with Contractor have given notice to
Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner,
stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the
claim.
4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with Contractor:
1. Have furnished written notice to Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner, within
90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the
claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to
whom the materials or equipment were furnished or supplied, or for whom the labor was done or
performed; and
2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from Contractor, or not received within 30
days of furnishing the above notice any communication from Contractor by which Contractor had
indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and
3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to Surety (at the
address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner, stating that a
claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice
furnished to Contractor.
5. If a notice by a Claimant required by Paragraph 4 is provided by Owner to Contractor or to Surety, that is
sufficient compliance.
6. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at Suretys
expense take the following actions:
6.1 Send an answer to that Claimant, with a copy to Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim,
stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed.
6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
7. Suretys total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be
credited for any payments made in good faith by Surety.
8. Amounts owed by Owner to Contractor under the Contract shall be used for the performance of the
Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any performance bond. By Contractor furnishing and Owner
accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by Contractor in the performance of the Contract are
dedicated to satisfy obligations of Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to Owners priority to use
the funds for the completion of the Work.
Page 2 of 3
9. Surety shall not be liable to Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of Contractor that are unrelated
to the Contract. Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this
Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or
otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond.
10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent
jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located or after the expiration of one
year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Paragraph 4.1 or Paragraph 4.2.3,
or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were
furnished by anyone under the Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this
paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense
in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
12. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the addresses shown on the
signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, Owner, or Contractor, however accomplished, shall be
sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory requirement in the location where the
Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement shall be
deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory requirement shall be deemed
incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory Bond and not as a common
law bond.
14. Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, Contractor
shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
15. Definitions
15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor, or with a first-tier
subcontractor of Contractor, to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of
the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms labor,
materials or equipment that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service,
or rental equipment used in the Contract, architectural and engineering services required for
performance of the Work of Contractor and Contractors subcontractors, and all other items for
which a mechanics lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or
equipment were furnished.
15.2 Contract: The agreement between Owner and Contractor identified on the signature page,
including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.
15.3 Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay Contractor
as required by the Contract, or to perform and complete or otherwise comply with the other terms
thereof.
FOR INFORMATION ONLY (Name, Address, and Telephone)

Surety Agency or Broker:
Owners Representative (Engineer or other):

Page 3 of 3
Contractor's Application for Payment No.

Application Period:
Application Date:
To (Owner):
From (Contractor):
Via (Engineer):
Project:
Contract:
Contractor's Project No.:
Application For Payment

Change Order Summary
Approved Change Orders
Number
1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE...........................................................................

$
Additions
Deductions
2. Net change by Change Orders......................................................................................

$
3. Current Contract Price (Line 1 2)................................................................................................
$
4. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE
(Column F on Progress Estimate).............................................................................................................
$
5. RETAINAGE:
a.
Work Completed..............................................
$
b.
Stored Material..............................................
$
c. Total Retainage (Line 5a + Line 5b)..................................................................................................................................

$
6. AMOUNT ELIGIBLE TO DATE (Line 4 - Line 5c)....................................................................................................................
$
TOTALS
7. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS (Line 6 from prior Application).........................................................................................................

$
NET CHANGE BY
8. AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION....................................................................................................................................

$
CHANGE ORDERS
9. BALANCE TO FINISH, PLUS RETAINAGE

(Column G on Progress Estimate + Line 5 above).....................................................................................................
$
Contractor's Certification
The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of its knowledge: (1) all previous progress
payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract have been applied on
account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection with Work covered by
prior Applications for Payment; (2) title of all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work
or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to Owner at time of payment
free and clear of all Liens, security interests and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a Bond
acceptable to Owner indemnifying Owner against any such Liens, security interest or encumbrances);
and (3) all Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents
and is not defective.
Payment of:
$
(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)
is recommended by:
(Engineer)
Payment of:
(Date)
$
(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)
is approved by:
By:
Date:
(Owner)
(Date)
Funding Agency (if applicable)
(Date)
Approved by:
Endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

EJCDC C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment
2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 4
Progress Estimate
Contractor's Application
For (contract):
Application Number:
Application Period:
Application Date:
Item
Specification Section
No.
Description
Scheduled Value
Work Completed
Materials Presently
From Previous Application

(C+D)
This Period
Stored (not in C or D)
Totals

Page 2 of 4
F
Total Completed
and Stored to Date
(C + D + E)
G
%
(F)
B
Balance to Finish
(B - F)
Progress Estimate
For (contract):
Application Number:
Application Period:
Application Date:
Bid Value
Estimated
Quantity
Installed
Value
Materials Presently
Stored (not in C)
Item
Bid Item No.
Description
Bid Quantity
Unit Price
Totals

Page 3 of 4
F
Total Completed
and Stored to Date
(D + E)
%
(F)
B
Balance to Finish
(B - F)
Stored Material Summary
For (contract):
Application Number:
Application Period:
Application Date:
Invoice No.
Shop Drawing
Transmittal No.
Materials Description
D
Stored Previously
Date
Amount
(Month/Year)
($)
E
Stored this Month
Amount
Subtotal
($)
Totals

Page 4 of 4
F
Incorporated in Work
Date
Amount
(Month/Year)
($)
G
Materials Remaining
in Storage ($)
(D + E - F)
Certificate of Substantial Completion

Project:
Owner:
Contract:
This [tentative] [definitive] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:

All Work under the Contract Documents:
The following specified portions of the Work:
Date of Substantial Completion

The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner,
Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion
of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby declared and is also the date of
commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below.
A [tentative] [definitive] list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not
be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance,
heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as provided in the Contract Documents except as
amended as follows:
Amended Responsibilities
Not Amended
Owner's Amended Responsibilities:
Contractor's Amended Responsibilities:
EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion

Page 1 of 2
The following documents are attached to and made part of this Certificate:
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Executed by Engineer
Date
Accepted by Contractor
Date
Accepted by Owner
Date
EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion

Page 2 of 2
Work Change Directive

No.
Date of Issuance:
Effective Date:
Project:
Owner:
Contract:
Date of Contract:
Contractor:
Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):

Item No.
Description
Attachments (list documents supporting change):
Purpose for Work Change Directive:

Authorization for Work described herein to proceed on the basis of Cost of the Work due to:
Nonagreement on pricing of proposed change.
Necessity to expedite Work described herein prior to agreeing to changes on Contract
Price and Contract Time.
Estimated change in Contract Price and Contract Times:
Contract Price $
(increase/decrease)
Contract Time
(increase/decrease)
days
Recommended for Approval by Engineer:
Date
Authorized for Owner by:
Date
Received for Contractor by:
Date
Received by Funding Agency (if applicable):
Date:
EJCDC C-940 Work Change Directive

Page 1 of 1
Change Order
No.
Date of Issuance:
Project:
Effective Date:
Owner:
Contract:
Date of Contract:
Contractor:
The Contract Documents are modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:
Description:
Attachments (list documents supporting change):
CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE:
CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES:

Original Contract Times:
Working days
Substantial completion (days or date):
Ready for final payment (days or date):
Original Contract Price:

$
Calendar days
[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders
Change Orders No.
to No.
:
No.
to No.
:
Substantial completion (days):
$
Ready for final payment (days):
Contract Price prior to this Change Order:
Contract Times prior to this Change Order:

$
[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:
[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:

Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:
$
RECOMMENDED:
By:
Engineer (Authorized Signature)
ACCEPTED:
By:
Owner (Authorized Signature)
ACCEPTED:
By:
Contractor (Authorized Signature)
Date:
Date:
Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable):
Date:
____________________________________________________________
Date:
EJCDC C-941 Change Order

Page 1 of 2
Change Order
Instructions
A.
GENERAL INFORMATION
This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract
Price or Contract Times. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Change Directive must be incorporated
into a subsequent Change Order if they affect Price or Times.
Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The
practice of accumulating Change Orders to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary
disputes.
If Milestones have been listed in the Agreement, any effect of a Change Order thereon should be addressed.
For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract
Times, a Field Order should be used.
B.
COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FORM

Engineer normally initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based
upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both.
Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner or Contractor for
approval, depending on whether the Change Order is a true order to the Contractor or the formalization of a
negotiated agreement for a previously performed change. After approval by one contracting party, all copies
should be sent to the other party for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies after
approval by both parties.
If a change only applies to price or to times, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply.
EJCDC C-941 Change Order

Page 2 of 2
Field Order
No.
Date of Issuance:
Project:
Effective Date:
Owner:
Contract:
Date of Contract:
Contractor:
Attention:
You are hereby directed to promptly execute this Field Order issued in accordance with General
Conditions Paragraph 9.04.A, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price
or Contract Times. If you consider that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is
required, please notify the Engineer immediately and before proceeding with this Work.
Reference:
(Specification Section(s))
(Drawing(s) / Detail(s))
Description:
Attachments:
Engineer:
Receipt Acknowledged by Contractor:
Date:
Copy to Owner
EJCDC C-942 Field Order

Page 1 of 1
This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its
use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated
Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Prepared by
ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE
and
Issued and Published Jointly by
AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES

______________________
ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA
______________________
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS
_______________________
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE
A Practice Division of the
NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS
Endorsed by
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract

Copyright 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between
Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C-520 or C-525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a
change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the
Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC C-001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in
the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions
(EJCDC C-800, 2007 Edition).
Copyright 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794
(703) 684-2882
www.nspe.org
American Council of Engineering Companies
1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005
(202) 347-7474
www.acec.org
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400
(800) 548-2723
www.asce.org
Associated General Contractors of America
2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308
(703) 548-3118
www.agc.org
The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four
EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 Definitions and Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1
1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 5
Article 2 Preliminary Matters ......................................................................................................................... 6
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................. 6
2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 6
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed............................................................... 6
2.04 Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................... 7
2.05 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7
2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 7
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules .................................................................................................... 7
Article 3 Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse ............................................................................ 8
3.01 Intent .............................................................................................................................................. 8
3.02 Reference Standards ...................................................................................................................... 8
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ....................................................................................... 9
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ................................................................... 9
3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 10
3.06 Electronic Data ............................................................................................................................ 10
Article 4 Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental
Conditions; Reference Points........................................................................................................... 11
4.01 Availability of Lands................................................................................................................... 11
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ........................................................................................... 11
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................. 12
4.04 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 13
4.05 Reference Points.......................................................................................................................... 14
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site .............................................................................. 14
Article 5 Bonds and Insurance ...................................................................................................................... 16
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ................................................................................... 16
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .................................................................................................... 16
5.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................. 17
5.04 Contractors Insurance ................................................................................................................ 17
5.05 Owners Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................ 19
5.06 Property Insurance....................................................................................................................... 19
5.07 Waiver of Rights ......................................................................................................................... 20
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ......................................................................... 21
Page i
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ........................................................... 21

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer.......................................................... 22
Article 6 Contractors Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 22
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ............................................................................................... 22
6.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................ 22
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 22
6.04 Progress Schedule and Monthly Updates ................................................................................... 23
6.05 Substitutes and Or-Equals ....................................................................................................... 23
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................................................... 25
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 27
6.08 Permits ......................................................................................................................................... 27
6.09 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................. 28
6.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 28
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................ 28
6.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 29
6.13 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................. 29
6.14 Safety Representative .................................................................................................................. 30
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs.............................................................................................. 30
6.16 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 30
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ...................................................................................................... 31
6.18 Continuing the Work................................................................................................................... 32
6.19 Contractors General Warranty and Guarantee .......................................................................... 33
6.20 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 33
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ............................................................................... 34
Article 7 Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................................... 35
7.01 Related Work at Site ................................................................................................................... 35
7.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................ 35
7.03 Legal Relationships ..................................................................................................................... 36
Article 8 Owners Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 36
8.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................................................................... 36
8.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 36
8.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 36
8.04 Pay When Due............................................................................................................................. 36
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ................................................................................... 36
8.06 Insurance...................................................................................................................................... 36
8.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................. 37
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .............................................................................................. 37
8.09 Limitations on Owners Responsibilities ................................................................................... 37
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .................................................................... 37
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements.......................................................................................... 37
8.12 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 37
Article 9 Engineers Status During Construction......................................................................................... 37
9.01 Owners Representative .............................................................................................................. 37
Page ii
9.02
9.03
9.04
9.05
9.06
9.07
9.08
9.09
9.10
Visits to Site ................................................................................................................................ 37

Project Representative................................................................................................................. 38
Authorized Variations in Work .................................................................................................. 38
Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................... 38
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .......................................................................... 39
Determinations for Unit Price Work .......................................................................................... 39
Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ..................... 39
Limitations on Engineers Authority and Responsibilities ........................................................ 40
Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 40
Article 10 Changes in the Work; Claims ..................................................................................................... 40

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................... 40
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work............................................................................................ 41
10.03 Execution of Change Orders ....................................................................................................... 41
10.04 Notification to Surety .................................................................................................................. 41
10.05 Claims.......................................................................................................................................... 41
Article 11 Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ....................................................................... 42
11.01 Cost of the Work ......................................................................................................................... 42
11.02 Allowances .................................................................................................................................. 45
11.03 Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................... 45
Article 12 Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times ............................................................... 46
12.01 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................ 46
12.02 Change of Contract Times .......................................................................................................... 47
12.03 Delays .......................................................................................................................................... 47
Article 13 Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....................... 48
13.01 Notice of Defects......................................................................................................................... 48
13.02 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................... 48
13.03 Tests and Inspections .................................................................................................................. 49
13.04 Uncovering Work ........................................................................................................................ 49
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ......................................................................................................... 50
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................................................................ 50
13.07 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................ 50
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ................................................................................................... 51
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work ......................................................................................... 52
Article 14 Payments to Contractor and Completion .................................................................................... 52
14.01 Schedule of Values...................................................................................................................... 52
14.02 Progress Payments ...................................................................................................................... 52
14.03 Contractors Warranty of Title.................................................................................................... 55
14.04 Substantial Completion ............................................................................................................... 55
14.05 Partial Utilization ........................................................................................................................ 56
14.06 Final Inspection ........................................................................................................................... 57
14.07 Final Payment .............................................................................................................................. 57
14.08 Final Completion Delayed .......................................................................................................... 58
Page iii
14.09 Waiver of Claims ........................................................................................................................ 58

Article 15 Suspension of Work and Termination ........................................................................................ 59
15.01 Owner May Suspend Work......................................................................................................... 59
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................... 59
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ................................................................................... 60
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate................................................................................... 60
Article 16 Dispute Resolution ...................................................................................................................... 61
16.01 Methods and Procedures ............................................................................................................. 61
Article 17 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................. 61
17.01 Giving Notice .............................................................................................................................. 61
17.02 Computation of Times ................................................................................................................ 62
17.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................. 62
17.04 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................... 62
17.05 Controlling Law .......................................................................................................................... 62
17.06 Headings ...................................................................................................................................... 62

Page iv
ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01
Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial
capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to
both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial
capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs,
and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. AddendaWritten or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify,
correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.
2. AgreementThe written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and
Contractor covering the Work.
3. Application for PaymentThe form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor
during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be
accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
4. AsbestosAny material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is
releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United
States Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
5. BidThe offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the Work to be performed.
6. BidderThe individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner.
7. Bidding DocumentsThe Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents
(including all Addenda).
8. Bidding RequirementsThe advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid
security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.
9. Change OrderA document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and
Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
10. ClaimA demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract
Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A
demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.
11. ContractThe entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor
concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or
agreements, whether written or oral.

Page 1 of 62
12. Contract DocumentsThose items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard
copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop
Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and
physical conditions are not Contract Documents.
13. Contract PriceThe moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work).
14. Contract TimesThe number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve
Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it
is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineers written recommendation of final
payment.
15. ContractorThe individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.
16. Cost of the WorkSee Paragraph 11.01 for definition.
17. DrawingsThat part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which
graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by
Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.
18. Effective Date of the AgreementThe date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes
effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed
and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
19. EngineerThe individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.
20. Field OrderA written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work
but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
21. General RequirementsSections of Division 1 of the Specifications.
22. Hazardous Environmental ConditionThe presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs,
Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances
that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto.
23. Hazardous WasteThe term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section
1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time.
24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or RegulationsAny and all applicable laws, rules, regulations,
ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and
courts having jurisdiction.
25. LiensCharges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or
personal property.
26. MilestoneA principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.
Page 2 of 62
27. Notice of AwardThe written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon
timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein,
Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement.
28. Notice to ProceedA written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which
the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the
Work under the Contract Documents.
29. OwnerThe individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and
for whom the Work is to be performed.
30. PCBsPolychlorinated biphenyls.
31. PetroleumPetroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard
conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square
inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and
oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.
32. Progress ScheduleA schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the
sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractors plan to accomplish the
Work within the Contract Times.
33. ProjectThe total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole, or a part.
34. Project ManualThe bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing
the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or
more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents.
35. Radioactive MaterialSource, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the
Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time.
36. Resident Project RepresentativeThe authorized representative of Engineer who may be
assigned to the Site or any part thereof.
37. SamplesPhysical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative
of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the
Work will be judged.
38. Schedule of SubmittalsA schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required
submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
39. Schedule of ValuesA schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions
of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing
Contractors Applications for Payment.

Page 3 of 62
40. Shop DrawingsAll drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or
information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted
by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
41. SiteLands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon
which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto,
and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.
42. SpecificationsThat part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and
certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.
43. SubcontractorAn individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any
other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.
44. Substantial CompletionThe time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has
progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part
thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the
Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.
The terms substantially complete and substantially completed as applied to all or part of
the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
45. Successful BidderThe Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an
award.
46. Supplementary ConditionsThat part of the Contract Documents which amends or
supplements these General Conditions.
47. SupplierA manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a
direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.
48. Underground FacilitiesAll underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,
manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements
containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater,
storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.
49. Unit Price WorkWork to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
50. WorkThe entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to
be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or
providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and
furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction,
all as required by the Contract Documents.
51. Work Change DirectiveA written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective
Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an
Page 4 of 62
addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen

subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to
emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract
Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a
Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order
following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract
Times.
1.02
Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in
the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:
1. The Contract Documents include the terms as allowed, as approved, as ordered, as
directed or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment
by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives reasonable, suitable, acceptable, proper,
satisfactory, or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or
determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional
judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for
compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of
the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless
there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is
not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake
responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the
Contract Documents.
C. Working Day:
1. The term working day includes all calendar days except weekends (Saturday and Sunday)
and all legal holidays.
D. Defective:
1. The word defective, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or
b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or
approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
c. has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial
Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).
Page 5 of 62
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word furnish, when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other
specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.
2. The word install, when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete
and ready for intended use.
3. The words perform or provide, when used in connection with services, materials, or
equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete
and ready for intended use.
4. When furnish, install, perform, or provide is not used in connection with services,
materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, provide
is implied.
F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01
Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance
A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall
also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.
B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each
deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any
additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are
required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.
2.02
Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project
Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
2.03
Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the
Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A
Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after
the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever
date is earlier.
Page 6 of 62
2.04
Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to
run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence
to run.
2.05
Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless
otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely
review:
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting
and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the
Contract Documents;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of
items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into
component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during
performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and
profit applicable to each item of Work.
2.06
Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer,
and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as
to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling
Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining
required records.
B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to
act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the
Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information,
render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.
2.07
Initial Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by
Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to
Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A.
Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete
and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable
schedules are submitted to Engineer.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of
the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on
Page 7 of 62
Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of
the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractors full responsibility
therefor.
2. Contractors Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable
arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3. Contractors Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it
provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
3.01
Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required
by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part
thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor,
documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the
Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the
indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to
Owner.
C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as
provided in Article 9.
3.02
Reference Standards
A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations

1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,
organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or
by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations
in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there
were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a
Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or
Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set
forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign
to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of
the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions
of the Contract Documents.

Page 8 of 62
3.03
Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies:
1. Contractors Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each
part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and
check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor
shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy
which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected
thereby.
2. Contractors Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the
performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy
within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable
Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of
any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall
not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph
6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by
one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual
knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies:
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of
the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or
discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any
Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract
Documents); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work
(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in
violation of such Law or Regulation).
3.04
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in
the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work
Change Directive.
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and
deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways:
Page 9 of 62
1. A Field Order;
2. Engineers approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph
6.17.D.3); or
3. Engineers written interpretation or clarification.
3.05
Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or
other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its
consultants, including electronic media editions; or
2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of
the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific
written verification or adaptation by Engineer.
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the
Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract
Documents for record purposes.
3.06
Electronic Data
A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or
Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are
limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text,
data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any
conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the users sole
risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies
govern.
B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or
otherwise without authorization of the datas creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees
that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party
shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day
acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.
C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no
representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting
from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing
from those used by the datas creator.

Page 10 of 62
ARTICLE 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.01
Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions
not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must
comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are
unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owners furnishing the Site
or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of
record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and
Owners interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanics or construction
lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
4.02
Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
contiguous to the Site; and
2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and
drawings are not Contract Documents. Such technical data is identified in the Supplementary
Conditions. Except for such reliance on such technical data, Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractors purposes, including, but not
limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any technical data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.
Page 11 of 62
4.03
Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or
revealed either:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any technical data on which Contractor is entitled to
rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and
generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract
Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the
subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an
emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such
condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection
therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.
B. Engineers Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will
promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owners obtaining additional
exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor)
of Engineers findings and conclusions.
C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:
1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent
that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or
decrease in Contractors cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject,
however, to the following:
a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph
4.03.A; and
b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final
commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the
submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or
b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a
result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and
Page 12 of 62
contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be

conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractors making such final commitment; or
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if
any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be
made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any
of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or
subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by
Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
4.04
Underground Facilities
A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents
with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on
information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground
Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the
Supplementary Conditions:
1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such
information or data provided by others; and
2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall
have full responsibility for:
a. reviewing and checking all such information and data;
b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;
c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including
Owner, during construction; and
d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage
thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Not Shown or Indicated:
1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was
not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further
disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith
(except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such
Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer.
Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to
which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the
Page 13 of 62
consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time,
Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.
2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change
Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An
equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the
extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that
was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the
Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been
expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree
on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price
or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
4.05
Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in
Engineers judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior
written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or
property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such
reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.
4.06
Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings
known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the
Site.
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and
drawings are not Contract Documents. Such technical data is identified in the Supplementary
Conditions. Except for such reliance on such technical data, Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractors purposes, including, but not
limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any technical data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
Page 14 of 62
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or
revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified
in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible
for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.
D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for
whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall
immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with
such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph
6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in
writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to
retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly
after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to
timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph
4.06.E.
E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any
affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered
written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has
been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under
which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement
to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or
both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to
be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a
reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special
conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such
condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to
or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a
result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by
Owners own forces or others in accordance with Article 7.
G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition,
provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the
Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the
scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is
responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual
or entity from and against the consequences of that individuals or entitys own negligence.
Page 15 of 62
H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,
and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys,
and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for
whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to
indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individuals or
entitys own negligence.
I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental
Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.01
Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractors
obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after
the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified
in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or
by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the
Contract Documents.
B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided
otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list
of Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial
Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed
by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individuals
authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date
the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond.
C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its
right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases
to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and
Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another
bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and
5.02.
5.02
Licensed Sureties and Insurers
A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by
Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed
or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance
policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also
Page 16 of 62
meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions.
5.03
Certificates of Insurance
A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of
insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to
purchase and maintain.
B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of
insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to
purchase and maintain.
C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance
with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from
the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractors obligation to maintain
such insurance.
D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract
necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor.
E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on
Contractors liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents.
5.04
Contractors Insurance
A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being
performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or
result from Contractors performance of the Work and Contractors other obligations under the
Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier,
or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
1. claims under workers compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit
acts;
2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
Contractors employees;
3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other
than Contractors employees;
4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which
are sustained:

Page 17 of 62
a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of

such person by Contractor, or
b. by any other person for any other reason;
5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of
tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage
arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall:
1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be
written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary
exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional
insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional
insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary
coverage for all claims covered thereby;
2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability
provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is
greater;
3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractors indemnity obligations under
Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20;
4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially
changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner
and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of
insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);
5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may
be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07;
and
6. include completed operations coverage:
a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment.
b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence
satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at
final payment and one year thereafter.
Page 18 of 62
5.05
Owners Liability Insurance
A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner,
at Owners option, may purchase and maintain at Owners expense Owners own liability
insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the
Contract Documents.
5.06
Property Insurance
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain
property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof
(subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or
required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:
1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of
them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss
payee;
2. be written on a Builders Risk all-risk policy form that shall at least include insurance for
physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and
equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss:
fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake,
collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations,
water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may
be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.
3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);
4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in
writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and
equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;
5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;
6. include testing and startup; and
7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by
Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to
whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.
B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property
insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which
will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors,
Page 19 of 62
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them,
each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee.
C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be
purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal
refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to
each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver
provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07.
D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified
in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work
to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The
risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors,
or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within
the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchasers own expense.
E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance
policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and
the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to
commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not
such other insurance has been procured by Owner.
5.07
Waiver of Rights
A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will
protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such
policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or
causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the
event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of
the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other
and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or
resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property
insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors
and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as
loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and
subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused.
None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have
to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so
issued.
B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any
of them for:
Page 20 of 62
1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond
direct physical loss or damage to Owners property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or
resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and
2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting
from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained
on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to
Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final
payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.
C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss
referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment
of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery
against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them.
5.08
Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with
Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear,
subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner
shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance
with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached,
the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account
thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order.
B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of
the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to
Owners exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make
settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may
reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall
adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest,
Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties.
5.09
Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace
A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of
the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance
with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party
shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other
evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to
the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may
reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance
required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in
writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain
prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the
other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other partys
Page 21 of 62
interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change
Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly.
5.10
Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer
A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial
Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall
commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have
acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated
thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the
policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on
account of any such partial use or occupancy.
ARTICLE 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.01
Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific
means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in
and expressly required by the Contract Documents.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident
superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except
under extraordinary circumstances.
6.02
Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work
and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times
maintain good discipline and order at the Site.
B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the
Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at
the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the
performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owners written
consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer.
6.03
Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full
responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment
and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing,
start-up, and completion of the Work.
Page 22 of 62
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified,
shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All
special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit
of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including
reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected,
used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except
as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
6.04
Progress Schedule and Monthly Updates
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07
as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07)
proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract
Times. This will be completely on a monthly basis and will be submitted to the Owner by the
1st day of each month. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General
Requirements applicable thereto.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times
may only be made by a Change Order.
6.05
Substitutes and Or-Equals
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents

by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless
the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent,
or or-equal item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or
material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the
circumstances described below.
1. Or-Equal Items: If in Engineers sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed
by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in
related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an or-equal item, in
which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineers sole discretion, be
accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of
proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of
material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics;
Page 23 of 62
2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and
3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service.
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and
2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the
Contract Documents.
2. Substitute Items:
a. If in Engineers sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor
does not qualify as an or-equal item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a
proposed substitute item.
b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to
determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that
named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute
items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than
Contractor.
c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as
supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate
under the circumstances.
d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute
item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:
1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:
a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general
design,
b) be similar in substance to that specified, and
c) be suited to the same use as that specified;
2) will state:
a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice
Contractors achievement of Substantial Completion on time,
b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in
any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract
with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed
substitute item, and
Page 24 of 62
c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with

the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;
3) will identify:
a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and
b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and
4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of
other contractors affected by any resulting change.
B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique,
sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents,
Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure
of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow
Engineer, in Engineers sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to
that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer
will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.
C. Engineers Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate
each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require
Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole
judge of acceptability. No or equal or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until
Engineers review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a
substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an or equal. Engineer will advise Contractor in
writing of any negative determination.
D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractors expense a special
performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
E. Engineers Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineers costs in evaluating a substitute
proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not
Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall
reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed
substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for
making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with
Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.
F. Contractors Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or
or-equal at Contractors expense.
6.06
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others
A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including
those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a
replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be
Page 25 of 62
required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or

perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other
individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a
specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list
thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owners acceptance (either in writing
or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in
the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other
individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due
investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in
the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No
acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether
initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject
defective Work.
C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractors own acts and omissions. Nothing in the
Contract Documents:
1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other individual or entity; nor
2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of
any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may
otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor.
E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor.
F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
Work to be performed by any specific trade.
G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a
Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in
Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will
contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner,
Page 26 of 62
Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss
covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers
on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier,
Contractor will obtain the same.
6.07
Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including
but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals,
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any
infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or
resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device
specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license
fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.
C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,
or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention,
design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.
6.08
Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or,
if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility
owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.

Page 27 of 62
6.09
Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for
monitoring Contractors compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or
Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all
court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.
However, it shall not be Contractors responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of
Contractors obligations under Paragraph 3.03.
C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective
Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance
of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner
and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any
such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
6.10
Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by
Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are
applicable during the performance of the Work.
6.11
Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and
the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and
shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to
any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas
resulting from the performance of the Work.
2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the
Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise
resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.
3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought
Page 28 of 62
by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified
hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractors performance of the Work.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work
Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials,
rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other
debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the
Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall
remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus
materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the
Contract Documents.
D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in
any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or
adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
6.12
Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written
interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during
construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of
all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the
Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for
Owner.
6.13
Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve
Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of
their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall
take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or
off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for
removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of
persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and
Page 29 of 62
shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall
notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation, and replacement of their property.
C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owners safety programs, if any.
The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owners safety programs that are applicable to the
Work.
D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractors safety
program with which Owners and Engineers employees and representatives must comply while
at the Site.
E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other
individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except
damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions
of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or
negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or
indirectly employed by any of them).
F. Contractors duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue
until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as
otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).
6.14
Safety Representative
A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose
duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and
supervising of safety precautions and programs.
6.15
Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or
other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between
or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.
6.16
Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss.
Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant
changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are
required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is
Page 30 of 62
required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work
Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.
6.17
Shop Drawings and Samples
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in
accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each
submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show
Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to
enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph
6.17.D.
2. Samples:
a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications.
b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog
numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable
Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.
B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of
Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineers review and approval of the pertinent
submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C. Submittal Procedures:
1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:
a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and
Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;
b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers,
and similar information with respect thereto;
c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the
indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation
pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractors responsibilities for
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety
precautions and programs incident thereto.
Page 31 of 62
2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied
Contractors obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractors review
and approval of that submittal.
3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations
that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop
Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop
Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.
D. Engineers Review:
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the
Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineers review and approval will be only
to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in
the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible
with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the
Contract Documents.
2. Engineers review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or
procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents)
or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate
item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
3. Engineers review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any
variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied
with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each
such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop
Drawing or Sample. Engineers review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.
E. Resubmittal Procedures:
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number
of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and
approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.
6.18
Continuing the Work
A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor
may otherwise agree in writing.

Page 32 of 62
6.19
Contractors General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on
representation of Contractors warranty and guarantee.
B. Contractors warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor,
Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is
responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
C. Contractors obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractors obligation to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:
1. observations by Engineer;
2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;
3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related
thereto by Owner;
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice
of acceptability by Engineer;
6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.
6.20
Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,
or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible
property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the
extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or
any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable .
Page 33 of 62
B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or
personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any
individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph
6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or
other individual or entity under workers compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other
employee benefit acts.
C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the
liability of Engineer and Engineers officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants and subcontractors arising out of:
1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions,
reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or
2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the
injury or damage.
6.21
Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are
specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services
are required to carry out Contractors responsibilities for construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional
services in violation of applicable law.
B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,
materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner
and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.
Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed
professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,
certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop
Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if
prepared by others, shall bear such professionals written approval when submitted to Engineer.
C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of
the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner
and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services
must satisfy.
D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineers review and approval of design calculations and
design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. Engineers review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except
design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph
6.17.D.1.
Page 34 of 62
E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria
required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 7 OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
7.01
Related Work at Site
A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owners employees, or
through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such
other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then:
1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and
2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if
any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a
result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility
owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owners employees, proper and safe
access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials
and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with
theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to
properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with
such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or
otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work
with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and
other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor
in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.
C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractors Work depends upon work performed
by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractors Work. Contractors
failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for
integration with Contractors Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.
7.02
Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the
Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:
1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various contractors will be identified;
2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and
3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided.
Page 35 of 62
B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility for such coordination.
7.03
Legal Relationships
A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner.
B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other
contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs
incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractors wrongful actions or inactions.
C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for
the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of
Contractors wrongful action or inactions.
ARTICLE 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITIES
8.01
Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications
to Contractor through Engineer.
8.02
Replacement of Engineer
A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom
Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be
that of the former Engineer.
8.03
Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
8.04
Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C
and 14.07.C.
8.05
Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests
A. Owners duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys
to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to
Owners identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and
tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at the Site.
8.06
Insurance
A. Owners responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property
insurance are set forth in Article 5.
Page 36 of 62
8.07
Change Orders
A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.

8.08
Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owners responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
Paragraph 13.03.B.
8.09
Limitations on Owners Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractors means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for
Contractors failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
8.10
Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. Owners responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set

forth in Paragraph 4.06.
8.11
Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to satisfy Owners obligations under the Contract Documents.
8.12
Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Owners employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractors safety programs of which Owner has been informed
pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.
ARTICLE 9 ENGINEERS STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.01
Owners Representative
A. Engineer will be Owners representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owners representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents.
9.02
Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction
as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design
professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of
Contractors executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations,
Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or
Page 37 of 62
continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineers efforts
will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed
Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and
observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor
to guard Owner against defective Work.
B. Engineers visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineers authority and
responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result
of Engineers visits or observations of Contractors Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct,
control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractors means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,
or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
performance of the Work.
9.03
Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist
Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities
of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in
Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the
Site who is not Engineers consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and
limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary
Conditions.
9.04
Authorized Variations in Work
A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and
are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be
binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If
Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05.
9.05
Rejecting Defective Work
A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that
Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents
or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning
whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require
special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the
Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.

Page 38 of 62
9.06
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments
A. In connection with Engineers authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and
Samples, see Paragraph 6.17.
B. In connection with Engineers authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and
design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see
Paragraph 6.21.
C. In connection with Engineers authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.
D. In connection with Engineers authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14.
9.07
Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineers preliminary determinations on
such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application
for Payment or otherwise). Engineers written decision thereon will be final and binding (except
as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner
and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
9.08
Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of

Work
A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge
of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between
Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of
the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the
performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the
event giving rise to the question.
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If
Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date
of Engineers decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the
purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B.
C. Engineers written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and
Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show
partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or
decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.

Page 39 of 62
9.09
Limitations on Engineers Authority and Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineers authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision
of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise
or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of
any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in
contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,
any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractors means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for
Contractors failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.
D. Engineers review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection,
tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will
only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the
case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate
compliance with, the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply
to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any.
9.10
Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Engineers employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractors safety programs of which Engineer has been informed
pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.
ARTICLE 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or
from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a
Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed
with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).
B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any,
of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a
result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
Page 40 of 62
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the
case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as
provided in Paragraph 13.04.D.
10.03 Execution of Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer
covering:
1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii)
required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owners
correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including
any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a
Work Change Directive; and
3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of
executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and
Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the
Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A.
10.04 Notification to Surety
A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the
general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not
limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractors
responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any
such change.
10.05 Claims
A. Engineers Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09,
shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a
condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such
Claims.
B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant
to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after
the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with
the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data
Page 41 of 62
shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start
of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more
accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be
prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in
Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each
Claim shall be accompanied by claimants written statement that the adjustment claimed is the
entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The
opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after
receipt of the claimants last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).
C. Engineers Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last
submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the
following actions in writing:
1. deny the Claim in whole or in part;
2. approve the Claim; or
3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineers sole
discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further
resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial.
D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be
deemed denied.
E. Engineers written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or
10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor
invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or
denial.
F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in
accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.
ARTICLE 11 COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
11.01 Cost of the Work
A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in
Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the
Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an
adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be
reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of
the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may
be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing
in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and
shall include only the following items:

Page 42 of 62
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the
Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such
employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel
employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the
Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall
include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall
include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers
compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay
applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on
Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by
Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs
of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers field services required in connection
therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with
Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to
Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and
equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be
obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If
required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable
to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with
the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that
the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the
Subcontractors Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as
Contractors Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related
to the Work.
5. Supplemental costs including the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of
Contractors employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not
owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost,
less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of
Contractor.
c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented
from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with
the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of
Page 43 of 62
said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease
when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may
be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the
performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of
property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such
losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor,
any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose
acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the
written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be
included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractors fee.
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the
Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the
Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract
Documents to purchase and maintain.
B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractors officers, executives, principals (of
partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers,
architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents,
expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the
Site or in Contractors principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and
not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in
Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be
considered administrative costs covered by the Contractors fee.
2. Expenses of Contractors principal and branch offices other than Contractors office at the
Site.
3. Any part of Contractors capital expenses, including interest on Contractors capital
employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not
Page 44 of 62
limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly
supplied, and making good any damage to property.
5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically
and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A.
C. Contractors Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractors fee
shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a
Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of
Cost of the Work, Contractors fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.
D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to
Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in
accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to
Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
11.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by
such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B. Cash Allowances:
1. Contractor agrees that:
a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of
materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all
applicable taxes; and
b. Contractors costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,
profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the
Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on
account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
C. Contingency Allowance:
1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover
unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer
to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the
Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
11.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
Page 45 of 62
the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the
estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the
purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the
actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by
Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to
cover Contractors overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance
with Paragraph 10.05 if:
1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and
significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and
2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and
3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of
having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in
Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or
decrease.
ARTICLE 12 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES
12.01 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the
Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph
10.05.
B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be determined as follows:
1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or
2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,
by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not
necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or
3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents
and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the
Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractors fee for
overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).
Page 46 of 62
C. Contractors Fee: The Contractors fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:
1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various
portions of the Cost of the Work:
a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractors fee shall
be 15 percent;
b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractors fee shall be five percent;
c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee
and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is
that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a
fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1
and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a
fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor;
d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4,
11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B;
e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results
in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a
deduction in Contractors fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease;
and
f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in
Contractors fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with
Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.
12.02 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in
the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to
the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph
10.05.
B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this
Article 12.
12.03 Delays
A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount
equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph
12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or
Page 47 of 62
neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as
contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God.
B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as
contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or
interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractors
entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being
essential to Contractors ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic,
abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the
control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor,
then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment
is essential to Contractors ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an
adjustment shall be Contractors sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this
Paragraph 12.03.C.
D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants,
or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor
on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays
within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor
or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.
ARTICLE 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
13.01 Notice of Defects
A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be
given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this
Article 13.
13.02 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,
independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will
have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and
testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them
of Contractors safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.

Page 48 of 62
13.03 Tests and Inspections

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,
tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required
inspections or tests.
B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all
inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except:
1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;
2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph
13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and
3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such
inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the
required certificates of inspection or approval.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection
with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owners and Engineers acceptance of
materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs,
or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractors purchase thereof for incorporation in
the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to
Owner and Engineer.
E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer,
uncover such Work for observation.
F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractors expense unless
Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractors intention to cover the same and
Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.04 Uncovering Work
A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by
Engineer, be uncovered for Engineers observation and replaced at Contractors expense.
B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineers request, shall uncover, expose, or
otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that
portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment.

Page 49 of 62
C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses,
or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05.
D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will
conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any
portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner
to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the
benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any
surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work
A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or
not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it
from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited
to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07,
Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owners special warranty and
guarantee, if any, on said Work.
13.07 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be
defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractors use
by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to
be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owners
written instructions:
Page 50 of 62
1. repair such defective land or areas; or

2. correct such defective Work; or
3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it
with Work that is not defective, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work
of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owners written instructions, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All
claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and
replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will
be paid by Contractor.
C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run
from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or
removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to
such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal
and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
E. Contractors obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or
warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a
waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and,
prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may
do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owners evaluation of and
determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by
Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineers
recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted.
If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate
amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.
Page 51 of 62
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective
Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with
Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents,
Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend
Contractors services related thereto, take possession of Contractors tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and
equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored
elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owners representatives, agents and employees,
Owners other contractors, and Engineer and Engineers consultants access to the Site to enable
Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies
under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable
to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all
costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or
replacement of Contractors defective Work.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owners rights and remedies
under this Paragraph 13.09.
ARTICLE 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
14.01 Schedule of Values
A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for
progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to
Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.02 Progress Payments
A. Applications for Payments:
1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but
not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an
Page 52 of 62
Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as
of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and
equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at
another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied
by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the
materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and
equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect
Owners interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.
2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an
affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the
Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractors legitimate obligations
associated with prior Applications for Payment.
3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement.
B. Review of Applications:
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in
writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the
Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineers reasons for refusing to recommend
payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application.
2. Engineers recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will
constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineers observations of the
executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineers
review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the
best of Engineers knowledge, information and belief:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject
to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial
Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a
final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph
9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractors being entitled to such payment appear to have
been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineers responsibility to observe the Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been
performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or
Page 53 of 62
involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically

assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor
to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.
4. Neither Engineers review of Contractors Work for the purposes of recommending payments
nor Engineers recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose
responsibility on Engineer:
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or
b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or
c. for Contractors failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractors
performance of the Work, or
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the
moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or
e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner
free and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineers
opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in
Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise
or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be
necessary in Engineers opinion to protect Owner from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or
replacement;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with
Paragraph 13.09; or
d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraph 15.02.A.
C. Payment Becomes Due:
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineers
recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph
14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

Page 54 of 62
D. Reduction in Payment:
1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because:
a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractors performance or
furnishing of the Work;
b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of
such Liens;
c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or
d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.
2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will
give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for
such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the
amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any
adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons
for such action.
3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owners refusal of payment was not justified, the
amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph
14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.
14.03 Contractors Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no
later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.
14.04 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify
Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items
specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of
Substantial Completion.
B. Promptly after Contractors notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the
Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative
certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There
shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before
Page 55 of 62
final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which
to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If,
after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially
complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner,
notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owners
objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14
days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such
changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any
objections from Owner.
D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will
deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities
pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety,
and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and
guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in
writing prior to Engineers issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineers
aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.
E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and
complete or correct items on the tentative list.
14.05 Partial Utilization
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially
completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or
which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part
of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractors performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:
1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any
such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete,
Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D
for that part of the Work.
2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers
any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request
Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall
make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer
does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify
Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part
of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with
respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of
responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
Page 56 of 62
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance
with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance.
14.06 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will
notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.07 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment:
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections
identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record
documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments.
2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the
evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and
d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien
rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved
by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor
that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for
which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or
which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid
or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or
receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to
indemnify Owner against any Lien.
B. Engineers Review of Application and Acceptance:
1. If, on the basis of Engineers observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Engineers review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
Page 57 of 62
documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work
has been completed and Contractors other obligations under the Contract Documents have
been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for
Payment, indicate in writing Engineers recommendation of payment and present the
Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give
written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions
of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to
Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in
which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for
Payment.
C. Payment Becomes Due:
1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is
entitled to set off against Engineers recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated
damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
14.08 Final Completion Delayed
A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractors final Application for Payment
(for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without
terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have
been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of
the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by
Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made
under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a
waiver of Claims.
14.09 Waiver of Claims
A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:
1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled
Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06,
from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees
specified therein, or from Contractors continuing obligations under the Contract Documents;
and
2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in
accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as
still unsettled.

Page 58 of 62
ARTICLE 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period
of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will
fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so
fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause:
1. Contractors persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established
under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);
2. Contractors disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
3. Contractors repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or
4. Contractors violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving
Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of
Contractor:
1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractors
tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the
full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or
conversion);
2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner
has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and
3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive
any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price
exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work,
such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such
unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and
damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when
Page 59 of 62
so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or

remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the
Work performed.
D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractors services will not be terminated if
Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure
to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of
said notice.
E. Where Contractors services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue.
Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from
liability.
F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of
Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of
Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C.
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience
A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case,
Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior
to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and
furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on
such expenses;
3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and others; and
4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive
days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on
any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days
Page 60 of 62
to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days
written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment
on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer
has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has
failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven
days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such
amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are
not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an
adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly
attributable to Contractors stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.
ARTICLE 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
16.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a
decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation
will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration
Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall
be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the
Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.
B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall
be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation
shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.
C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineers action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial
pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after
termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:
1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary
Conditions; or
2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or
3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of
competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will
be deemed to have been validly given if:
Page 61 of 62
1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the

corporation for whom it is intended; or
2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business
address known to the giver of the notice.
17.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on
a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction,
such day will be omitted from the computation.
17.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies
available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way
as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise
imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if
repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,
obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
17.04 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given
in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the
Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or
termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
17.05 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
17.06 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of
these General Conditions.

Page 62 of 62
SECTION 00810
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
These Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions amend or supplement the Standard
General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. C-700, 2007 Edition) and other provisions of
the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or
supplemented remain in full force and effect.
SC 1.02 TERMINOLOGY
Delete paragraph 1.02.C.1 of the General Conditions and insert the following in its place:
The term working day includes all calendar days except weekends (Saturday and Sunday)
and all legal holidays recognized by Missoula County.
SC - 2.01 DELIVERY OF BONDS
Add the following to Paragraph: 2.01.A
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor six copies of the Agreement and other Contract
Documents bound therewith. Contractor shall execute the Agreement, attach executed
copies of the required Bonds, Power of Attorney, and Certificate of Insurance and submit all
copies to Engineer who will forward them to the Owner. Owner shall execute all copies and
return two copies to the Contractor. Owner shall also furnish a counterpart or conformed
copy to the Engineer and shall retain three copies.
SC 2.03 NOTICE TO PROCEED

Delete the first sentence of Paragraph 2.03.A of the General Conditions and insert the following in
its place:
Following the execution of the Agreement by the Owner and the Contractor, written Notice
to Proceed with the Work shall be given by the Owner to the Contractor. The Contract
Time will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed.
SC - 2.05 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION

Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 2.05.A.3 of the General Conditions which is to
read as follows:
2.05.A.4 Contractor shall submit a preliminary list of construction equipment with hourly
rates, owned or rented by the Contractor and all Subcontractors that will be used in the
performance of the Work. The equipment list will include information necessary to confirm
the hourly rates per Paragraph 11.01.A.5.c of the General Conditions and these
Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions
Page 1 of 16
Supplementary Conditions including: make, model, and year of manufacture as well as the
horse power, capacity or weight, and accessories.
SC - 2.07 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE OF SCHEDULES

Delete the first paragraph of 2.07.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following
in its place:
Prior to the first application for payment all schedules and documents identified in
paragraph 2.05.A shall be finalized and acceptable to the Engineer and Owner. No progress
payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer
and Owner as provided below. Acceptance of these schedules and documents by either
Engineer or Owner will neither impose on Engineer or Owner responsibility for the
sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work and will not interfere with or relieve
Contractor from Contractors full responsibility therefore.
Add the following after Paragraph 2.07.A.3:
Contractors Schedule of Construction Equipment will be acceptable to Engineer as to form
and substance if it provides the necessary information to reference the equipment and
establish the hourly rates in accordance with paragraph 11.01.A.5.c.
Add the following after Section 2.07:
SC - 2.08 WINTER SHUT DOWN
Winter shut down is anticipated between the dates of November 15 and April 1 inclusive.
Working days awarded under the contract will not be counted during this time period. If
severe winter weather conditions arrive earlier than November 15, or persist beyond April 1,
the contractor will submit a written request to the Owner to adjust these dates. Adjustments
to these dates will be approved at the discretion of the Owner.
SC - 4.01 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS

Add to Paragraph 4.01.C of the General Conditions the following:
If it is necessary or desirable that the Contractor use land outside of the Owners easement
or right-of-way, the Contractor shall obtain consent from the property owner and tenant of
the land. The Contractor shall not enter for materials delivery or occupy for any other
purpose with men, tools, equipment, construction materials, or with materials excavated
from the site, any private property outside the designated construction easement boundaries
or right-of-way without written permission from the property owner and tenant.
SC - 4.02 - SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

Delete the first sentence of 4.02.A and replace with the following:
Page 2 of 16
A. Reports and Drawings: The Special Provisions identify:

Delete the reference to Supplementary Conditions in paragraph 4.02.B and replace with Special
Provisions.
SC 4.03 - DIFFERING SUBSURFACE OR PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
Add the following to the end of Paragraphs 4.03.A.
Contractor to notify Owner and Engineer in writing about differing subsurface or physical
conditions within 15 days of discovery and before disturbing the subsurface as stated above.
No claim for an adjustment in the contract price or contract times (or Milestones) will be
valid for differing subsurface or physical conditions if procedures of this paragraph 4.03 are
not followed.
SC - 4.04 - UNDERGROUND FACILITIES

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.04.A.2.
3.
At least 2 but not more than 10 business days before beginning any excavation, the
Contractor shall according to MCA 69-4-501, notify all owners of underground
facilities and coordinate the Work with the owners of such underground facilities.
The information shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to
existing underground facilities is based on information and data obtained from the
owners of the facilities without field exploration, and as such, Owner and Engineer
are not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of such information or data.
SC - 4.06 - HAZARDOUS ENVIORNMENTAL CONDITION AT SITE

Change the first sentence of paragraph A to read as follows:
A. Reports and Drawings: The Special Provisions identify those reports.
SC- 5.02 LICENSED SURETIES AND INSURERS

Add the following to the end of Paragraph 5.02.A
Without limiting any of the other obligations or liabilities of the Contractor, Contractor shall
secure and maintain such insurance from an insurance company (or companies) authorized
to write insurance in the State of Montana, with minimum A.M. Best Rating of A-, VI, as
will protect the Contractor, the vicarious acts of subcontractors, the Owner and the Engineer
and their agents and employees from claims for bodily injury, or property damage which
may arise from operations and completed operations under this Agreement. Contractor shall
Page 3 of 16
not commence work under this Agreement until such insurance has been obtained and
certificates of insurance, with binders, or certified copies of the insurance policy shall have
been filed with the Owner and the Engineer.
All insurance coverage shall remain in effect throughout the life of the Agreement, except
that the Contractor shall maintain the Commercial General Liability Policy including
product and completed operations coverage for a period of at least one year following the
substantial completion date for property damage resulting from occurrences during the
agreement period.
SC 5.04 CONTRACTORS LIABILITY INSURANCE

Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.04.B:
C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 of the General
Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where
required by Law or Regulations:
1.
Workers Compensation, etc. under Paragraphs 5.04.1 and 5.04.2 of the General
Conditions.
a.
b.
c.
2.
State
Applicable Federal (e.g. Longshoremans)
Employers Liability
Statutory
Statutory
$ 500,000.00
Contractors Liability Insurance under Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04. A.6 of the
General Conditions which shall also include completed operations and product
liability coverage.
a.
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$ 3,000,000.00
b.
Products-Completed
Operations Aggregate
$ 3,000,000.00
c.
d.
e.
Personal and Advertising

Each Occurrence
(Bodily Injury and
Property Damage)
Coverage will include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
Premises - Operations
Operations of Independent Contractor
Contractual Liability
Personal Injury
Products and Completed Operations

Page 4 of 16
$ 1,000,000.00
6.
7.
3.
Broad Form Property Damage will include explosion,

collapse, blasting and underground where applicable.
Per Project Aggregate Endorsement
Automobile Liability under Paragraph 5.04.A.6 of the General Conditions:

a.
Bodily Injury:
Each Person
Each Accident
$ 500,000.00
$ 1,000,000.00
Property Damage:
Each Accident
$1,000,000.00
Combined Single Limit
$ 1,000,000.00
(or)
b.
Coverage to Include
1.
2.
3.
All Owned
Hired
Non-Owned
4.
Contractors Liability Insurance under 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 may be satisfied by

primary insurance or a combination of primary and excess or umbrella insurance.
Primary occurrence limit cannot be less than $1,000,000.00. Deductible not to
exceed $5,000.00 per occurrence on property damage.
5.
Add a new paragraph at the end of Paragraph 5.04.B. 1 of the General Conditions as
follows:
The Contractors insurance coverage shall name Missoula County, City of Missoula,
Montana Rail Link, Montana Department of Transportation, and Owners
Consultants as an additional insured under Commercial General Liability,
Automobile Liability, Excess or Umbrella polices.
6.
The Contractual Liability coverage required by Paragraph 5.04.B.4. of the General

Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts:
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
7.
$ 1,000,000.00
$ 3,000,000.00
Additional minimum insurance obligations as required by Montana Rail Link are

included in this section.
All contracts between Missoula County and a contractor, for any portion of this work will
require the contractor to indemnify, defend, and hold harmless Montana Rail Link (MRL) and any
other railroad company occupying or using MRL's right-of-way against all loss, liability and
Page 5 of 16
damage including attorneys fees arising from activities of the contractor, its forces or any of its
subcontractors or agents, and will further provide that the contractor will carry insurance of the kind
and amount hereinafter specified:
A. Commercial General Liability Insurance This insurance must contain broad form
contractual liability with a combined single limit of a minimum of $2,000,000 each
occurrence and an aggregate limit of at least $4,000,000. Coverage must be purchased
on a post 1998 ISO occurrence form or equivalent and include coverage for, but not
limited to the following;
*Bodily Injury and Property Damage
*Personal Injury and Advertising Injury
*Fire legal liability
*Products and completed operations
This policy must be amended to remove any exclusion or other limitation for any work
being done within 50 feet of MRLs property.
No other endorsements limiting coverage as respects obligations under the contract
included on the policy.
may be
B. Business Automobile Insurance This insurance must contain a combined single

limit of at least $1,000,000 per occurrence, and include coverage for, but not limited to
the following:
*Bodily injury and property damage
*Any and all vehicles owned, used or hired
C. Workers Compensation and Employers Liability insurance including coverage for
but not limited to:
*Contractors statutory liability under the workers compensation laws of the state(s)
in which the work is to be performed. If optional under State law, the insurance
must cover all employees anyway.
*Employers Liability (Part B) with limits of at least $500,000 each accident,
$500,000 by disease policy limit, $500,000 by disease each employee.
A Certificate of Insurance must be provided to MRL prior to commencement of work.
D. Railroad Protective Liability. In the event Missoula County or its contractor desires
to perform any construction or demolition work within 50 feet of MRLs property,
Missoula County or its contractor shall procure a Railroad Protective Liability
insurance policy naming only MRL as the insured with coverage of at least $2,000,000
per occurrence and $6,000,000 in the aggregate.
Other Requirements:
MRL shall be named an additional insured on the contractors commercial general liability and
automobile insurance policies. Such endorsement shall be reflected on the contractors certificate
Page 6 of 16
of insurance and proof of all insurance described herein shall be provided to MRL before any work
is performed by a contractor on its right-of-way.
Any insurance policy shall be written by a reputable insurance company acceptable to MRL or with
a current Bests Guide Rating of A- and Class VII or better, and authorized to do business in the
state(s) in which the service is to be provided.
The fact that insurance (including, without limitation, self-insurance) obtained by the contractor
shall not be deemed to release or diminish the liability of such contractor including, without
limitation, liability under the indemnity provisions of the contract. Damages recoverable by MRL
shall not be limited by the amount of the required insurance coverage.
All certificates of insurance required for contractor performed construction work will be forwarded
to MRL at the following address:
MONTANA RAIL LINK INC.
P.O. Box 16390
Missoula, MT 59808-6390
(406) 523-1529 Fax
If Missoula County, its contractor, subcontractors, or agents, in the performance of the work
herein provided for or by the failure to do or perform anything for which it is responsible under the
provisions hereof, shall damage or destroy any property of MRL, such damage or destruction shall
be corrected by Missoula County in the event its contractor or the insurance carriers fail to repair or
restore the same.
SC- 5.04.B.5 CANCELATION NOTICE
Amend paragraph 5.04.B.5 of the General Conditions by striking out the words 30 days
and replacing them with the words 45 days and as so amended paragraph 5.04.B.5
remains in effect.
SC - 5.06 PROPERTY INSURANCE

Delete Article 5.06.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
A.
Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the work at the site
in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible
amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws
and Regulations). This insurance shall:
1.
Include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, SubSubcontractors Engineer, Engineers Consultants, and any other persons
or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is
deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or
additional insured;
Page 7 of 16
2.
be written on a Builders Risk all risk or open peril or special causes

of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss
and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work and materials
and equipment in transit and shall insure against at least the following
perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft,
vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris
removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and
Regulations, water damage (other than caused by floods), and other
perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the
Supplementary Conditions.
3.
include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured

property (including but not limited to the fees and charges of engineers
and architects);
4.
cover materials and equipment in transit for incorporation in the Work

or stored at the site or at another location prior to being incorporated in
the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been
included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; and
5.
be endorsed to allow occupancy and partial utilization of the Work by

Owner.
include testing and start-up; and
6.
7.
be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise

agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with thirty
days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible or self-insured retention.
C.
The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Contractor in

accordance with this Paragraph SC5.06 shall comply with the requirements of
Paragraph 5.06.C of the General Conditions.
D.
The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Contractor in

accordance with this Article 5.06.A shall comply with the requirements of GC 5.06.C. The qualifications of the insurance company shall comply with the
requirements of SC- 5.02.A.
SC-6.02 Working Hours

Add the following to Paragraph 6.02.B:
Regular working hours are defined as 7:00 AM. to 5:00 P.M. Emergency work may be done
without prior permission.
Page 8 of 16
SC-6.04 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

Delete Paragraph 6.04.A.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer by the 1st day of each month, an updated progress
schedule reflecting the amount of work completed and adjustments to future work. Such
adjustments will be acceptable to Engineer as providing an orderly progression of the Work
to completion within any specified milestones and the Contract Time. No progress payment
will be made to Contractor until the updated schedules are submitted to and acceptable to
Engineer and Owner. Review and acceptance of progress schedules by the Engineer will
neither impose on Engineer responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the
Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractors full responsibility
therefore.
SC 6.06 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.06.G:
H.
As a portion of the work under this contract will be performed on Montana Rail Link
property, the following requirements must be observed by the Contractor:
Requirements for Contractors, Public Employees and Private Individuals
(hereinafter referred to as Contractor) when working on the Railroads
Right of Way
(Note these requirements do not apply to railroad workers and/or contractors or firms working for
the Railroad. Any railroad worker, contractor, or firm doing work for the Railroad shall comply
with the terms and conditions of their contract)
1.01 General
1.01.01
The Contractor shall plan, schedule and conduct all work activities so as not to
interfere with the movement of any trains on Railroad Property.
1.01.02
The Contractor's right to enter the Railroad's Property is subject to the absolute
right of the Railroad to cause the Contractor's work on the Railroad's Property to cease if, in the
opinion of the Railroad, Contractor's activities create a hazard to the Railroad's Property,
employees, and/or operations.
1.01.03
The Contractor is responsible for determining and complying with all Federal,
State and Local Governmental laws and regulations, including, but not limited to, environmental,
health and safety. The Contractor shall be responsible for and indemnify and save the Railroad
harmless from all fines or penalties imposed or assessed by Federal, State and Local
Governmental Agencies against the Railroad which arise out of Contractor's work.
1.01.04
For false work, above any tracks or any excavations located, whichever is greater,
within twenty-five (25) feet of the nearest track or intersecting a slope from the plane of the top
of rail on a 1 1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical slope beginning at eleven (11) feet from center line of
the nearest track, both measured perpendicular to center line of track, the Contractor shall furnish
Page 9 of 16
to the Railroad five sets of working drawings showing details of construction affecting Railroad
Property and tracks. The working drawings shall include the proposed method of installation and
removal of false work, shoring or cribbing not included in the contract plans and two sets of
structural calculations of any false work, shoring or cribbing. All calculations shall take into
consideration railroad surcharge loading and shall be designed to meet American Railway
Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (previously known as American Railway
Engineering Association) Coopers E-80 live loading standard. All plans and drawings must be
approved by the Railroad. The Contractor shall be required to use lifting devices, such as cranes
and/or winches, to place or to remove any false work over the Railroad's tracks. In no case shall
the Contractor be relieved of responsibility for results obtained by the implementation of said
approved plans.
1.01.05
Subject to the movement of the Railroad's trains, the Railroad will cooperate with
the Contractor such that the work may be handled and performed in an efficient manner. The
Contractor shall have no claim whatsoever for any type of damages in the event his work is
delayed by the Railroad.
1.01.06
The Contractor shall take protective measures as are necessary to keep the
Railroads facilities, including track ballast, free of sand, debris, and other foreign objects and
materials resulting from his operations. Any damage to Railroad facilities resulting from
Contractor's operations will be repaired or replaced by the Railroad and the cost of such repairs
or replacement shall be paid for by the Contractor.
1.01.07
The Contractor shall abide by the following clearances during construction,

25'-0" Horizontally from centerline of the nearest track.
23-0 Vertically above top of rail

1.01.08
The Contractor shall not move any equipment or materials across the Railroad's
track unless at a public road crossing, or approved temporary crossing and permission has been
obtained from the Railroad.
1.01.09
Discharge, release or spill on Railroad Property of any hazardous substances in
excess of a reportable quantity or any hazardous waste is prohibited and Contractor shall
immediately notify the Railroad's Chief Dispatcher at 1(800) 338-4750, of any discharge, release
or spills. Contractor shall not allow Railroad Property to become a treatment or storage facility as
those terms are defined in the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act or any state analogue.
1.01.10
The Contractor, upon completion of the work covered by this contract, shall
promptly remove from the Railroad's Property all of Contractor's tools, equipment, implements
and other materials, whether brought upon said property by said Contractor or any subcontractor,
employee or agent of Contractor or of any subcontractor, and shall cause the Railroad's Property
to be left in a condition acceptable to the Railroad's representative.
1.02
Protection of Railroad Facilities and Railroad Flagger Services:

Page 10 of 16
1.02.01
The Contractor must provide notification to the Railroads local track supervisor a
minimum of 48 hours prior to entry upon the Railroads right of way. For this project the local
supervisor is Mr. Dustin Hayes (Roadmaster) who can be reached at 406-370-6683 (cell)
during normal business hours.
1.03
Contractor Safety Requirements
1.03.01
Any Contractor employee, its subcontractors employee, agents or invites
under suspicion of being under the influence of drugs or alcohol, or in the possession of same,
will be removed from the Railroad's Property and subsequently released to the custody of a
representative of the Contractor. Future access to the Railroad's Property by that employee
will be denied.
1.03.02
All persons are prohibited from having pocketknives with blades in excess of
three (3) inches, firearms or other deadly weapons in their possession while working on
Railroad Property.
1.03.03
All personnel protective equipment used on Railroad Property shall meet
applicable OSHA and ANSI specifications. Railroad personnel protective equipment
requirements are; a) safety glasses with side shields, b) hard hats, c) safety shoes: hardened
toe, above-the-ankle lace-up with a defined heel and d) high visibility retro-reflective orange
vests as required by the Railroad's representative in charge of the project. Hearing protection,
fall protection and respirators will be worn as required by State and Federal regulations.
1.03.04
The Contractor shall not pile or store any materials, machinery or equipment
closer than 25'-0" to the centerline of the nearest Railroad track. At highway/rail at-grade
crossings, materials, machinery or equipment shall not be stored or left temporarily which
interferes with the sight distances of motorists approaching the crossing. Prior to beginning
work, the Contractor will establish a storage area with concurrence of the Railroad's
representative.
1.03.05
Machines or vehicles must not be left unattended with the engine running.
Parked machines or equipment must be in gear with brakes set and, if equipped with blade,
pan or bucket, they must be lowered to the ground. All machinery and equipment left
unattended on Railroad Property must be left inoperable and secured against movement.
1.03.06 Workers must not create and leave any conditions at the work site that would
interfere with water drainage. Any work performed over water shall meet all Federal, State
and Local regulations.
I.
CONTRACTOR shall submit form showing acceptance by all

Subcontractors to required contract provisions contained in FHWA 1273.

Page 11 of 16
SC- 6.13 SAFETY AND PROTECTION

Change Supplementary Conditions in paragraph 6.13.C to Special Provisions.
Add new paragraphs to the end of paragraph 6.13.F of the General Conditions as follows:
G.
It is expressly understood by the parties to this Agreement that the Contractor is

solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. The right of the Owner and Engineer
to observe or otherwise review the Work and operations shall not relieve the
Contractor from any of his covenants and obligations hereunder. Contractor shall
incorporate all safety requirements into his construction progress and work
schedules including preconstruction and scheduled monthly safety meetings,
posted safety rules, tailgate meetings, and site inspections by safety and other
inspectors employed by the Contractor.
H.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take necessary precautions and
provide all material and equipment to protect, shore, brace, support and maintain
all underground pipes, conduits, drains, sewers, water mains, gas mains, cables,
etc., and other underground construction uncovered in the proximity, or otherwise
affected by the construction work performed by him. All pavement, surfacing,
driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, grass areas, trees, utility poles or guy wires
damaged by the Contractors operations in the performance of this work shall be
repaired and/or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner, Engineer, and effected
property owner at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for all damage to streets, roads, highways, shoulders, ditches,
embankments, culverts, bridges, or other public or private property or facility,
regardless of location or character, which may be caused by moving, hauling, or
otherwise transporting equipment, materials, or men to and from the work or any
part of site thereof; whether by him or his subcontractors. The Contractor shall
make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with owner of, or the agency or
authority having jurisdiction over, the damaged property or facility concerning its
repair or replacement or payment of costs incurred in connection with said
damage.
I.
The Contractor shall conduct his work so as to interfere as little as possible with
public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, the
Contractor shall obtain approval from the governing party and shall, at his own
expense, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, and other
temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private drives before
interfering with them. The provisions for temporary expedients will not be
required when the Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant
of the private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public
property involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point.
Page 12 of 16
J.
Safety provisions must be entirely adequate and meet with City or State and
Federal regulations to protect the public on these streets and roads.
SC- 6.20 INDEMNIFICATION

Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.20.A. of the General Conditions which is to
read as follows:
While Owner and Engineer may have the right under this Contract to observe or
otherwise review the work, progress and operations of the Contractor, it is
expressly understood and agreed that such observation shall not relieve the
Contractor from any of its covenants and obligations hereunder.
SC-9.03 PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE

Refer to the Special Provisions for identification of the responsibilities and authority and
limitations of the Engineers Resident Project Representative (if any).
SC- 11.01 COST OF THE WORK

Delete paragraph 11.01 .A.5.c of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in
its place:
11.01.A.5.c The rental of all construction equipment and machinery and parts thereof
whether rented from Contractor or rented from others. The cost shall be calculated as
follows and will include the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling and removal thereof for equipment involved only in the changed portion of
the work covered under the cost of the Work method. Transportation, loading and
assembly costs will not be included for equipment already on the site which is being used
for other portions of the Work. The cost of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall
cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. Hourly equipment and
machinery rates shall be calculated from the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction
Equipment, and the Equipment List submitted according to SC 2.05 and SC 2.07, and as
follows:
1.
For working equipment, the hourly rate shall be the monthly rental rate
divided by 176 hours per month plus the hourly operating cost.
2.
For equipment on standby, the hourly rate shall be 50% of the monthly
rental rate divided by 176 hours per month, and the hourly operating cost
shall not be applied.
3.
For specialized equipment rented for a short duration used for change
Page 13 of 16
order work or additional work not part of the scope of work bid, the
equipment rental rates will be negotiated prior to the work being
performed.
SC-l1.03 UNIT PRICE WORK
Delete paragraph 11.03.D.1 and 2 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the
following in its place:
l. the quantity of a particular item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs by
more than 25% from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement, and
2. the total cost of the particular individual item of Unit Price Work amounts to 10% or
more of the Contract Price which is the total sum of all schedules (if any), and
SC- 14.02.A APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS

Add the following language at the end of paragraph 14.02.A.1 of the General Conditions:
Payments for materials in storage shall be based only upon the actual cost of the materials
and equipment to Contractor and shall not include any overhead or profit. Bill of Sale,
invoice or other document warranting clear title for materials in storage will be waived
for the material in storage included in the first progress payment application. However,
proof of payment and clear title must be submitted with Application No. 2 for all material
included in Application No. 1. Without such documentation amounts paid for materials in
storage will be deducted from subsequent payments. Beginning with the second
application, all requests for payment for materials in storage shall be accompanied by Bill
of Sale, invoice or other document warranting clear title as required above.
Add the following to Paragraph 14.02.A.3:
In accordance with state law the Owner may accept deposited securities in lieu of cash
retainage. Retainage may be used by the Owner to offset costs for any of the losses
enumerated in Paragraphs l4.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.d inclusive, 14.02.D.1.a. through
14.02.D.1.d inclusive, or 15.02.C. In addition retainage may be used by the Owner to
protect against loss from failure by the Contractor to complete necessary work and to
offset any liquidated damages due Owner.
Add a new paragraph after paragraph to 14.02.A.3 to read:
4.
Each application for progress payment shall be accompanied by Contractors

updated progress schedule, shop drawing schedule, procurement schedule, and
other data specified herein or reasonably required by Owner or Engineer. The
Owner reserves the right to require submission of monthly certified payrolls by the
Contractor.
Page 14 of 16
SC 14.02.C PAYMENT BECOMES DUE

Delete Paragraph 14.02.C.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in
its place:
1.
The Owner will, upon presentation to him of the Contractors Application for
Payment with Engineers recommendation, review and act upon said payment
request once each month on or about the day of each month stipulated by the
Owner at the preconstruction conference. Payment will become due when Owner
approves the application for payment and when due, will be paid by Owner to
Contractor.
SC- 14.02.D.1.c
Amend the sentence of Paragraph 14.02.D.1.c to read:
entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, including liquidated
damages;or...
SC-14.03 CONTRACTORS WARRANTY OF TITLE

Add the following at the end of Paragraph 14.03.A of the General Conditions:
Neither recommendation of any progress payment by Engineer nor payment by the
Owner to Contractor, nor any use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof will
release the Contractor from complying with the Contract Documents. Specifically the
Contractor shall maintain in accordance with Article 5, property insurance on all Work,
materials, and equipment whether incorporated in the project or not and whether included
in an application for payment or not, for the hull insurable value thereof. Passing title to
Owner for materials and equipment included in an application for payment does not
relieve the Contractor of the Contractors obligation to provide insurance (including
property insurance) as required in Article 5 of the General Conditions and these
Supplementary Conditions. All insurance shall remain in effect as provided in Article 5.
SC- 14.05 PARTIAL UTILIZATION

Add the following to Paragraph 14.05.A:
Owner has the right to take possession of or use any completed or substantially
completed portions of the work at any time, but such taking possession or use will not be
deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Owners use of any facilities so identified in the Contract Documents will
not be grounds for extension of the contract time or change in the contract price. Owners
Page 15 of 16
use of any facilities not specifically identified in the Contract Documents will be in
accordance with conditions agreed to prior to such use, and any extra costs or delays in
completion incurred and properly claimed by Contractor will be equitably adjusted with a
Change Order. Facilities substantially completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents which are occupied or used by Owner prior to substantial completion of the
entire work will be done in accordance with General Conditions 14.04. Guarantee
periods for accepted or substantially completed work including mechanical and electrical
equipment will commence upon the start of continuous use by Owner. All tests and
instruction of Owners personnel must be satisfactorily completed, and Owner shall
assume responsibility for and operation of all facilities occupied or used except as may
arise through portions of work not yet completed by Contractor If the work has been
substantially completed and the Engineer certifies that full completion thereof is
materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall, without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for the portion of the work
fully completed and accepted.
SC- 14.06 FINAL INSPECTION

Add the following to Paragraph 14.06.A:
After Contractor has remedied all deficiencies to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
delivered all construction records, maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, and other documents (all as required by the
Contract Documents), Owner and Contractor shall be promptly notified in writing by
Engineer that the work is acceptable.
SC- 17.01 GIVING NOTICE

Add the following to Paragraph 17.0l.A:
The mailing address for giving notices to Contractor given in the Agreement is hereby
designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and other communication to
Contractor will be mailed or delivered. The mailing address for giving notices to Owner
given in the Agreement is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and
other communication to Owner shall be mailed or delivered. Either party may change his
address at any time by an instrument in writing delivered to Engineer and to other party.
END OF SECTION 00810

Page 16 of 16
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012

REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
General
Nondiscrimination
Nonsegregated Facilities
Davis-Bacon and Related Act Provisions
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
Provisions
VI. Subletting or Assigning the Contract
VII. Safety: Accident Prevention
VIII. False Statements Concerning Highway Projects
IX. Implementation of Clean Air Act and Federal Water
Pollution Control Act
X.
Compliance with Governmentwide Suspension and
Debarment Requirements
XI. Certification Regarding Use of Contract Funds for
Lobbying
3. A breach of any of the stipulations contained in these

Required Contract Provisions may be sufficient grounds for
withholding of progress payments, withholding of final
payment, termination of the contract, suspension / debarment
or any other action determined to be appropriate by the
contracting agency and FHWA.
ATTACHMENTS
II. NONDISCRIMINATION
A. Employment and Materials Preference for Appalachian

Development Highway System or Appalachian Local Access
Road Contracts (included in Appalachian contracts only)
The provisions of this section related to 23 CFR Part 230 are

applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all
related construction subcontracts of $10,000 or more. The
provisions of 23 CFR Part 230 are not applicable to material
supply, engineering, or architectural service contracts.
4. Selection of Labor: During the performance of this contract,

the contractor shall not use convict labor for any purpose
within the limits of a construction project on a Federal-aid
highway unless it is labor performed by convicts who are on
parole, supervised release, or probation. The term Federal-aid
highway does not include roadways functionally classified as
local roads or rural minor collectors.
I. GENERAL
In addition, the contractor and all subcontractors must comply
with the following policies: Executive Order 11246, 41 CFR 60,
29 CFR 1625-1627, Title 23 USC Section 140, the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 USC 794), Title VI
of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, and related
regulations including 49 CFR Parts 21, 26 and 27; and 23 CFR
Parts 200, 230, and 633.
1. Form FHWA-1273 must be physically incorporated in each

construction contract funded under Title 23 (excluding
emergency contracts solely intended for debris removal). The
contractor (or subcontractor) must insert this form in each
subcontract and further require its inclusion in all lower tier
subcontracts (excluding purchase orders, rental agreements
and other agreements for supplies or services).
The contractor and all subcontractors must comply with: the

requirements of the Equal Opportunity Clause in 41 CFR 601.4(b) and, for all construction contracts exceeding $10,000,
the Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity
Construction Contract Specifications in 41 CFR 60-4.3.
The applicable requirements of Form FHWA-1273 are

incorporated by reference for work done under any purchase
order, rental agreement or agreement for other services. The
prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any
subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor or service provider.
Note: The U.S. Department of Labor has exclusive authority to

determine compliance with Executive Order 11246 and the
policies of the Secretary of Labor including 41 CFR 60, and 29
CFR 1625-1627. The contracting agency and the FHWA have
the authority and the responsibility to ensure compliance with
Title 23 USC Section 140, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as
amended (29 USC 794), and Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of
1964, as amended, and related regulations including 49 CFR
Parts 21, 26 and 27; and 23 CFR Parts 200, 230, and 633.
Form FHWA-1273 must be included in all Federal-aid designbuild contracts, in all subcontracts and in lower tier
subcontracts (excluding subcontracts for design services,
purchase orders, rental agreements and other agreements for
supplies or services). The design-builder shall be responsible
for compliance by any subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor
or service provider.
Contracting agencies may reference Form FHWA-1273 in bid
proposal or request for proposal documents, however, the
Form FHWA-1273 must be physically incorporated (not
referenced) in all contracts, subcontracts and lower-tier
subcontracts (excluding purchase orders, rental agreements
and other agreements for supplies or services related to a
construction contract).
The following provision is adopted from 23 CFR 230, Appendix

A, with appropriate revisions to conform to the U.S.
Department of Labor (US DOL) and FHWA requirements.
1. Equal Employment Opportunity: Equal employment
opportunity (EEO) requirements not to discriminate and to take
affirmative action to assure equal opportunity as set forth
under laws, executive orders, rules, regulations (28 CFR 35,
29 CFR 1630, 29 CFR 1625-1627, 41 CFR 60 and 49 CFR 27)
and orders of the Secretary of Labor as modified by the
provisions prescribed herein, and imposed pursuant to 23
U.S.C. 140 shall constitute the EEO and specific affirmative
action standards for the contractor's project activities under
2. Subject to the applicability criteria noted in the following

sections, these contract provisions shall apply to all work
performed on the contract by the contractor's own organization
and with the assistance of workers under the contractor's
immediate superintendence and to all work performed on the
contract by piecework, station work, or by subcontract.
this contract. The provisions of the Americans with Disabilities

Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) set forth under 28 CFR
35 and 29 CFR 1630 are incorporated by reference in this
contract. In the execution of this contract, the contractor
agrees to comply with the following minimum specific
requirement activities of EEO:
4. Recruitment: When advertising for employees, the

contractor will include in all advertisements for employees the
notation: "An Equal Opportunity Employer." All such
advertisements will be placed in publications having a large
circulation among minorities and women in the area from
which the project work force would normally be derived.
a. The contractor will work with the contracting agency and

the Federal Government to ensure that it has made every
good faith effort to provide equal opportunity with respect to all
of its terms and conditions of employment and in their review
of activities under the contract.
a. The contractor will, unless precluded by a valid

bargaining agreement, conduct systematic and direct
recruitment through public and private employee referral
sources likely to yield qualified minorities and women. To
meet this requirement, the contractor will identify sources of
potential minority group employees, and establish with such
identified sources procedures whereby minority and women
applicants may be referred to the contractor for employment
consideration.
b. The contractor will accept as its operating policy the

following statement:
"It is the policy of this Company to assure that applicants
are employed, and that employees are treated during
employment, without regard to their race, religion, sex, color,
national origin, age or disability. Such action shall include:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or
recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or
other forms of compensation; and selection for training,
including apprenticeship, pre-apprenticeship, and/or on-thejob training."
b. In the event the contractor has a valid bargaining

agreement providing for exclusive hiring hall referrals, the
contractor is expected to observe the provisions of that
agreement to the extent that the system meets the contractor's
compliance with EEO contract provisions. Where
implementation of such an agreement has the effect of
discriminating against minorities or women, or obligates the
contractor to do the same, such implementation violates
Federal nondiscrimination provisions.
2. EEO Officer: The contractor will designate and make

known to the contracting officers an EEO Officer who will have
the responsibility for and must be capable of effectively
administering and promoting an active EEO program and who
must be assigned adequate authority and responsibility to do
so.
c. The contractor will encourage its present employees to

refer minorities and women as applicants for employment.
Information and procedures with regard to referring such
applicants will be discussed with employees.
5. Personnel Actions: Wages, working conditions, and
employee benefits shall be established and administered, and
personnel actions of every type, including hiring, upgrading,
promotion, transfer, demotion, layoff, and termination, shall be
taken without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national
origin, age or disability. The following procedures shall be
followed:
3. Dissemination of Policy: All members of the contractor's

staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and
discharge employees, or who recommend such action, or who
are substantially involved in such action, will be made fully
cognizant of, and will implement, the contractor's EEO policy
and contractual responsibilities to provide EEO in each grade
and classification of employment. To ensure that the above
agreement will be met, the following actions will be taken as a
minimum:
a. The contractor will conduct periodic inspections of project

sites to insure that working conditions and employee facilities
do not indicate discriminatory treatment of project site
personnel.
a. Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office

employees will be conducted before the start of work and then
not less often than once every six months, at which time the
contractor's EEO policy and its implementation will be
reviewed and explained. The meetings will be conducted by
the EEO Officer.
b. The contractor will periodically evaluate the spread of

wages paid within each classification to determine any
evidence of discriminatory wage practices.
c. The contractor will periodically review selected personnel
actions in depth to determine whether there is evidence of
discrimination. Where evidence is found, the contractor will
promptly take corrective action. If the review indicates that the
discrimination may extend beyond the actions reviewed, such
corrective action shall include all affected persons.
b. All new supervisory or personnel office employees will be

given a thorough indoctrination by the EEO Officer, covering
all major aspects of the contractor's EEO obligations within
thirty days following their reporting for duty with the contractor.
c. All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for
the project will be instructed by the EEO Officer in the
contractor's procedures for locating and hiring minorities and
women.
d. The contractor will promptly investigate all complaints of

alleged discrimination made to the contractor in connection
with its obligations under this contract, will attempt to resolve
such complaints, and will take appropriate corrective action
within a reasonable time. If the investigation indicates that the
discrimination may affect persons other than the complainant,
such corrective action shall include such other persons. Upon
completion of each investigation, the contractor will inform
every complainant of all of their avenues of appeal.
d. Notices and posters setting forth the contractor's EEO

policy will be placed in areas readily accessible to employees,
applicants for employment and potential employees.
e. The contractor's EEO policy and the procedures to
implement such policy will be brought to the attention of
employees by means of meetings, employee handbooks, or
other appropriate means.
6. Training and Promotion:

a. The contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and
increasing the skills of minorities and women who are
applicants for employment or current employees. Such efforts

should be aimed at developing full journey level status
employees in the type of trade or job classification involved.
with the requirements for and comply with the Americans with
Disabilities Act and all rules and regulations established there
under. Employers must provide reasonable accommodation in
all employment activities unless to do so would cause an
undue hardship.
b. Consistent with the contractor's work force requirements

and as permissible under Federal and State regulations, the
contractor shall make full use of training programs, i.e.,
apprenticeship, and on-the-job training programs for the
geographical area of contract performance. In the event a
special provision for training is provided under this contract,
this subparagraph will be superseded as indicated in the
special provision. The contracting agency may reserve
training positions for persons who receive welfare assistance
in accordance with 23 U.S.C. 140(a).
9. Selection of Subcontractors, Procurement of Materials

and Leasing of Equipment: The contractor shall not
discriminate on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex,
national origin, age or disability in the selection and retention
of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and
leases of equipment. The contractor shall take all necessary
and reasonable steps to ensure nondiscrimination in the
administration of this contract.
c. The contractor will advise employees and applicants for

employment of available training programs and entrance
requirements for each.
a. The contractor shall notify all potential subcontractors and

suppliers and lessors of their EEO obligations under this
contract.
d. The contractor will periodically review the training and

promotion potential of employees who are minorities and
women and will encourage eligible employees to apply for
such training and promotion.
b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to ensure

subcontractor compliance with their EEO obligations.
10. Assurance Required by 49 CFR 26.13(b):
7. Unions: If the contractor relies in whole or in part upon

unions as a source of employees, the contractor will use good
faith efforts to obtain the cooperation of such unions to
increase opportunities for minorities and women. Actions by
the contractor, either directly or through a contractor's
association acting as agent, will include the procedures set
forth below:
a. The requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and the State

DOTs U.S. DOT-approved DBE program are incorporated by
reference.
b. The contractor or subcontractor shall not discriminate on
the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the
performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out
applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and
administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the
contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach
of this contract, which may result in the termination of this
contract or such other remedy as the contracting agency
deems appropriate.
a. The contractor will use good faith efforts to develop, in

cooperation with the unions, joint training programs aimed
toward qualifying more minorities and women for membership
in the unions and increasing the skills of minorities and women
so that they may qualify for higher paying employment.
b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to incorporate an
EEO clause into each union agreement to the end that such
union will be contractually bound to refer applicants without
regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or
disability.
11. Records and Reports: The contractor shall keep such

records as necessary to document compliance with the EEO
requirements. Such records shall be retained for a period of
three years following the date of the final payment to the
contractor for all contract work and shall be available at
reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized
representatives of the contracting agency and the FHWA.
c. The contractor is to obtain information as to the referral

practices and policies of the labor union except that to the
extent such information is within the exclusive possession of
the labor union and such labor union refuses to furnish such
information to the contractor, the contractor shall so certify to
the contracting agency and shall set forth what efforts have
been made to obtain such information.
a. The records kept by the contractor shall document the

following:
(1) The number and work hours of minority and nonminority group members and women employed in each work
classification on the project;
d. In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor

with a reasonable flow of referrals within the time limit set forth
in the collective bargaining agreement, the contractor will,
through independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment
vacancies without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national
origin, age or disability; making full efforts to obtain qualified
and/or qualifiable minorities and women. The failure of a union
to provide sufficient referrals (even though it is obligated to
provide exclusive referrals under the terms of a collective
bargaining agreement) does not relieve the contractor from the
requirements of this paragraph. In the event the union referral
practice prevents the contractor from meeting the obligations
pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and these
special provisions, such contractor shall immediately notify the
contracting agency.
(2) The progress and efforts being made in cooperation

with unions, when applicable, to increase employment
opportunities for minorities and women; and
(3) The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring,
training, qualifying, and upgrading minorities and women;
b. The contractors and subcontractors will submit an annual
report to the contracting agency each July for the duration of
the project, indicating the number of minority, women, and
non-minority group employees currently engaged in each work
classification required by the contract work. This information is
to be reported on Form FHWA-1391. The staffing data should
represent the project work force on board in all or any part of
the last payroll period preceding the end of July. If on-the-job
training is being required by special provision, the contractor
8. Reasonable Accommodation for Applicants /

Employees with Disabilities: The contractor must be familiar
will be required to collect and report training data. The

employment data should reflect the work force on board during
all or any part of the last payroll period preceding the end of
July.
of paragraph 1.d. of this section; also, regular contributions

made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not
less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs
which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be
constructively made or incurred during such weekly period.
Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate
wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for
the classification of work actually performed, without regard to
skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or
mechanics performing work in more than one classification
may be compensated at the rate specified for each
classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided,
That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the
time spent in each classification in which work is performed.
The wage determination (including any additional classification
and wage rates conformed under paragraph 1.b. of this
section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH1321) shall be
posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at
the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where
it can be easily seen by the workers.
III. NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES

This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction
contracts and to all related construction subcontracts of
$10,000 or more.
The contractor must ensure that facilities provided for
employees are provided in such a manner that segregation on
the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin cannot
result. The contractor may neither require such segregated
use by written or oral policies nor tolerate such use by
employee custom. The contractor's obligation extends further
to ensure that its employees are not assigned to perform their
services at any location, under the contractor's control, where
the facilities are segregated. The term "facilities" includes
waiting rooms, work areas, restaurants and other eating areas,
time clocks, restrooms, washrooms, locker rooms, and other
storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains,
recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing
provided for employees. The contractor shall provide separate
or single-user restrooms and necessary dressing or sleeping
areas to assure privacy between sexes.
b. (1) The contracting officer shall require that any class of

laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in
the wage determination and which is to be employed under the
contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage
determination. The contracting officer shall approve an
additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits
therefore only when the following criteria have been met:
IV. DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACT PROVISIONS
(i) The work to be performed by the classification

requested is not performed by a classification in the wage
determination; and
This section is applicable to all Federal-aid construction

projects exceeding $2,000 and to all related subcontracts and
lower-tier subcontracts (regardless of subcontract size). The
requirements apply to all projects located within the right-ofway of a roadway that is functionally classified as Federal-aid
highway. This excludes roadways functionally classified as
local roads or rural minor collectors, which are exempt.
Contracting agencies may elect to apply these requirements to
other projects.
(ii) The classification is utilized in the area by the

construction industry; and
(iii) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide
fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the
wage rates contained in the wage determination.
(2) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be
employed in the classification (if known), or their
representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the
classification and wage rate (including the amount
designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of
the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the
Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment
Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor,
Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized
representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every
additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and
so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting
officer within the 30-day period that additional time is
necessary.
The following provisions are from the U.S. Department of

Labor regulations in 29 CFR 5.5 Contract provisions and
related matters with minor revisions to conform to the FHWA1273 format and FHWA program requirements.
1. Minimum wages
a. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon
the site of the work, will be paid unconditionally and not less
often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or
rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are
permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor
under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of
wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents
thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less
than those contained in the wage determination of the
Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part
hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may
be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers
and mechanics.
(3) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics

to be employed in the classification or their representatives,
and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed
classification and wage rate (including the amount
designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the
contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the
views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the
contracting officer, to the Wage and Hour Administrator for
determination. The Wage and Hour Administrator, or an
authorized representative, will issue a determination within
30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or
Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona

fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon
Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages
paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions
will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that
additional time is necessary.
Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show

that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable,
that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the
plan or program has been communicated in writing to the
laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the
costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such
benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under
approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the
registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of
trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and
trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the
applicable programs.
(4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where

appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs 1.b.(2) or
1.b.(3) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing
work in the classification under this contract from the first
day on which work is performed in the classification.
c. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the
contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe
benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor
shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination
or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash
equivalent thereof.
b. (1) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in

which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to
the contracting agency. The payrolls submitted shall set out
accurately and completely all of the information required to be
maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social
security numbers and home addresses shall not be included
on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to
include an individually identifying number for each employee (
e.g. , the last four digits of the employee's social security
number). The required weekly payroll information may be
submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH347 is
available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division
Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm
or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for
the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors.
Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social
security number and current address of each covered worker,
and shall provide them upon request to the contracting agency
for transmission to the State DOT, the FHWA or the Wage and
Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an
investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage
requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime
contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and
social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own
records, without weekly submission to the contracting agency..
d. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or

other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the
wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs
reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits
under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of
Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor,
that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have
been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor
to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of
obligations under the plan or program.
2. Withholding
The contracting agency shall upon its own action or upon
written request of an authorized representative of the
Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from
the contractor under this contract, or any other Federal
contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federallyassisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage
requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so
much of the accrued payments or advances as may be
considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics,
including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the
contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages
required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any
laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or
helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part
of the wages required by the contract, the contracting agency
may, after written notice to the contractor, take such action as
may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further
payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations
have ceased.
(2) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a

Statement of Compliance, signed by the contractor or
subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the
payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall
certify the following:
(i) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the
information required to be provided under 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of
Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is
being maintained under 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29
CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and
complete;
3. Payrolls and basic records
(ii) That each laborer or mechanic (including each

helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract
during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly
wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly,
and that no deductions have been made either directly or
indirectly from the full wages earned, other than
permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR
part 3;
a. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be

maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and
preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers
and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records
shall contain the name, address, and social security number of
each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates
of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs
anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents
thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the
Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked,
deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the
Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that
the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of
any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a
plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-
(iii) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not

less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or
cash equivalents for the classification of work performed,
as specified in the applicable wage determination
incorporated into the contract.
(3) The weekly submission of a properly executed

certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form
WH347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the
Statement of Compliance required by paragraph 3.b.(2) of
this section.
rate specified in the applicable wage determination.

Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with
the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the
apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits,
apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits
listed on the wage determination for the applicable
classification. If the Administrator determines that a different
practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification,
fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination.
(4) The falsification of any of the above certifications may

subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal
prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of
title 31 of the United States Code.
In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer

and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency
recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an
apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be
permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable
predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable
program is approved.
c. The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records

required under paragraph 3.a. of this section available for
inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized
representatives of the contracting agency, the State DOT, the
FHWA, or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such
representatives to interview employees during working hours
on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the
required records or to make them available, the FHWA may,
after written notice to the contractor, the contracting agency or
the State DOT, take such action as may be necessary to
cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or
guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required
records upon request or to make such records available may
be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.
b. Trainees (programs of the USDOL).

Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be
permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the
work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a program which has received prior
approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S.
Department of Labor, Employment and Training
Administration.
4. Apprentices and trainees

a. Apprentices (programs of the USDOL).
The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be

greater than permitted under the plan approved by the
Employment and Training Administration.
Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the

predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are
employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide
apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of
Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of
Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with
a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a
person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary
employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship
program, who is not individually registered in the program, but
who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship
Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State
Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for
probationary employment as an apprentice.
Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified
in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress,
expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate
specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall
be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the
trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention
fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe
benefits listed on the wage determination unless the
Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that
there is an apprenticeship program associated with the
corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage
determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits
for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee
rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan
approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall
be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage
determination for the classification of work actually performed.
In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in
excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program
shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the
wage determination for the work actually performed.
The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job

site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio
permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under
the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an
apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise
employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the
applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the
classification of work actually performed. In addition, any
apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the
ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not
less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination
for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is
performing construction on a project in a locality other than
that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage
rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly
rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered
program shall be observed.
In the event the Employment and Training Administration

withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no
longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the
applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an
acceptable program is approved.
c. Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of
apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be
in conformity with the equal employment opportunity
requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29
CFR part 30.
Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate

specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of
progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly
d. Apprentices and Trainees (programs of the U.S. DOT).

V. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY
STANDARDS ACT
Apprentices and trainees working under apprenticeship and

skill training programs which have been certified by the
Secretary of Transportation as promoting EEO in connection
with Federal-aid highway construction programs are not
subject to the requirements of paragraph 4 of this Section IV.
The straight time hourly wage rates for apprentices and
trainees under such programs will be established by the
particular programs. The ratio of apprentices and trainees to
journeymen shall not be greater than permitted by the terms of
the particular program.
The following clauses apply to any Federal-aid construction

contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the
overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to
the clauses required by 29 CFR 5.5(a) or 29 CFR 4.6. As
used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics
include watchmen and guards.
5. Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The

contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part
3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract.
1. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor

contracting for any part of the contract work which may require
or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall
require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any
workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to
work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such
laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less
than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours
worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek.
6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert

Form FHWA-1273 in any subcontracts and also require the
subcontractors to include Form FHWA-1273 in any lower tier
subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the
compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor
with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5.
2. Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated

damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth
in paragraph (1.) of this section, the contractor and any
subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the
unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor
shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done
under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such
District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such
liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each
individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and
guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in
paragraph (1.) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each
calendar day on which such individual was required or
permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty
hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the
clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of this section.
7. Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the

contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination
of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a
subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.
8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act
requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the DavisBacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5
are herein incorporated by reference in this contract.
9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising
out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not
be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such
disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures
of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and
7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes
between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the
contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the
employees or their representatives.
3. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages.

The FHWA or the contacting agency shall upon its own action
or upon written request of an authorized representative of the
Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from
any moneys payable on account of work performed by the
contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any
other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any
other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work
Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same
prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be
necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or
subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as
provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2.) of this
section.
10. Certification of eligibility.

a. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that
neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an
interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to
be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of
the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).
b. No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person
or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue
of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).
4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert

in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (1.)
through (4.) of this section and also a clause requiring the
subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier
subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for
compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor
with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1.) through (4.) of this
section.
c. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the

U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.
evidenced in writing and that it contains all pertinent provisions

and requirements of the prime contract.
VI. SUBLETTING OR ASSIGNING THE CONTRACT

contracts on the National Highway System.
5. The 30% self-performance requirement of paragraph (1) is

not applicable to design-build contracts; however, contracting
agencies may establish their own self-performance
requirements.
1. The contractor shall perform with its own organization

contract work amounting to not less than 30 percent (or a
greater percentage if specified elsewhere in the contract) of
the total original contract price, excluding any specialty items
designated by the contracting agency. Specialty items may be
performed by subcontract and the amount of any such
specialty items performed may be deducted from the total
original contract price before computing the amount of work
required to be performed by the contractor's own organization
(23 CFR 635.116).
VII. SAFETY: ACCIDENT PREVENTION

T h i s p r o v i s i o n i s applicable to all Federal-aid
construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.
1. In the performance of this contract the contractor shall
comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws
governing safety, health, and sanitation (23 CFR 635). The
contractor shall provide all safeguards, safety devices and
protective equipment and take any other needed actions as it
determines, or as the contracting officer may determine, to be
reasonably necessary to protect the life and health of
employees on the job and the safety of the public and to
protect property in connection with the performance of the
work covered by the contract.
a. The term perform work with its own organization refers

to workers employed or leased by the prime contractor, and
equipment owned or rented by the prime contractor, with or
without operators. Such term does not include employees or
equipment of a subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor,
agents of the prime contractor, or any other assignees. The
term may include payments for the costs of hiring leased
employees from an employee leasing firm meeting all relevant
Federal and State regulatory requirements. Leased
employees may only be included in this term if the prime
contractor meets all of the following conditions:
2. It is a condition of this contract, and shall be made a

condition of each subcontract, which the contractor enters into
pursuant to this contract, that the contractor and any
subcontractor shall not permit any employee, in performance
of the contract, to work in surroundings or under conditions
which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to his/her
health or safety, as determined under construction safety and
health standards (29 CFR 1926) promulgated by the Secretary
of Labor, in accordance with Section 107 of the Contract Work
Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3704).
(1) the prime contractor maintains control over the

supervision of the day-to-day activities of the leased
employees;
(2) the prime contractor remains responsible for the quality
of the work of the leased employees;
(3) the prime contractor retains all power to accept or
exclude individual employees from work on the project; and
(4) the prime contractor remains ultimately responsible for
the payment of predetermined minimum wages, the
submission of payrolls, statements of compliance and all
other Federal regulatory requirements.
3. Pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.3, it is a condition of this contract

that the Secretary of Labor or authorized representative
thereof, shall have right of entry to any site of contract
performance to inspect or investigate the matter of compliance
with the construction safety and health standards and to carry
out the duties of the Secretary under Section 107 of the
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
U.S.C.3704).
b. "Specialty Items" shall be construed to be limited to work

that requires highly specialized knowledge, abilities, or
equipment not ordinarily available in the type of contracting
organizations qualified and expected to bid or propose on the
contract as a whole and in general are to be limited to minor
components of the overall contract.
VIII. FALSE STATEMENTS CONCERNING HIGHWAY

PROJECTS
2. The contract amount upon which the requirements set forth

in paragraph (1) of Section VI is computed includes the cost of
material and manufactured products which are to be
purchased or produced by the contractor under the contract
provisions.
T h i s p r o v i s i o n i s applicable to all Federal-aid

construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.
In order to assure high quality and durable construction in
conformity with approved plans and specifications and a high
degree of reliability on statements and representations made
by engineers, contractors, suppliers, and workers on Federalaid highway projects, it is essential that all persons concerned
with the project perform their functions as carefully, thoroughly,
and honestly as possible. Willful falsification, distortion, or
misrepresentation with respect to any facts related to the
project is a violation of Federal law. To prevent any
misunderstanding regarding the seriousness of these and
similar acts, Form FHWA-1022 shall be posted on each
Federal-aid highway project (23 CFR 635) in one or more
places where it is readily available to all persons concerned
with the project:
3. The contractor shall furnish (a) a competent superintendent

or supervisor who is employed by the firm, has full authority to
direct performance of the work in accordance with the contract
requirements, and is in charge of all construction operations
(regardless of who performs the work) and (b) such other of its
own organizational resources (supervision, management, and
engineering services) as the contracting officer determines is
necessary to assure the performance of the contract.
4. No portion of the contract shall be sublet, assigned or
otherwise disposed of except with the written consent of the
contracting officer, or authorized representative, and such
consent when given shall not be construed to relieve the
contractor of any responsibility for the fulfillment of the
contract. Written consent will be given only after the
contracting agency has assured that each subcontract is
18 U.S.C. 1020 reads as follows:
"Whoever, being an officer, agent, or employee of the United

States, or of any State or Territory, or whoever, whether a
person, association, firm, or corporation, knowingly makes any
false statement, false representation, or false report as to the
character, quality, quantity, or cost of the material used or to
be used, or the quantity or quality of the work performed or to
be performed, or the cost thereof in connection with the
submission of plans, maps, specifications, contracts, or costs
of construction on any highway or related project submitted for
approval to the Secretary of Transportation; or
covered transaction. The prospective first tier participant shall

submit an explanation of why it cannot provide the certification
set out below. The certification or explanation will be
considered in connection with the department or agency's
determination whether to enter into this transaction. However,
failure of the prospective first tier participant to furnish a
certification or an explanation shall disqualify such a person
from participation in this transaction.
c. The certification in this clause is a material representation
of fact upon which reliance was placed when the contracting
agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later
determined that the prospective participant knowingly rendered
an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies
available to the Federal Government, the contracting agency
may terminate this transaction for cause of default.
Whoever knowingly makes any false statement, false

representation, false report or false claim with respect to the
character, quality, quantity, or cost of any work performed or to
be performed, or materials furnished or to be furnished, in
connection with the construction of any highway or related
project approved by the Secretary of Transportation; or
d. The prospective first tier participant shall provide

immediate written notice to the contracting agency to whom
this proposal is submitted if any time the prospective first tier
participant learns that its certification was erroneous when
submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed
circumstances.
Whoever knowingly makes any false statement or false

representation as to material fact in any statement, certificate,
or report submitted pursuant to provisions of the Federal-aid
Roads Act approved July 1, 1916, (39 Stat. 355), as amended
and supplemented;
Shall be fined under this title or imprisoned not more than 5
years or both."
e. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred,"

"suspended," "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal,"
and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, are defined
in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200. First Tier Covered
Transactions refers to any covered transaction between a
grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds and a participant (such
as the prime or general contract). Lower Tier Covered
Transactions refers to any covered transaction under a First
Tier Covered Transaction (such as subcontracts). First Tier
Participant refers to the participant who has entered into a
covered transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of Federal
funds (such as the prime or general contractor). Lower Tier
Participant refers any participant who has entered into a
covered transaction with a First Tier Participant or other Lower
Tier Participants (such as subcontractors and suppliers).
IX. IMPLEMENTATION OF CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL

WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT
contracts and to all related subcontracts.
By submission of this bid/proposal or the execution of this
contract, or subcontract, as appropriate, the bidder, proposer,
Federal-aid construction contractor, or subcontractor, as
appropriate, will be deemed to have stipulated as follows:
1. That any person who is or will be utilized in the
performance of this contract is not prohibited from receiving an
award due to a violation of Section 508 of the Clean Water Act
or Section 306 of the Clean Air Act.
2. That the contractor agrees to include or cause to be
included the requirements of paragraph (1) of this Section X in
every subcontract, and further agrees to take such action as
the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing
such requirements.
f. The prospective first tier participant agrees by submitting

this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be
entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier
covered transaction with a person who is debarred,
suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from
participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by
the department or agency entering into this transaction.
g. The prospective first tier participant further agrees by
submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled
"Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility
and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transactions,"
provided by the department or contracting agency, entering
into this covered transaction, without modification, in all lower
tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier
covered transactions exceeding the $25,000 threshold.
X. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT,

SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY
EXCLUSION
contracts, design-build contracts, subcontracts, lower-tier
subcontracts, purchase orders, lease agreements, consultant
contracts or any other covered transaction requiring FHWA
approval or that is estimated to cost $25,000 or more as
defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200.
h. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a

certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered
transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or
voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it
knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant is
responsible for ensuring that its principals are not suspended,
debarred, or otherwise ineligible to participate in covered
transactions. To verify the eligibility of its principals, as well as
the eligibility of any lower tier prospective participants, each
participant may, but is not required to, check the Excluded
Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is
compiled by the General Services Administration.
1. Instructions for Certification First Tier Participants:

a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective
first tier participant is providing the certification set out below.
b. The inability of a person to provide the certification set out
below will not necessarily result in denial of participation in this
i. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to

require the establishment of a system of records in order to
render in good faith the certification required by this clause.
The knowledge and information of the prospective participant
is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by
a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.
this transaction originated may pursue available remedies,

including suspension and/or debarment.
c. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide
immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is
submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant
learns that its certification was erroneous by reason of
changed circumstances.
j. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph (f) of

these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction
knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a
person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily
excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to
other remedies available to the Federal Government, the
department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause
or default.
d. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred,"

"suspended," "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal,"
and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, are defined
in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200. You may contact the person to
which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a
copy of those regulations. First Tier Covered Transactions
refers to any covered transaction between a grantee or
subgrantee of Federal funds and a participant (such as the
prime or general contract). Lower Tier Covered Transactions
refers to any covered transaction under a First Tier Covered
Transaction (such as subcontracts). First Tier Participant
refers to the participant who has entered into a covered
transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds
(such as the prime or general contractor). Lower Tier
Participant refers any participant who has entered into a
covered transaction with a First Tier Participant or other Lower
Tier Participants (such as subcontractors and suppliers).
*****
2. Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension,
Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion First Tier
Participants:
a. The prospective first tier participant certifies to the best of
its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals:
(1) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for
debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from
participating in covered transactions by any Federal
department or agency;
e. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by

submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered
transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into
any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is
debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily
excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless
authorized by the department or agency with which this
transaction originated.
(2) Have not within a three-year period preceding this

proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered
against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in
connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing
a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under
a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust
statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery,
bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false
statements, or receiving stolen property;
f. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by

submitting this proposal that it will include this clause titled
"Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility
and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transaction,"
without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and
in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions exceeding
the $25,000 threshold.
(3) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or

civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State or
local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in
paragraph (a)(2) of this certification; and
g. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a

certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered
transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or
voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it
knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant is
responsible for ensuring that its principals are not suspended,
debarred, or otherwise ineligible to participate in covered
transactions. To verify the eligibility of its principals, as well as
the eligibility of any lower tier prospective participants, each
participant may, but is not required to, check the Excluded
Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is
compiled by the General Services Administration.
(4) Have not within a three-year period preceding this

application/proposal had one or more public transactions
(Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default.
b. Where the prospective participant is unable to certify to
any of the statements in this certification, such prospective
participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.
2. Instructions for Certification - Lower Tier Participants:
(Applicable to all subcontracts, purchase orders and other
lower tier transactions requiring prior FHWA approval or
estimated to cost $25,000 or more - 2 CFR Parts 180 and
1200)
h. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to

require establishment of a system of records in order to render
in good faith the certification required by this clause. The
knowledge and information of participant is not required to
exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person
in the ordinary course of business dealings.
a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective

lower tier is providing the certification set out below.
b. The certification in this clause is a material representation
of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction
was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective
lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous
certification, in addition to other remedies available to the
Federal Government, the department, or agency with which
i. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph e of

these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction
knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a
person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily
excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to
other remedies available to the Federal Government, the
10
department or agency with which this transaction originated

may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or
debarment.
*****
Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension,
Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion--Lower Tier
Participants:
1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by
submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is
presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment,
declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participating in
covered transactions by any Federal department or agency.
2. Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to
certify to any of the statements in this certification, such
prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this
proposal.
*****
XI. CERTIFICATION REGARDING USE OF CONTRACT
FUNDS FOR LOBBYING
contracts and to all related subcontracts which exceed
$100,000 (49 CFR 20).
1. The prospective participant certifies, by signing and
submitting this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her
knowledge and belief, that:
a. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be
paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for
influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of
any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or
employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of
Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal
contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any
Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement,
and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or
modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or
cooperative agreement.
b. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have
been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or
attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal
agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of
Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in
connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or
cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and
submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report
Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions.
2. This certification is a material representation of fact upon
which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or
entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite
for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31
U.S.C. 1352. Any person who fails to file the required
certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than
$10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.
3. The prospective participant also agrees by submitting its
bid or proposal that the participant shall require that the
language of this certification be included in all lower tier
subcontracts, which exceed $100,000 and that all such
recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.
11
ATTACHMENT A - EMPLOYMENT AND MATERIALS

PREFERENCE FOR APPALACHIAN DEVELOPMENT
HIGHWAY SYSTEM OR APPALACHIAN LOCAL ACCESS
ROAD CONTRACTS
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid projects funded
under the Appalachian Regional Development Act of 1965.
6. The contractor shall include the provisions of Sections 1

through 4 of this Attachment A in every subcontract for work
which is, or reasonably may be, done as on-site work.
1. During the performance of this contract, the contractor

undertaking to do work which is, or reasonably may be, done
as on-site work, shall give preference to qualified persons who
regularly reside in the labor area as designated by the DOL
wherein the contract work is situated, or the subregion, or the
Appalachian counties of the State wherein the contract work is
situated, except:
a. To the extent that qualified persons regularly residing in
the area are not available.
b. For the reasonable needs of the contractor to employ
supervisory or specially experienced personnel necessary to
assure an efficient execution of the contract work.
c. For the obligation of the contractor to offer employment to
present or former employees as the result of a lawful collective
bargaining contract, provided that the number of nonresident
persons employed under this subparagraph (1c) shall not
exceed 20 percent of the total number of employees employed
by the contractor on the contract work, except as provided in
subparagraph (4) below.
2. The contractor shall place a job order with the State
Employment Service indicating (a) the classifications of the
laborers, mechanics and other employees required to perform
the contract work, (b) the number of employees required in
each classification, (c) the date on which the participant
estimates such employees will be required, and (d) any other
pertinent information required by the State Employment
Service to complete the job order form. The job order may be
placed with the State Employment Service in writing or by
telephone. If during the course of the contract work, the
information submitted by the contractor in the original job order
is substantially modified, the participant shall promptly notify
the State Employment Service.
3. The contractor shall give full consideration to all qualified
job applicants referred to him by the State Employment
Service. The contractor is not required to grant employment to
any job applicants who, in his opinion, are not qualified to
perform the classification of work required.
4. If, within one week following the placing of a job order by
the contractor with the State Employment Service, the State
Employment Service is unable to refer any qualified job
applicants to the contractor, or less than the number
requested, the State Employment Service will forward a
certificate to the contractor indicating the unavailability of
applicants. Such certificate shall be made a part of the
contractor's permanent project records. Upon receipt of this
certificate, the contractor may employ persons who do not
normally reside in the labor area to fill positions covered by the
certificate, notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph (1c)
above.
5. The provisions of 23 CFR 633.207(e) allow the
contracting agency to provide a contractual preference for the
use of mineral resource materials native to the Appalachian
region.
12
Montana Public Works Standard Specifications,

Sixth Edition, April, 2010
(DJ&A, P.C. revisions included)
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
The Invitation to Bid contains a general description of the project work to be

performed under this Contract. The Supplemental Conditions, Special Provisions,
Technical Specifications, and other documents contain additional information
necessary to perform the work.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Portions of the Contract Documents are written in the imperative mode. Except
where specifically intended otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is
the Contractor. For example, Furnish... means Contractor shall furnish...,
Provide means Contractor shall provide.... For imperatives specifically
addressing the Engineer/Owner, see paragraph 1.02, General Conditions.
B.
Contract Documents are defined in Article 1, paragraph 1.01.A.12, General

Conditions, as modified by Montana Public Works Standard Specifications, any
supplemental conditions, and the Agreement Form.
C.
The Contract Documents are intended to provide the basis for proper completion
of the work suitable for the intended use of the Owner. Comply with Article 3,
General Conditions. Specifications and Drawings included in these contract
documents establish the performance, quality requirements, location and general
arrangement of materials and equipment, and establish the minimum standards for
quality of workmanship and appearance. Anything not expressly set forth but
which is reasonably implied or necessary for proper performance of the project
shall be included.
D.
The various portions of the Contract Documents, of which these specifications are
a part, are essential parts of the Agreement, and a requirement occurring in any
portion or part is binding as though occurring in all. All portions are intended to
be complementary and to describe and provide for a complete work as referenced
in Article 3, General Conditions. Unless specifically noted otherwise, in the case
of discrepancy the following hierarchy shall be observed:
1.
2.
Addenda, which will govern over;

Special Provisions, which will govern over;
Section 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 3

Fifth Edition, March 2003
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
1.4
Standard Modifications, which will govern over;

Supplementary Specifications, which will govern over;
Project Drawings, which will govern over;
These Specifications and Standard Drawings, which will govern over;
Montana Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, which will govern over;
Montana Public Works Standard Specifications, 6th edition.
E.
A requirement mentioned in one part/section of the Contract Documents shall be

considered as having been mentioned in all parts/sections.
F.
Contract documents may reference individuals such as Owner, Engineer, Owners

Representative, and Contracting Officer. These terms refer to the project
representative that will be identified at the pre-construction meeting.
WORK SEQUENCE
A.
Comply with paragraph 2.05, General Conditions and Milestones specified in the
Contract Documents.
B.
Submit detail schedules as specified in the Contract Documents.
C.
Field verify dimensions indicated on drawings before fabricating or ordering

materials. Do not scale drawings.
D.
Notify Engineer of existing conditions differing from those indicated on the

drawings. Comply with paragraph 4.03, of the General Conditions and any
Supplementary Conditions. Verify the existence and location of underground
utilities along the route of the proposed work. Omission of an existing or
previous abandoned utility location on the Drawings is not to be considered as its
nonexistence. Inclusion of existing utility locations on the Drawings is not to be
considered as its definite location. Do not remove or alter existing utilities
without prior written approval.
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A.
Comply with paragraph 6.11, General Conditions, and as specified in the Contract
Documents.
B.
Do not park vehicles or equipment or store materials on private property without

written permission from the property owner. Provide Engineer with copy of
authorization.
Section 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 3

1.5
OWNER-FURNISHED ITEMS
A.
Owner-furnished items are listed in the Contract Documents.
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
EXECUTION - NOT USED
PART 4:
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.1
PAYMENT
A.
Unless specifically noted otherwise, the work of Division 1 shall be incidental to

the work, and no separate payment shall be made.
END OF SECTION
Section 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 01030
PERMITS
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This section specifies the requirements for securing and complying with all local,
state, and federal regulations required for the project. Contractor shall be
responsible for obtaining all permits detailed within the contract documents or
required by any local, state, or federal regulations unless specifically stated within
the contract documents that the Owner will provide. Contractor will be
responsible to acquire all permits necessary and to pay charges for such, unless
otherwise specified.
PERMITS
A.
Permits required, but not necessarily limited to, are as follows:

1. City of Missoula:
a. City Permits: In accordance with Missoula Municipal Code Title 12,
Contractors will be required to obtain excavation and engineering
permits from the City of Missoula for the installation of all drainage
and surface improvements. This includes permits related to drainage
structures, asphalt paving, curb and gutter, sidewalk, fencing and other
associated permits.
b. City Construction Inspector: In accordance with Missoula Municipal
Codes, all construction is to be inspected by a City authorized
inspector. City authorized inspectors will have full authority to
enforce this contract and specifications.
c. City Business License and Bonding: Any Contractors engaged in
public work in the City of Missoula are required to have a license
based upon the nature of the work. A bond is also required for each
type of work in the City of Missoula. The Contractor will be
responsible to acquire and pay directly for this license.
2. Environmental Permits:
a. MPDES Stormwater Discharge Permit: The Contractor shall be
required to secure and pay all fees associated with obtaining
Authorization for Storm Water Discharge associated with construction
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 1 of 8
activity under the Montana Pollutant Discharge Elimination System

(MPDES). All fees associated with this permit application and any
subsequent annual fees will be paid for by the Contractor. See Section
01600 for additional information.
b. City of Missoula Storm Prevention and Pollution Permit: The
Contractor shall send a copy of the NOI and SWPPP (see Section
01600) to the City of Missoula for review and approval. After review
and acceptance of the SWPPP, the City of Missoula will issue the City
SWPPP permit. The Contractor shall pay all fees associated with this
permit.
3. Other Permits:
a. Copies of permits obtained by Missoula County are contained in this
section.
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 2 of 8
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 3 of 8
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 4 of 8
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 5 of 8
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 6 of 8
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 7 of 8
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
EXECUTION NOT USED
PART 4:
4.1
PAYMENT FOR PERMITS

A.
The Contractor shall be required to obtain all permits necessary to complete the
project other than those identified to be secured and paid for by the Owner, if any.
Measurement and payment for Permits shall be lump sum and shall include all
fees associated with securing and complying with all permits.
END OF SECTION
Section 01030
PERMITS
Page 8 of 8

SECTION 01041
PROJECT COORDINATION AND SCHEDULE
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This section specifies the requirements for coordinating and sequencing the work
under the Contract documents, and requirements regarding existing site
conditions.
COORDINATION WITH PUBLIC AND PRIVATE AGENCIES

A.
Comply with Article 7, General Conditions. Permit utility companies to repair or

replace their lines in the project limits.
The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate utility conflicts with the local
gas, electric, phone, and cable companies. The Contractor shall contact these
companies immediately following award of the project and provide a preliminary
schedule as to when utility relocation/adjustments can be made. The following
companies and representatives should be contacted:
North Western Energy Gas and Electric:
Contact Joe Leary at North Western Energy, (406) 544-3187
Century Link Telephone:
Contact David Smith at Century Link, (406) 543-2175
Charter Communications Cable TV:
Contact Benny Murphy at Charter Communications, (406) 542-3900
B.
Contact the Montana one-call system for utility locations before starting work.
C.
Comply with paragraph 6.20, General Conditions.
D.
Coordinate with land owners adjacent to the project for construction of driveways,
approaches and other activities that may restrict access or have impact to their
property. Provide land owners a minimum of 10 calendar days advanced notice
before performing such activities. In situations where construction activities are
anticipated to encroach on private property, temporary construction permits have
been obtained and can be found in SECTION 01030 PERMITS.
E.
Prior to commencing work adjacent to the Missoula Country Club (MCC), notify
General Manager, Chris Nowlen at (406) 251-2404 14 calendar days prior
beginning work. Work adjacent to the MCC must be closely coordinated with
MCC grounds personnel to ensure proper timing of vegetation relocation and to
Section 01041
PROJECT COORDINATION
Page 1 of 2

ensure that privacy and security is maintained during construction.

1.3
MISSOULA COUNTRY CLUB

A.
1.4
All work adjacent to the Missoula Country Club located along Old Highway 93
must be performed prior to Memorial Day and/or after Labor Day.
CONOCO SERVICE STATION

A.
All work adjacent to the Conoco station located at 12011 Hwy 93 South in Lolo,
Montana must be performed prior to Memorial Day and/or after Labor Day unless
otherwise agreed upon in writing between the Contractor and the Land Owner.
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
PART 4:
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Section 01041
PROJECT COORDINATION
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
ENGINEERING SURVEYS
A.
Survey work will be performed by Missoula County or its hired consultant. Notify
the Owner of required survey work at least 48 hours before starting work. The
following items will be staked once by Missoula County:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
1.2
Slope stakes minimum 50 intervals with reference points

Grade stakes minimum two per cross section at 50 intervals
Retaining walls offset stakes to wall hinge point
Curb and gutter
Sidewalk
Driveway and pedestrian curb laydown locations
Sumps and drop inlets
Fences and railings
B.
The contractor shall bear all expenses associated with replacing destroyed stakes
that have been set by Missoula County.
C.
Preserve all benchmarks, control points and stakes.
D.
Replace benchmarks, control points and stakes destroyed or disturbed by the

Contractor or subcontractor. If existing control points or stakes are disturbed, the
contractor will be responsible for the replacement of such monuments at no
additional expense to the County.
E.
Comply with paragraph 4.04, General Conditions.
STREET MONUMENTS AND PROPERTY CORNERS

A.
Protect existing property pins and/or street monuments. If existing property pins
and/or other monuments are disturbed during construction activities, the
contractor will be responsible for the replacement of such monuments at no
additional expense to the County.
B.
Use a licensed land surveyor to replace all property corners or other monuments
marked or shown on the plans that are destroyed by the work.
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
PART 4:

Section 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 2

END OF SECTION
Section 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01090
REFERENCES
PART 1:
1.1
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.2
These specifications use Article 1 - Definitions of the Standard General

Conditions of the Construction Contract, Form No. C-700 prepared and issued by
the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC), for the definition
of terms herein. Changes to definitions are by either substitution for the article or
in Supplementary Conditions.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
GENERAL
This section lists some of the construction industry organizations, professional

and technical associations, societies and institutes, and government agencies
issuing, promoting, or enforcing standards in the Contract Documents along with
the abbreviations commonly used for those references. Also included are general
requirements for using industry standards specified, and for applying quality
control standards.
USE OF REFERENCE STANDARDS

A.
Work specified by reference to a published standard or specification of a

government agency, technical association, trade association, professional society
or institute, testing agency, or other organization must meet or exceed the
minimum quality standards for the material and workmanship in the designated
standard or specification.
B.
Where specified, assure products or workmanship meet the prescriptive or

performance requirements in the Contract Documents when it is a more stringent
standard than the referenced standard. Contract should reference only one
specification to prevent argument as to which specification is most stringent.
C.
Where the specific issue date of the standard is not identified in the standard, the
edition and all published amendments available on the date of the Invitation to
Bid applies.
D.
If two or more standards are specified, provide the product and workmanship
meeting or exceeding the requirements of the most stringent standard.
E.
If a conflict exists between standards, meet the more stringent standard.
F.
Where both a standard and a brand name are specified, assure the proprietary
product names meet or exceed the specified reference standard. The listing of a
Section 01090
REFERENCES
Page 1 of 4

trade name in a Contract Document does not warrant that the product meets the
referenced standard.
G.
1.4
Copies of Standards
1.
Copies of applicable referenced standards are not bound in this Contract

Document.
2.
Where the contractor needs copies of standards for work superintendence

and quality control, obtain a copy or copies directly from the publication
sources and maintain copies at the job site, making them available to
Contractor personnel, subcontractors, Owner, and Engineer.
ABBREVIATIONS
A.
Abbreviations for Trade Organizations and Government Agencies: Following is a

list of construction industry organizations and government agencies commonly
referenced in the Contract Documents, with abbreviations used.
AA
AAMA
AASHTO
ACI
AFBMA
AGA
AGMA
AISC
AISI
AITC
ALS
AMCA
ANSI
APA
API
AREA
ARI
Aluminum Association
Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
American Concrete Institute
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
American Gas Association
American Gear Manufacturers Association
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute
American Institute of Timber Construction
American Lumber Standards
Air Moving and Conditioning Association
American National Standards Institute
American Plywood Association
American Petroleum Institute
American Railway Engineering Association
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
Section 01090
REFERENCES
Page 2 of 4

ASAE
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWI
AWPA
AWPB
AWPI
AWS
AWWA
BHMA
CBMA
CDA
CGA
CISPI
CMAA
CRSI
FGMA
FM
Fed Spec.
FS
GA
HI
HMI
ICBO
ICEA
IEEE
IES
ISA
JIC
MIA
Mil. Sp.
MS
MMA
NAAMM
NBHA
NEC
NEMA
NESC
NFPA
NHLA
NLMA
NTMA
NWMA
OECI
American Society of Agricultural Engineers

American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineers
American Society for Testing and Materials
Architectural Woodwork Institute
American Wood Preservers Association
American Wood Preservers Bureau
American wood Preservers Institute
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association
Copper Development Association
Compressed Gas Association
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Crane Manufacturers Association of America
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Flat Glass Marketing Association
Factory Mutual
Federal Specifications
Federal Specification
Gypsum Association
Hydraulic Institute
Hoist Manufacturers Institute
International Conference of Building Officials
Insulated Cable Engineers Association
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
Instrument Society of America
Joint Industry Conferences of Hydraulic Manufacturers
Marble Institute of America
Military Specification
Military Specifications
Monorail Manufacturers Association
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
National Builders Hardware Association
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Electrical Safety Code
National Fire Protection Association
National Hardwood Lumber Association
National Lumber Manufacturers Association
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
Overhead Electrical Crane Institute
Section 01090
REFERENCES
Page 3 of 4

OSHA
PEI
PS
RLM
RMA
SAE
SDI
SDI
SIGMA
SJI
SMACNA
SSPC
SWI
TEMA
TCA
UBC
UFC
UL
WCLIB
WWPA
Occupational Safety and Health Act (both Federal and State)

Porcelain Enamel Institute
Product Standards Section - U.S. Department of Commerce
RLM Standards Institute, Inc.
Rubber Manufacturers Association
Society of Automotive Engineers
Steel Deck Institute
Steel Door Institute
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association
Steel Joint Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
Steel Structures Painting Council
Steel Window Institute
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
Tile Council of America
Uniform Building Code
Uniform Fire Code
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
Western Wood Products Association
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
PART 4:
END OF SECTION
Section 01090
REFERENCES
Page 4 of 4

SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1:
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
A.
Submit to the Engineer a progress schedule under Sections 2.05, 2.07, and 6.04 of
the General Conditions.
B.
Submit to the Engineer adjusted progress schedules under Section 6.04 of the
General Conditions.
C.
Submit to the Engineer, value schedules under Sections 2.05, 2.07 and 14.01 of
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATE, AND SAMPLES

A.
When applicable, submit shop drawings to the Engineer under Sections 2.05 and
6.17 of the General Conditions. Submit all shop drawings for the Contractor,
subcontractor(s) and supplier(s).
B.
Review all shop drawings prior to submittal in accordance with Section 6.17 of
C.
Submit in writing any substitutions to previously approved items for review by

the Engineer.
D.
Within 15 days after Notice to Proceed, submit a complete list of products

proposed for use, providing manufacturers name, trade name, and model or
catalog numbers, and manufacturer data.
Submit the number of copies needed by the Contractor, plus three copies for
Engineer use.
E.
Where specified, submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic

characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices.
Where specified, submit samples of finishes including colors, textures, and
patterns.
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
PART 4:

END OF SECTION
Section 01300
SUBMITTALS
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01400
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL AND
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This section describes the Contractor quality control testing requirements and
Owners quality assurance program.
REFERENCES
A.
The following ASTM publication is a part of this specification.

ASTM E 329 Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used in
Construction
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor will be responsible for quality control tests and inspections to
control contractor production and construction processes. Include in the
Contractor quality control system an internal organization, plans, and procedures
to produce the specified end product. Assure the system covers all construction
operations, both on-site and off-site, and is keyed to the construction sequence.
Quality control testing frequency is at Contractor discretion, except where tests
are specifically required in the technical specifications for individual products or
as requested by the Engineer.
B.
Sampling and testing to assure specification conformance will be performed by

the County as quality assurance testing.
C.
Quality assurance testing is performed following the standards in the technical

specifications for individual products.
CONTRACTOR COOPERATION DURING QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTS

A.
Assure that the Countys personnel and/or quality assurance agency have access
to all work areas at all times work is in progress. Provide any special facilities or
equipment to access work areas at Contractor expense.
Section 01400
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Page 1 of 2

B.
PART 4:
4.1
4.2
Notify the Engineer of the work ready for quality assurance testing. Establish and
update as the construction schedule to provide the Engineer estimated
sampling/testing dates and times.
PAYMENT FOR TESTING

A.
Pay for quality control testing as outlined in Subsection 3.1 above. Mix designs
for Portland Cement Concrete and Flowable Fill, mix designs for Asphalt
Concrete, subgrade soil testing, compaction testing, and all initial aggregate
quality tests are quality control tests and are at Contractor expense. Testing costs
are incidental to the work and are to be included in the price for the respective
item.
B.
The County will provide quality assurance testing at its own expense. However,
the Contractor will be responsible for testing costs incurred by the County for
tests that produce failing results.
RETESTING
A.
Quality assurance re-testing due to failing initial tests will be performed by the
County, and the re-test costs shall be paid for by the Contractor until such tests
produce passing results.
END OF SECTION
Section 01400
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01500
PART 1:
1.1
1.2
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A.
Furnish temporary services and utilities, including use fees and operation costs
for: potable and non-potable water; lighting and power; and, materials storage.
B.
Furnish personnel support facilities including: sanitary facilities; drinking water;

first aid supplies and facilities; and, trash removal.
C.
Do not park vehicles or equipment or store materials on private property without

written permission from the property owner.
SECURITY
A.
1.3
Be responsible for dust control, providing all equipment and personnel for the
work.
HAUL ROUTES
A.
1.5
Submit a plan to the Owner for approval to provide security to work areas during
construction. The plan should include specific locations of fencing, barricades,
warning signs, and lights to secure all work areas, equipment, and materials.
Furnish to the Engineer the name(s) and telephone number(s) of the person(s)
responsible for site security during evenings and weekends.
DUST CONTROL
A.
1.4
GENERAL
Submit a plan to the Owner for approval of intended haul routes. Haul routes
should minimize the use of local roads and streets. The plan should include a map
showing the intended haul routes with the anticipated number of loads for each
route including approximate size and weight of haul trucks.
STAGING AREAS
A.
The only staging area that has been identified for this project is the abandoned
weigh scale site at approximate station 3083+00. It is the responsibility of the
contractor to secure proper permissions and permits that may be required to use
other staging areas for this project.
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:

Section 01500
Page 1 of 2

PART 4:
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT NOT USED

END OF SECTION
Section 01500
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01570
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
A.
Coordinate all construction activities to reduce traffic conflicts at the work site,
off-site events or other construction projects.
B.
Submit to the Engineer, for Owner review, the construction traffic control plan at
least fourteen (14) days before construction begins or before changes in
segments or phases of the work on the project. Details of generic layouts and
possible traffic control measures for this project are contained in the Montana
Department of Transportation (MDT) Road Design Manual. Submit any
proposed changes to these details to the Engineer for approval. The Owner will
review and approve the Traffic Control Plan considering known off-site activities
and may require modification to the plan or construction timing to coordinate
events. Work shall not commence until said plan is approved.
PRODUCT
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

A.
Assure all signs and barricades are reflectorized. Assure all night time traffic
control devices meet MUTCD lighting requirements.
B.
Use traffic control devices meeting the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices and the Traffic Control Devices Handbook requirements, available
from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C. 20492.
C.
Assure all traffic control devices are clean, legible, reflective for night-time use,
and operable.
PART 3
3.1
Perform work under this section meeting requirements outlined in the Manual of
Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and contract requirements. Traffic
control must also conform to the Montana Department of Transportation (MDT)
Road Design Manual.
NOTIFICATIONS
PART 2:
2.1
This work is the furnishing of labor, materials and equipment for installing,
maintaining and operating traffic control devices to insure the safety of the
general public and project personnel.
REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
GENERAL
EXECUTION
WORK METHODS
Section 01570
Page 1 of 9

3.2
3.3
A.
The Montana Department of Transportation will allow closure of one lane of

traffic of US HWY 93 between the hours of 10:00am and 6:00pm for northbound
lanes and 7:00am to 3:00pm for southbound lanes. The total length of the lane
closure on the project must not exceed 3 miles at any given time.
B.
The temporary closure of one lane of traffic on Old Highway 93 will be permitted
to allow for necessary work to be performed.
C.
Place all traffic control devices as planned before permitting men or equipment on
the travel way. Install signs, cones and barricades in that order.
D.
Inspect the work area for appropriate traffic control devices and placement of
those devices at least twice each day during construction and maintain records of
traffic control devices used and their location. Update traffic control devices and
their placement as needed after inspection.
E.
Assure traffic control is appropriate to the work. Assure traffic control devices
are appropriate and clean before suspending work for the day.
F.
Remove traffic control devices in reverse order of installation at the end of each
shift.
G.
Remove and store all unnecessary traffic control devices away from traffics
view.
NONCOMPLIANCE
A.
Remove, repair or replace any traffic control device not providing its intended
function.
B.
Do not begin work until all required traffic control devices are placed.
C.
The Engineer will periodically inspect the traffic control and inform the
Contractor of any deficiencies. Contractor shall not rely on the Engineer to
conduct inspections to assure proper traffic control is in place.
D.
Contractor failure to correct any deficiency in the traffic control within 4 hours of
notification is cause to deduct monies from the contract payment on the next
progress payment.
E.
The Engineer may direct correcting traffic control deficiencies immediately.

Failure to immediately correct the deficiency is cause for the Engineer to correct
the deficiency at Contractor expense.
FLAGGING
A.
PART 4:
Furnish competent and properly equipped flag persons as described in the booklet
Instructions for Flag persons available through the Montana Department of
Transportation.
Section 01570
Page 2 of 9

4.1
MEASUREMENT
A.
GENERAL
1.
B.
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

1.
C.
Traffic control devices are measured by the units of traffic control devices
used and accepted. A unit of traffic control device is the base value used
for establishing the relative value of each type of traffic control device.
The relative value of each traffic control device in units is shown in the
"Traffic Control Rate Schedule" included in this Section. Signs and
devices must be in new or like-new condition to be measured for payment.
FLAGGING
1.
D.
The estimated contract quantities for traffic control devices, temporary

pavement markings, flagging, and pilot car operation are an estimate only
and may vary from the actual quantities used or required in the contract.
No additional compensation is considered or allowed due to these quantity
differences.
Flagging is measured by the hour for the actual number of approved

flagging hours provided on the project for each flagger used. Travel time
for flaggers to and from the project is not measured for payment.
ITEMS NOT ELIGIBLE FOR SEPARATE PAYMENT

1.
The following items are not measured or paid for separately:
4.2
Amber flashing or strobe lights on equipment, vehicles, and

hauling units;
Impact attenuators for median barrier openings;
Permits and costs relating to project access;
Construction, drainage, maintenance, removal, restoration and
reseeding of areas used for temporary roads, approaches, and
crossovers;
Radios for flaggers and pilot vehicles;
Illumination of flag stations and work areas;
Reflectorized safety equipment, garments, and headgear;
Vehicle-mounted arrow boards on stripers and shadow vehicles;
Replacing temporary pavement marking tabs and tape destroyed by
traffic;
Temporary pavement marking tabs used for seal coat operations;
Costs to clean and maintain installed traffic control devices;
Covering or removing non-applicable signs or signs not in use; and
Other miscellaneous materials and equipment required for proper
traffic control that are not included in the "Traffic Control Rate
Schedule".
PAYMENT
Section 01570
Page 3 of 9

A.
Traffic control devices are paid for at the contract unit price per unit of traffic
control devices. The units of each type of traffic control device paid for are
calculated by multiplying the measured quantity of each device by the value per
each unit shown in the traffic control rate schedule.
Traffic control devices are bid competitively. If the actual quantities required for
traffic control devices exceed the plan quantity on the project by more than 15
percent, the price paid per unit for all quantities that exceed 115 percent of plan
quantity will be the lesser of the contract unit price or $0.80.
Payment for traffic control devices is made for each setup directed by the Owner.
The following devices are not eligible for payment:
1.
Devices placed beyond 1,500 feet (458 meters) of the work
termination point for that day.
2.
Adjustments or moving of devices that were initially installed
improperly.
3.
Adjustments or moving of devices for the convenience of the
Contractor.
Replacing properly installed traffic control devices destroyed by traffic is paid for
at the contract unit price per unit of traffic control devices. Payment for barricades
and drums includes the required ballast. Payment for signs mounted on barricades
is made only for the original mounting. Payment for flashing arrow boards is
made only for the actual hours of operation approved by the Owner. Payment
includes the cost of operating the trucks or trailers on which the arrow boards are
mounted. Paint stripe removal is paid for at the contract unit price per unit of
traffic control devices.
Store devices in approved staging areas with a maximum of one staging area per
three-mile segment of roadway. Detail the staging areas in the traffic control plan
submitted for the Owners approval. All devices not stored in the approved
staging areas will be paid for at category #2 payment amounts and all portable
signs not stored in approved staging areas will be paid for at 50 percent of the
contract unit price.
Payment for traffic control devices will be made under one of the following two
categories:
1. Category #1 - Standard Installation. The initial setup for the project or a new
operation, or the moving of a device, and the setup of the device requires it be
loaded in a truck (vehicle) or hitched to a truck (vehicle) for moving to a new
location.
2. Category #2 - Adjustments. The manual moving of a device conducted by
dragging, carrying, etc. of the device required to move it to a new location of a
traffic control operation.
Payment for traffic control devices will be paid for at the rates listed in the table
Section 01570
Page 4 of 9

below.
TRAFFIC CONTROL RATES BASED ON CATEGORY AND DEVICE TYPE
CATEGORY #
DEVICE
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Flexible Guide Post

Barrels
Portable Signs
Type III Barricades
Portable Vertical Panels
Other
Flexible Guide Posts
Barrels
Type III Barricades
Portable Vertical Panels
Other
PAYMENT
AMOUNT
PERCENT
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
25
50
50
Payment at the contract unit price is full compensation for all resources necessary
to complete the item of work under the contract.
Section 01570
Page 5 of 9

Section 01570
Page 6 of 9

Section 01570
Page 7 of 9

Section 01570
Page 8 of 9

END OF SECTION
Section 01570
Page 9 of 9

SECTION 01600
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
This work is the furnishing of labor, materials and equipment for installing,
maintaining and operating soil erosion and pollution control measures to
minimize sediment transport due to accelerated erosion, siltation, and dust
associated with construction activity.
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
GENERAL
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials, including documents

referenced, form a part of this Section to the extent designated herein.
STORM WATER ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY

A.
The Contractor is responsible for creating and filing Notice of Intent (NOI) and
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for this project under the
Montana Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (MPDES) with the Montana
Water Quality Division for storm water associated with construction activities.
All fees associated with this permit application and any subsequent annual fees
will be paid for by the Contractor.
B.
The Contractor shall be required to comply with all requirements of the 2007
General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction
Activity (General Permit). The Contractor shall review and have an
understanding of the SWPPP and its intent for mitigating erosion and sediment
control. The Contractor is responsible for installing, maintaining and preserving
all erosion control measures for the project in conformance with the SWPPP and
any Montana Department of Environmental Quality regulations related to storm
water discharge. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing all
Monitoring, Reporting, and Records Retention Requirements per Part III of the
General Permit. The Contractor shall be responsible to make any necessary
changes to the SWPPP to prevent damage as a result of storm water runoff from
this site using Best Management Practices.
C.
The Contractor must have a copy of the NOI Receipt Confirmation Letter from
DEQ providing coverage to discharge storm water under the General Permit, a
copy of the SWPPP, and copies of the Contractors reporting documentation on
site at all times during construction. The Contractor is solely responsible for any
and all damages and/or fines that may result from the runoff from this site during
the duration of this contract. The Contractor shall provide all monitoring and
reporting records to the Engineer at the completion of the project.
Section 01600
Page 1 of 3

1.4
D.
The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain all erosion control measures

throughout the warranty period. Once final stabilization of the project is
complete, the Contractor shall be responsible to remove erosion control measures
that are no longer necessary to contain sediment. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer, prior to the end of the warranty period, when such erosion control
measures will be removed.
E.
Comply with all applicable requirements of local, state, and federal agencies.
Comply with the State of Montana DEQ, Water Quality Act 75-5-318 MCA.
F.
Any penalties due to non-compliance with the general permit requirements shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
G.
The Contractor is responsible to submit Notice of Termination (NOT) when the

construction activity is complete and the site has achieved final stabilization.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Submit an erosion and sedimentation control plan showing devices, measures, and
locations intended for use.
B.
Submit the erosion and sedimentation control plan to the Engineer 10 days prior to
the pre-work meeting. At a minimum, the erosion and sediment control plan
should include the following:
i. Describe the construction activities and sequence of implementation
relating to specific erosion control measures.
ii. Describe the location and type of temporary controls to be implemented
during construction.
iii. Describe what monitoring will take place. There will be no contractor
delay in response to mitigation of failed erosion control measures.
iv. Describe the measures that will be taken to minimize erosion and sediment
delivery from material stockpiles.
C.
The erosion control plan must specifically address proposed erosion control
devices and measures for construction to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
D.
Comply with all applicable requirements of local, state and federal agencies.
E.
Comply with the State of Montana DEQ, Water Quality Act 75-5-318 MCA.
PART 2:
2.1
PRODUCT
MATERIALS
A.
Straw wattles or straw bales used by the Contractor to provide temporary erosion
control as specified under this section must be certified weed free. Certification
Section 01600
Page 2 of 3

must be provided to the Engineer prior to installation.

B.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Ensure that every precaution will be taken, through project completion, to minimize
the effects of site erosion and the potential for damage to adjacent property or
bodies of water.
B.
Install straw wattles or approved erosion control measures per manufacturers

recommendations such that water will not go under or around the installed
sediment barrier.
PART 4:
4.1
DO NOT USE silt fence for sediment and erosion control unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
PAYMENT
A.
Separate measurement for each erosion control device will not be made.
Measurement and payment for the Contractors erosion control plan and all
associated components is on a lump sum basis. The lump sum payment is full
reimbursement for all costs of furnishing, installing, maintaining, replacing and
operating the components of the erosion control systems throughout the work
period and reporting and warranty periods. Creating and filing all documentation
required under the MPDES for storm water associated with construction
activities, associated fees and all work associated with soil erosion and sediment
control shall be included in the lump sum.
B.
Progress payments are in proportion to total construction completed.
END OF SECTION
Section 01600
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1:
1.1
CLEANUP
A.
1.2
Before Final inspection (as outlined in Section 14.06 of the General Conditions)
execute the following.
1.
Remove debris, waste, surplus materials, and rubbish from right-of-way,

easements (construction or permanent) and private property.
2.
Where applicable, remove debris, dirt, and silt from storm drain basins,
sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes, and water valve boxes.
3.
Rake landscaped surfaces clean of debris.
4.
Where applicable, remove temporary coverings from permanent traffic

control devices.
5.
Clean permanent traffic control devices and signs.
6.
Where applicable, remove temporary traffic striping.
7.
Sweep dirt and debris from all constructed sidewalk, curb & gutter, and
from paved areas affected by the work.
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
1.3
GENERAL
Submit record documents as outlined in the General Conditions. Final payment

will not be processed until the documents are submitted to and approved by the
Engineer.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A.
Where applicable, submit two sets, before final inspection, bound in three ring
binders. Prepare a table of contents for each volume with each product or system
identified.
B.
Where applicable, prepare the following:

1.
Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of Engineer,

Contractor, Subcontractor, and Equipment Suppliers.
2.
Operations and maintenance instructions, arranged by system. For each

category, identify the applicable Contractor(s) or Subcontractor(s) and
suppliers. Identify the following:
1.
Significant design criteria

Section 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 1 of 2

2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
List of equipment
Parts list for each component
Operating instructions
Maintenance instructions
WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A.
Submit, with final payment request, all warranty certificates, lien releases, and
consent of security forms.
PART 2:
PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3:
PART 4:

END OF SECTION
Section 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 01710
MOBILIZATION
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work consists of moving personnel, equipment, material, and incidentals to

the project and performing all work necessary before beginning work at the
project site. It also includes the removing of personnel, equipment, material, and
incidentals from the project site once the work was been completed as well as the
general clean-up of the project site. Mobilization includes the obtaining of
insurance and bonds required in the contract.
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
PART 4:
4.1
MEASUREMENT
A.
4.2
Measure mobilization by the lump sum.
PAYMENT
A.
Mobilization will be paid for as follows:

a) Fifty percent of the lump sum, not to exceed 5 percent of the original
contract amount, will be paid following completion of 5 percent of the
original contract amount, not including mobilization.
b) Payment of the remaining portion of the lump sum, up to 10 percent of the
original contract amount, will be paid following completion of 10 percent
of the original contract amount, not including mobilization.
c) The lump sum price of mobilization may not exceed 10 percent of the base
bid schedules total contract amount.
END OF SECTION
Section 01710
MOBILIZATION
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01800
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A.
This item consists of any necessary work and/or materials encountered during
construction that is not addressed elsewhere in the contract.
B.
The inclusion of miscellaneous work in this contract does not guarantee that
additional work will be requested by the Owner or that this item will be used by
the Owner.
PART 2:
PRODUCT - NOT USED
PART 3:
PART 4:
4.1
MEASUREMENT
A.
4.2
Miscellaneous work will be measured by the respective unit for material and/or
work performed as directed by the Owner.
PAYMENT
A.
Payment for miscellaneous work will be at agreed prices or on a force account

basis. The number of units in dollars defined in the contract, is an estimated
amount only which may be adjusted up or down by the Owner in accordance with
the needs of the project. Use of this item is at the sole discretion of the Owner.
The inclusion of miscellaneous work in this contract does not guarantee the
contractor payment for this item except as mutually agreed upon between the
Owner and the contractor. If this item is not used, no payment to the contractor
will be made for this item.
END OF SECTION
Section 01800
MISCELLANEOUS WORK
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 02110
GEOTEXTILES
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This work consists of furnishing, and placing a geotextile as a subsurface drainage

fabric permeable separator between dissimilar materials (such as between
subgrade, sub-base/base, and riprap), stabilization fabric, temporary and/or
permanent erosion control measures or as waterproofing/stress releasing
membrane within pavement structures.
REFERENCES
A.
The current publications listed below form part of this specification.
B.
ASTM Standards
D123
D276
D4354
D4632
D4533
D3786
Standard Terminology Relating to Textiles

Test Methods for Identification of Fibers in Textiles
Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing
Breaking; Load and Elongation of Geotextiles (Grab Method)
Trapezoid Tearing, Strength of Geotextiles
Hydraulic Bursting, Strength of Knitted Goods and Nonwoven
Fabrics Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Methods
D4833
Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and
Related Products
D4491
Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
D4751
Determining, Apparent Opening, Size of a Geotextile
D4354
Sampling, of Geotextiles for Testing
D4759
Determining, the Specification Conformance of Geosynthetics
D276
Identification of Fibers in Textiles
D4355
Deterioration of Geotextiles from exposure to ultraviolet light and
water (Xenon-arc type apparatus)
D4873
Guide for Identification, Storage and Handling of Geotextiles
D5141
Test Method for Determining Filter Efficiency and Flow rate for
Silt Fence Application of a Geotextile Using Site Specific Soils
D5261
Test Methods for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles
D422&D1140 Particle Size Analysis of Soils
D4318
Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
Section 02110
GEOTEXTILES
Page 1of 5

D698
C.
AASHTO Specification - M288 Geotextile Specifications for Highway

Applications
1.
PART 2:
2.1
2.3
Augmenting and prevailing over this specification section.
PRODUCTS
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

A.
2.2
The Moisture-Density of Soils Using a 2.5kg (5.5-lb) Rammer and

a 305 mm (12-in.) drop
Assure that fibers used in the manufacture of geotextiles, and the threads used in
joining geotextiles by sewing, consist of long-chain synthetic polymers, composed
of at least 95% by weight polyolefins or polyesters. They must be formed into a
network so the filaments on yarns retain dimensional stability relative to each
other, including selvedges. Furnish materials meeting the physical requirements
for the indicated application as described by the corresponding table(s) of
properties in AASHTO M288, Geotextiles Specifications for Highway
Applications.
CERTIFICATION
A.
Assure the manufacturer furnishes the purchaser a certificate stating: the name of
the manufacturer, the chemical composition of the filaments or yards, and other
information fully describing the geotextile. The manufacturer must include in the
certificate, a guarantee stating that the geotextile furnished meets specifications.
The certificate must be attested to by a person having a legal authority to bind the
company. Mismarking, or misrepresentation by the manufacturer is reason to
reject the geotextile under these specifications. Notice sent to the manufacturer
by the purchaser regarding rejection of, will be considered to be notice to all
wholesalers, jobbers, distributors, agents and other intermediaries handling the
manufacturers product.
B.
Label the fabric and its container with the manufacturers name and fabric type or
trade name, lot number and quantity.
SHIPMENT AND STORAGE

A.
During shipment and storage, protect the fabric from direct sunlight, ultra-violet
rays, temperatures exceeding 160F (71C), mud, dust and debris. Keep the
fabrics in the manufacturers wrapping until just before use. Include with each
shipping, a document, a certification showing that the geotextile meets the
Section 02110
GEOTEXTILES
Page 2of 5

manufacturers certificate and a guarantee that has been previously filed with the
purchaser.
PART 3:
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Where placing geotextiles on native ground, cut the trees and shrubs flush with
the ground surface. Do not remove the topsoil and vegetation mat. Remove all
sharp objects and large rocks. Fill depressions or holes with a suitable material to
provide a firm foundation.
B.
Replace or repair all geotextile that is torn, punctured, or muddy. Remove the
damaged area and place a patch of the same type of geotextile overlapping 3 feet,
in all directions, (0.9m) beyond the damaged area.
DRAINAGE, SEPARATION AND STABILIZATION APPLICATIONS

A.
Shape the subgrade to a smooth surface and to cross section required. Shape
slopes to gradually transition into slope adjustments without noticeable breaks. At
the ends of cuts, the intersection of cuts, and embankments, adjust slopes in the
horizontal and vertical planes to blend into each other or into the natural ground.
B.
Remove all material larger than 6 inches (15 cm) within the top 6 inches (15 cm)
of the roadbed. Remove unsuitable material from the roadbed and replace with
suitable material. Finish the roadbed and ditches to the required elevation and
cross-section.
C.
Place the geotextile smooth and free of tension, stress, or wrinkles. Fold and cut
the geotextile to conform to curves. Overlap in the direction of construction.
Overlap the geotextile a minimum of 2 feet (0.6m) at the ends and sides of
adjoining sheets or sew the geotextiles joints according to the manufacturers
recommendations. Do not place longitudinal overlaps below anticipated wheel
loads. Hold the geotextile in place with pins, staples, or piles of cover material.
D.
End dump the cover material onto the geotextile from the edge of the geotextile or
from previously placed cover material. Do not operate equipment directly on the
geotextile. Spread the end-dumped pile of cover material maintaining a minimum
lift thickness of 10 inches (250 mm). Compact the cover material with rubbertired or nonvibratory smooth drum rollers. Avoid sudden stops, starts, or turns of
the construction equipment. Fill all ruts from construction equipment with
additional cover material. Do not regrade ruts with placement equipment.
Section 02110
GEOTEXTILES
Page 3of 5

E.
3.3
3.4
Place subsequent lifts of cover material in the same manner as the initial lift.
Vibratory compactors may be used for compacting subsequent lifts. If foundation
failures occur, repair the damaged areas and revert to the use of nonvibratory
compaction equipment.
TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL APPLICATIONS

A.
Place and anchor the geotextile on the approved smooth-graded surface. For
slope protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile down the slope. For
stream bank protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile parallel to the
centerline of the channel.
B.
Overlap the geotextile a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) at the ends and sides of
adjoining sheets or sew the geotextile joints according to the manufacturers
recommendations. Overlap the uphill or upstream sheet over the downhill or
downstream sheet. Offset end joints of adjacent sheets a minimum of 5 feet
(1.5m). Pins may be used to hold the geotextile sheets in place. Space pins along
the overlaps at approximately 3 foot (1m) centers.
C.
Place aggregate, slope protection, or riprap on the geotextile starting at the toe of
the slope and proceed upward. Place riprap onto the geotextile from a height of
less than 12 inches (300 mm). Place slope protection rock or aggregate backfill
onto the geotextile from a height less than 3 feet (0.9m). In underwater
applications, place the geotextile and cover material in the same day.
PAVEMENT APPLICATIONS
A.
Use SS-1 crack filler meeting the applicable section for crack filler for surface
preparation of cracks between 1/8 and 1/4 inch wide. Fill cracks exceeding 1/4'
inch (6 mm) width with an asphalt emulsion slurry consisting of 20 percent by
volume of SS-1, 2 percent by volume Portland cement and the remaining portion
fine sand.
B.
Use distributors for spraying a Performance Graded (PG) Asphaltic Binder

meeting the specifications for the asphalt cement being used in the asphalt
concrete overlay.
C.
Place fabric using manufacturer recommended equipment.
D.
Handle and place all fabric following the manufacturers recommendations.
E.
Clean pavement to receive fabric of dirt, water and vegetation. Clean all cracks
between 1/8-inch (3mm) and 1/4 (6mm) wide and fill flush to the surface with SS1 bituminous material. Top with sand. Repair larger cracks or holes using the
asphalt emulsion slurry. Pour the mixture into the cracks until full. Refill with
slurry, the following day, any cracks which are not completely filled initially.
When a leveling course is required, place it before installing the fabric. Areas to
be covered with a leveling course do not require surface preparations for cracks
Section 02110
GEOTEXTILES
Page 4of 5

unless the leveling courses will be less than 0.3 foot (10cm).
F.
Uniformly apply the asphaltic binder at the rate determined by the Engineer. The
quantity will vary with pavement porosity. Take care to place sufficient binder to
satisfy the fabric and make the membrane impervious to water without causing a
slippage plane. The applications rate are typically 0.25 to 0.30 gallons per square
yard. Apply binder using a distributor.
G.
Heat the asphalt binder high enough to permit a uniform spray pattern. Ensure air
temperature is at least 50F and rising before applying binder and fabric.
H.
Place the paving geotextile onto asphalt sealant with minimal wrinkling. Slit, lay
flat and tack all wrinkles or folds higher than 1 inch (25 mm). Broom and/or roll
the paving geotextile to maximize fabric contact with the pavement surface.
I.
At geotextile joints, overlap the geotextile 1 to 3 inches (25 to 75 mm) to ensure

full closure. Overlap transverse joints in the direction of paving to prevent edge
pickup by the paver. Apply additional asphalt sealant to paving geotextile
overlaps to ensure proper bonding of the double fabric layer.
J.
If asphalt sealant bleeds through the fabric, treat the affected areas with blotter.
Minimize traffic on the geotextile. If circumstances require traffic on the fabric,
apply blotter and place slippery when wet signs.
K.
Broom the excess blotter from the geotextile surfaces before placing the overlay.
Repair all damaged fabric before placing overlay. Apply a light tack coat before
placing the overlay. To avoid damaging the geotextile, do not turn equipment on
the geotextile.
L.
Place a hot asphalt concrete overlay within 48 hours after placing the paving
geotextile. Limit the lay-down temperature of the mix to a maximum of 325F
(163C) except when the paving geotextile is composed of polypropylene fibers,
limit the lay-down temperature of the mix to a maximum of 300F (149C).
PART 4:
4.1
GENERAL
A.
No separate payment will be made for geotextile. Geotextile is considered

incidental to other items.
END OF SECTION
Section 02110
GEOTEXTILES
Page 5of 5

Sixth Edition, March 2003
SECTION 02112
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, CONCRETE, CURB,
SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND/OR OTHER ITEMS
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work consists of removing and disposing of existing pavement, concrete

curb, combined curb and gutter, sidewalk, private driveways, and crosswalks,
along with any structures designated for removal in the contract documents.
Details of removal are specified in the contract documents.
PART 2:
PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3:
EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL
A.
Dispose of all existing pavement, concrete curb, sidewalk and/or combined curb
and gutter specified for removal in the contract documents or directed by the
Engineer. Exercise care in such removal to assure that remaining nearby facilities
and/or structures are not disturbed. Restore to original condition any such
existing facilities or structures damaged by construction activities.
B.
Cut, remove and dispose of designated existing pavement to the lines indicated on
the contract documents, or directed by the Engineer. Make straight and
approximately vertical cuts of edges along which new pavement is to be placed.
C.
Remove and dispose of existing private concrete driveways and/or sidewalks

which interfere with construction of street improvements or which do not match
new grade as shown on the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer.
Remove such driveways and/or sidewalks to a distance of 2 feet behind curbs or
sidewalk, or to greater distance if required to properly match the new grade.
Remove along the neat line produced by a concrete saw cut. Make cuts to depth
of at least 25 percent of the concrete thickness and take care in removing the
concrete assuring the slab breaks on the sawed neat line.
PAVEMENT MARKING REMOVAL

A.
Remove existing temporary and final pavement markings using any of the
following:
Sand blasting with air or water;
High-pressure water;
Steam or super-heated water; or
Mechanically grinding, sanding, scraping, brushing.
Section 02112
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, CONCRETE CURB,
SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND/OR STRUCTURES
Page 1 of 2

Sixth Edition, March 2003
Submit the method or methods to be used. The Contractor may submit written
proposals for other removal methods. An approved method may be subsequently
disapproved if it damages the marking surface or inadequately removes existing
markings.
Remove sand or other material on the surface left by the removal as the work
progresses. Satisfactorily repair surfaces damaged by marking removal at
Contractor expense.
PART 4:
4.1
GENERAL
A.
4.2
Unless otherwise noted on the plans or as contained in the bid schedule, separate
measurement and payment will not be made for items designated for removal on
the project. Removal of such items is considered incidental to other bid items.
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL

A.
4.3
All asphalt required to be removed shall be measured by the square yard as

described by the contract documents.
CONCRETE REMOVAL
A.
Measurement and payment for concrete removal and disposal will not be paid for
separately. Concrete removal and disposal will be incidental to and included as
part of Section 2230, Street Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction.
END OF SECTION
Section 02112
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, CONCRETE CURB,
SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND/OR STRUCTURES
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 02113
ADJUSTING EXISTING MANHOLES, LAMPHOLES, INLETS,
WATER VALVE BOXES, WATER SERVICES, AND FIRE HYDRANTS TO GRADE
PART 1:
1.1.
GENERAL
A.
PART 2:
2.1
This item consists of locating and adjusting to grade existing manholes,

lampholes, inlets, water valve boxes or services, and fire hydrants as shown in the
contract documents or as staked in the field.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
PART 3:
3.1
GENERAL
Provide all materials including concrete, brick and mortar, complying with the
specification section for the particular material involved, or if the material is not
covered in these specifications, the material used for adjusting shall be equal, and
comparable to that in the existing structure. If extensions for water valve boxes or
services and fire hydrants are required beyond the length found to exist, provide
items comparable to those in the existing structure.
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Bring to required grade, all existing manholes, inlets, lampholes and water valve
boxes by either lowering or raising in accordance with the details shown in the
contract documents. Do not lower manholes, lampholes or inlets by removal of
portions of the cones or barrel sections. Accomplish downward adjustments by
replacement of existing sections with shorter sections. Assure that all structures
have a minimum of one 2 inch concrete adjusting ring and a maximum of 12
inches of rings under the casting. Do not use brick and/or mortar for adjustment
of castings.
B.
On manholes requiring steps, assure that maximum spacing between steps is 16

inches and that 10 inches is the maximum distance from the top of the manhole
cone section to the first step.
Section 02113
Page 1 of 3

C.
Excavate water valve boxes and services to readily determine whether height
adjustment can be made without substituting a longer section. Adjust water valve
boxes and services laterally so the valve stems can be operated by the extension.
Adjust water services by raising or lowering the curb key stop and extension box.
D.
Adjust manholes, lampholes and water valve boxes to final grade before placing
the final pavement surface. If required, make preliminary adjustment to allow
placement of base courses and paving adjacent the manhole, lamphole or water
valve.
E.
Provide backfill material conforming to the requirements of Section 02235, 3/4

inch Minus Crushed Base Course, and compacted to at least 95 percent of the
maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.
F.
If required, make minor adjustments 5 feet to 10 feet in the horizontal location of

existing fire hydrants to insure that they are the required minimum distance
behind the back of curb. At the time of construction staking, any hydrants which
require horizontal adjustment will be located by the Engineer and the adjusted
location will be staked by the Engineer.
G.
Make any minor adjustments required as dimensioned in the contract documents

to the height of existing fire hydrants to insure that they are at a reasonable height
above the back of curb or sidewalk. At the time construction staking, any
hydrants which require vertical adjustment will be located by the Engineer and the
adjusted height will be staked by the Engineer. Accomplish extension of fire
hydrants height only by the use of standard extension spools provided by the
hydrant manufacturer.
H.
Before final acceptance, clean all manholes, lampholes, inlets and water valve
boxes/services. Assure that all water valve boxes, services and fire hydrants are
operational.
I.
All requirements of this section shall apply to new, as well as to existing,

manholes, lampholes, valve boxes, water services and fire hydrants.
Section 02113
Page 2 of 3

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1
GENERAL
A.
Work associated with adjusting existing appurtenances will not be paid for
separately. Adjusting existing features will be incidental to other items unless
otherwise noted in the bid schedule.
END OF SECTION
Section 02113
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 02114
RELOCATING, INSTALLING, OR REMOVING UTILITY POLES,
STREET SIGNS, MAILBOXES, AND FENCES
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A.
This item consists of relocating or removing existing street lights, signs, power
poles, telephone poles and mailboxes as shown in the contract documents.
PART 2:
PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3:
EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
POWER, STREET LIGHT AND TELEPHONE POLES

A.
Affected utility companies are to move power, street light, and telephone poles,
unless they are designated in the contract documents to be removed or relocated
by the Contractor.
B.
When relocating or removing power poles, street light poles and telephone poles,
comply with any applicable requirements of the contract documents.
STREET AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS

A.
Remove and reinstall all street, stop and other traffic control/direction signs
designated to be relocated by the Contractor as shown in the contract documents,
or as designated by the Engineer. Include removing, temporarily installing,
storing, and permanently installing the signs.
B.
The locations shown in the contract documents for street lights, street signs,
power poles, telephone poles and private mailboxes to be relocated are
approximate only. The specific locations are to be designated by the Engineer.
C.
Relocate all signs within the staked grading limits whose existing locations do not
conform to final plan locations. Also relocate signs outside the staked grading
limits to conform to final plan locations.
Section 02114
Page 1 of 4

Fifth Edition, March 2003 & 2007
3.3
D.
Preserve all street, stop and other traffic and direction signs that are to remain in
place. Should any such signs be moved for the contractors convenience,
permanently reinstall the signs after construction of curb and gutter is complete.
Assume responsibility for any damage to such signs. No extra compensation will
be allowed for preserving, removing or replacing stop and traffic control and
direction signs designated to remain in place, since this work is considered
incidental to the contract unit prices for the various items of the contract.
E.
Where stop signs and traffic direction or control signs are temporarily removed,
but are needed for traffic reasons during construction, temporarily install a similar
stop sign or traffic direction sign in locations approved by the Engineer. Assure
that the temporary signs remain in place until the permanent stop or traffic control
signs are in place.
F.
Do not install street signs temporarily.
G.
Store signs which are not used for temporary installation.
H.
Set all permanent signs according to the detail as shown on the drawings.
Replace all signs which have been damaged after removal with new signs.
I.
Install sign systems at locations shown on the drawings or as directed in the field
by the Engineer. Sign types are included on the drawings. Assure that all sign
sizes and locations conform to the latest issue of the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (MUTCD) or to MDT standards.
J.
Remove all signs designated for removal so not to damage the signs. Salvage and
deliver all such damaged signs to the Engineer.
MAILBOXES
A.
3.4
If mailboxes are encountered within the staked grading limits of the project,
remove the mailbox and place on temporary posts outside, but immediately
adjacent to, the construction limits. Within 48 hours following construction of the
curb and/or sidewalk and removal of curb forms, reinstall the mailboxes behind
the curb and/or sidewalk in accordance with current U.S. Post Office regulations
and applicable MDT or City of Missoula standards.
FENCES
A.
Remove and Relocate - Fences within the staked construction limits shall be
carefully removed and stored at a location where they will not be damaged.
Section 02114
Page 2 of 4

Before removing fencing on any property, contact the land owner to coordinate
the work. Relocate the fence to the new location as staked in the field or as
directed by the Engineer. Provide all materials, hardware, and labor necessary to
relocate the fence. In some cases it may be necessary to replace certain fence
posts. Replace posts as directed by the Engineer with posts of like material and
color. Obtain approval from the Engineer before installing contractor furnished
posts.
B.
PART 4:
4.1
GENERAL
A.
4.2
Remove and Replace - Fences within the staked construction limits shall be
removed and disposed of in a legal manner. Before removing fencing on any
property, contact the land owner to coordinate the work. Construct a new fence as
detailed in the contract documents in a location as staked in the field or as
directed by the Engineer. Provide all materials, hardware, and labor necessary to
install the new fence.
Measurement and payment for the following items is made only if listed as
separate pay items in the contract documents. If not so listed separately, these
items will not be paid for separately but are to be included as incidental to the
other pay items of the contract documents.
STREET AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS

A.
Reinstall all street, stop and traffic control or direction signs removed for the
Contractors convenience at no cost.
B.
Street, stop, and traffic control or direction signs designated for installation,
relocation or removal shall be measured and paid for by the number of street, stop
and traffic control or direction signs relocated or removed at the unit price bid for
the item listed below, which price and payment constitute full compensation for
all materials, excavation, temporary and/or permanent installation, forming and
curing of concrete, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete
the item. If two or more signs exist on one post, they are defined as one sign for
payment purposes.
C.
When a sign system is measured by the each, measure each sign system as one
sign regardless of the number of sign panels or supports. A sign system includes
the supports.
Section 02114
Page 3 of 4

Fifth Edition, March 2003 & 2007
4.3
4.4
4.5
MAILBOXES
A.
Reinstall existing mailboxes removed for the Contractors convenience at no cost.
B.
Mailboxes designated for relocation shall be measured and paid for by the number
of mailboxes relocated at the unit price bid for the item listed below which price
and payment constitutes full compensation for all materials, excavation,
temporary and/or permanent installation, forming and curing of concrete,
equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
FENCES
A.
Reinstall existing fences removed for the Contractors convenience at no cost.
B.
Fences designated for relocation shall be measured and paid for by the lineal foot
relocated at the unit price bid for the item listed below, which price and payment
constitutes full compensation for all materials, excavation, temporary and/or
permanent installation, forming and curing of concrete, equipment, tools, labor,
and incidentals necessary to complete the item. New fence posts required at the
direction of the Owner will not be paid for separately but will be included in the
unit price bid for the item listed in the bid schedule.
GENERAL
A.
Payment indicated to include complete compensation for all labor, equipment,

materials and incidentals required for the completion of the work.
END OF SECTION
Section 02114
Page 4 of 4

SECTION 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
PART I:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This work is the clearing and grubbing, excavation, filling or backfilling, and
subgrade preparation to the specified lines, grades and cross sections as
preparation for overlying base course or other courses as shown in the contract
documents. Also included are the removal and disposal of debris and excess soil,
the furnishing and placement of fill materials, and compaction.
REFERENCES
A.
The current publications listed below are a part of this specification.
AASHTO T99
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures Using 5-lb. (2.5 kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305 mm)
Drop
ASTM D698
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures Using 5-lb. (2.5kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305mm)
Drop
AASHTO T191
(ASTM D1556)
Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method
AASHTO T238
(ASTM D2922)
Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear

Methods (Shallow Depth)
AASHTO T239
(ASTM D3017)
AASHTO T11
(ASTM C117)
Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
Materials Finer Than 75mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing
AASHTO T27
(ASTM C136)
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
AASHTO T89
Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils
AASHTO T90
ASTM D4318
Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity

Index of Soils
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 1 of 10

1.3
DENSITY CONTROL TESTING

A.
B.
Field Density Testing

1.
Meeting the quality control and quality assurance testing requirements

in Section 01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Assurance.
2.
In-place field density tests for quality are at Contractor expense

meeting AASHTO T191 (ASTM D1556), Sand Cone Method; or
AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938) Nuclear Densometer Methods.
Quality assurance field density testing frequency is at the discretion of
the Engineer.
3.
Retesting of failing areas is at the expense of the Contractor.
Laboratory Maximum Density and Optimum Moisture

1.
C.
PART 2:
2.1
Laboratory tests for each on-site natural soil or each source of off-site
material, including borrow material, to determine the laboratory
maximum density values and optimum compaction moisture content
under AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.
Materials Submittals
1.
Submit to the Engineer results of gradation tests for

Subexcavation/Replacement below subgrade pitrun gravel/sand.
2.
Submit to the Engineer, lab test results of soils and/or aggregates that
contain laboratory moisture-density relationship information.
PRODUCTS
ON-SITE EMBANKMENT AND IMPORTED BORROW MATERIALS

A.
B.
Fill and backfill are to consist of natural soils free from organic matter, frozen
material, refuse, construction debris or other man-made items. Obtain approval
of the Owner for all fill before placing. Incorporate only suitable trail
excavation material into the embankment, furnish unclassified borrow to
complete the embankment.
Special Borrow is to consist of a well graded sand and gravel, free of organic
and other delecerious material, meeting the AASHTO M-145 requirements for
A-1-a group classification, with 100% passing the 4 sieve and a maximum of
8% passing the No. 200 sieve. The material may consist of up to 50%
millings, uniformly blended.
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 2 of 10

2.2
2.3
SUBEXCAVATION/REPLACEMENT BELOW SUBGRADE

A.
Sub-excavation consists of removing and disposing of unstable material from

below planned subgrade elevation in cut sections or from below the natural
ground line in embankment sections.
B.
Replacement material for sub-excavations consists of either:

1.
Suitable materials from within the project limits that meets the special
borrow specification, or
2.
Import special borrow if suitable material is not present within the

project limits.
GEOTEXTILE
1.
PART 3:
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION

A.
Perform clearing and grubbing including the excavation, removal and disposal
of roots, stumps, sod, or any organic material and buried debris from within
construction limits. Remove unsuitable material to at least 12 inches (30cm)
below subgrade elevation.
B.
Stockpile for project use any topsoil removed by clearing and grubbing. See
geotechnical report prepared by TetraTech dated June 16, 2014 for anticipated
topsoil depths.
C.
Dispose of all Clearing and Grubbing material in accordance with all federal,
state, and local regulations.
EXCAVATIONS STABILITY AND SAFETY

A.
3.3
Use geotextile as specified in Section 02100 as a separation fabric

between native and imported material when performing subexcavation.
Meet OSHA requirements for excavations and excavated material stockpiles.

This may require design of temporary slopes and/or shoring by a licensed
professional engineer.
PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
A.
Take precautions to protect all adjoining private and public property and
facilities, including underground and overhead utilities, curbs, sidewalks,
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 3 of 10

driveways, structures, fences, and vegetation. Any disturbed or damaged

facilities will be suitably restored or replaced consistent with conditions(s)
which existed prior to construction.
B.
3.4
Privately owned structures located within the existing right of way and within
construction limits of the project shall not be removed until directed by the
Engineer. Take care in removing such items so as to minimize the damage to
the structures.
EXCAVATION
A.
Excavate to the specified lines and grades. Excavate without causing rutting,
pumping or other disturbance to underlying materials.
B.
Excavation made outside the specified grade limits is not measured for
payment in the Excavation or Embankment In-Place quantities.
1.
Restore overexcavated areas as directed by the Engineer. Correct

subgrade disturbance by removing the disturbed soil and replacing and
compacting to reach at least 95% of the maximum laboratory dry
density determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.
2.
Correct subgrade disturbance before placing overlying fill, backfill,

base course or other courses. Disturbed soils may be replaced with
imported material approved by the Engineer and compacted to 95% of
maximum laboratory dry density determined by AASHTO T99 or
ASTM D698.
C.
Maintain the subgrade to drain at all times. Construct side ditches or gutters
from cuts to embankments to prevent erosion damage to embankments.
D.
Construct and maintain temporary drainage where existing surface drainage,

sewers, or under-drainage are disturbed during the work until permanent
drainage facilities are completed. Protect and preserve all existing drains,
sewers, sub-surface drains, conduits, gas lines, and other underground
structures which may be affected by the work. Repair all damage to these
facilities or structures resulting from the work, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
E.
Excavate to minimize foundation and/or subgrade soil exposure to erosion,

drying or infiltrating moisture. Perform excavation to provide drainage away
from foundation/subgrade soils and minimize the potential for surface runoff to
enter the foundation/subgrade soils.
F.
Grade all intersecting streets and approaches within the project limits as
specified or as directed using suitable materials on the surfaces to produce
smooth riding and satisfactory approaches to the intersections.
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 4 of 10

3.5
DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A.
3.6
DUST CONTROL
A.
3.7
Dispose of debris and unused excavated materials off the project site in
accordance with all applicable state and local regulations. Locate and provide
suitable disposal areas.
Furnish dust control meeting Section 01500, Construction and Temporary

Facilities, requirements.
SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION

A.
B.
General
1.
Assure the subgrade beneath pavements, curb, or sidewalks is natural soil

free of topsoil, organic material or refuse. Place subbase, base courses,
and pavement components, curb and sidewalk over the prepared subgrade
as soon as practical. Do not place components on frozen subgrade. No
separate payment is made for subgrade preparation, since it is considered
incidental to construction of overlying pavements/structures.
2.
If the surface of a previous roadbed or pavement surface matches the

surface of the finished subgrade, scarify the top 6 inches (15cm) of the
previous surface the full width of the subgrade to permit uniform
reshaping and compaction.
Fine Grading
1.
C.
Assure the finished surface does not deviate not more than 0.1 foot (3cm)
at any point from the staked elevation; and that sum of the deviations from
true grade of any two points less than 30 feet (9m) apart does not exceed
0.1 foot (3cm).
Compaction
1.
2.
Compact the upper 8-inches (20 cm) of the subgrade to at least 95% of the
laboratory maximum, determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.
Proof roll the subgrade surface for observation by the Engineer. Compact
all soft, yielding or otherwise unstable areas to provide adequate support
of construction equipment as determined by the Engineer. Also compact
the subgrade to meet the specified density requirements. Remove and
replace any unstable or otherwise unsuitable subgrade as specified under
Section 3.9, Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade.
Due to the location of the trail on the existing fill embankment,
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 5 of 10

vibratory rolling methods to compact the pavement layer are not

allowed, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. If the contractor
is experiencing difficulty achieving compaction utilizing non-vibratory
methods, the Engineer will contact Tetra Tech to discuss alternative
compaction methods.
3.8
EMBANKMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION

A.
B.
General
1.
Place fill materials (embankment) to the specified lines and grades. Place
fill in uniform layers not exceeding 8 inches (20cm) in loose thickness.
Once placed, moisten or aerate, mix, and compact each layer as specified.
Work clay soils to maximum 2-inch (5cm) nominal size before
compacting. Do not begin fill placement until the subgrade construction
has been approved by the Engineer. Do not place fill on wet or frozen
areas. Do not operate heavy equipment for spreading or compacting fill
within four feet (1.2m) of structures.
2.
If grading operations are suspended due to weather, blade the entire area
until it is smooth, free of depressions and ruts, and crowned to drain water.
Compaction
1.
Control the fill moisture content to assist in obtaining the specified field
density. Maintain the moisture content of fill soils within 3 percent of
optimum moisture. Compact each fill layer and the top 8 inches (20cm)
of subgrade soil to at least 95% of maximum laboratory density as
determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698. Compact areas within
four feet (1.2M) of structures in maximum 8 inch (20cm) loose lifts
using power-driven hand held tampers.
2.
Apply water, when required, at the locations and in the amounts required
to compact the material to the specified requirements. Maintain an
adequate water supply during the work. Assure the equipment used for
watering is of the capacity and design to provide uniform water
application. Apply water during the work to control dust and to maintain
all embankment and base courses in a damp condition in accordance with
Section 1500. Water required for compacting subgrade and/or
embankments may be obtained from the municipal system if approved by
the Owner, or from other sources.
3.
Do not place fill or embankment when moisture content prevents effective

compaction or causes rutting. Dry all embankments having excessive
moisture by scarifying and blading the affected areas before compacting or
placing succeeding layers.
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 6 of 10

3.9
3.10
SUBEXCAVATION/REPLACEMENT BELOW SUBGRADE

A.
Subexcavation consists of removing and disposing of unsuitable material from

below planned subgrade elevation in cut sections or from the natural ground line
in embankment sections.
B.
Soil is unsuitable if, in the opinion of the Engineer, it contains excessive organics,
refuse, construction debris, or other objectionable material; or if it unstable,
rutting or yielding; or if it contains excessive moisture. Generally, soils will be
subexcavated and replaced only if they are unable to adequately support
equipment typically used for excavation and soil transport.
C.
Assure the Engineer has measured the area where unstable materials have been
removed before backfilling. Do not backfill any area where unstable foundation
soils have been excavated until authorized by the Engineer. Backfill placed
without approval may be ordered removed and replaced at Contractor expense.
D.
Prior to placing backfill, place geotextile fabric as a separation layer between

native and imported material. Install fabric longitudinally with a minimum of 24
of overlap between sheets.
E.
Backfill with either suitable soils from within the project limits or imported
pitrun gravel complying with the requirements of Section 2.2,
Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade. Different measurement and
payment items are used for the on-site and pitrun gravel replacements.
F.
Compact the replacement material to 95 percent of the maximum laboratory

density as determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.
PROTECTION OF THE WORK

A.
PART 4:
4.1
Repair damaged embankments to the specified elevations and grades. Maintain

ditches and drains along the subgrade to drain the subgrade. Assure the finished
grade does not deviate more than 0.1 (3cm) foot at any point from the staked
elevation and the sum of the elevations from true grade of any two points not
more than 30 feet (9m) apart does not exceed 0.1 foot (3cm). Do not place any
surface course or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved by
the Engineer.
MEASUREMENT
A.
EXCAVATION
3.
Measure trail excavation in its original position as follows:

Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 7 of 10

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
B.
The amount of excavation to be paid is the quantity shown in the bid

schedule. Excavation quantities will be adjusted for authorized changes
that affect the quantity or for errors made computing this quantity. If
there is evidence that the quantity specified is incorrect, submit
calculations, drawings, or other evidence indicating why the quantity is
in error and request in writing that the quantity be adjusted.
EMBANKMENT
1.
C.
Trail prism excavation;

Rock material excavated and removed from below subgrade in
cut sections;
Unsuitable material below subgrade and unsuitable material
beneath embankment areas when a pay item for subexcavation
is not shown in the bid schedule;
Ditches;
Conserved topsoil.
Embankment construction will not be measured separately.
IMPORTED BORROW
1.
2.
3.
Where there is not sufficient material on site to construct trail

embankments, imported borrow will be required. Measure imported
borrow by the ton in the hauling vehicle.
The quantities measured for payment are the amount of imported borrow
actually used in the completed and accepted work in accordance with the
plans and specifications.
To measure and pay for imported borrow, provide a commercial or project
weighing system as follows:
a.
b.
Commercial Weighing System Use permanently installed and

certified commercial scales.
Project Weighing System Furnish, erect, and maintain
acceptable automatic digital scales. Provide scales that record
mass at least to the nearest 100 pounds.. Maintain the scale
accuracy to within 0.5 percent of the correct mass throughout
the range of use.
Do not use spring balances.
Install and maintain platform scales with the platform level with
rigid bulkheads at each end. Make the platform of sufficient length
to permit simultaneous weighing of all axle loads of the hauling
vehicle. Coupled vehicles may be weighed separately or together
according to Section 2.20 paragraph UR 3.3 of NIST Handbook 44.
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 8 of 10

Before production on the project, have the weighing portion of

the system checked and certified by the State Bureau of Weights
and Measures or a private scale service certified by the Bureau of
Weights and Measures. Seal the system to prevent tampering or
other adjustment after certification.
Attach an automatic printer to the scale that is programmed or
otherwise equipped to prevent manual override of all mass
information. For weighed pay quantities, program the printer to
provide the following information for each weighing:
(1) Project number;
(2) Item number and description;
(3) Date;
(4) Time;
(5) Ticket number;
(6) Haul unit number;
(7) Net mass in load at least to the nearest 100 pounds;
(8) Subtotal net mass for each haul unit since the
beginning of the shift; and
(9) Accumulated total net mass for all haul units since
the beginning of the shift.
If a printer malfunctions or breaks down, the Contractor may
manually weigh and record masses for up to 48 hours provided the
method of weighing meets all other contract requirements.
Furnish competent scale operators to operate the system.
When platform scales are used, randomly weigh the empty haul
units at least twice per shift.
Use an approved format for the mass records. Furnish the
original record(s) and a written certification as to the accuracy of
the masses at the end of each shift.
D.
SPECIAL BORROW
1.
E.
Special borrow will be measured and paid for under the Import Borrow
line item.
SUBEXCAVATION
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 9 of 10

2.
4.2
The amount of subexcavation to be paid is the quantity measured in the

field by the Engineer. There is no planned quantity for this item, the
quantity included in the plans is for subexcavation that is required during
construction as directed by the Engineer.
PAYMENT
A.
The accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract unit price per unit of
measurement as reflected in the bid schedule. No separate payment for
embankment construction will be made. This work is considered incidental to
excavation.
END OF SECTION
Section 02231
TRAIL EXCAVATION
Page 10 of 10

SECTION 02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This work is the placing of one or more base courses composed of crushed gravel,
stone or other similar materials meeting the gradation and other quality criteria
specified herein.
REFERENCES
AASHTO T11
Amount Finer than No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve in Aggregate
AASHTO T27
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
AASHTO T89
Determining Liquid Limit of Soils
AASHTO T90
AASHTO T176
Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T96
Resistance to Degradation By Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles

Machine
Moisture-density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
Using 5-lb (2.5 kg) Rammer and 12-Inch (305 mm) Drop
Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate
AASHTO T99
(ASTM D698)
ASTM D5821
AASHTO T191
(ASTM D1556)
AASHTO T238
(ASTM D2922)
AASHTO T239
(ASTM D3017)
1.3
Density of Soil In-Place By Sand Cone Method

Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place By Nuclear Method
(Shallow Depth)
Moisture Content of Soil-Aggregate In-Place By Nuclear Method
(Shallow Depth)

A.
Section 02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 1 of 6

B.
1.
Meet the quality control and quality assurance testing requirements in

section 01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance.
2.
In-place field density tests for quality assurance will be performed by the
Owner meeting AASHTO T191 (ASTM D1556) Sand Cone method or
AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938) Nuclear Densometer method. Quality
assurance field density testing frequency is at the discretion of the
Engineer.
3.
Laboratory Maximum Density and Optimum Moisture

1.
1.4
MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
1.
PART 2:
2.1
Submit to the Engineer gradations, moisture density curves and other test
results for sources to be used for base materials prior to delivery to the site
for approval by the Engineer. If recycled materials are proposed, CBR test
data must be submitted to the Engineer to assure consistency with design
requirements.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Moisture density curves will be provided by the Contractor for each base
material provided. These will be provided at the expense of the
Contractor.
Furnish aggregate base material meeting the applicable aggregate quality

requirements.
CRUSHED BASE MATERIAL

A.
Consists of both fine and coarse fragments of crushed stone or crushed gravel,
and/or natural gravel, and when approved, blended with sand, finely crushed
stone, crusher screenings, recycled concrete and/or asphalt or other similar
materials.
B.
Use crushed stone or gravel consisting of hard, durable particles of fragments of

stone, free of excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces, dirt, or other
deleterious matter, and having a percent of wear of not exceeding 50 at 500
revolutions when tested under AASHTO T96.
Section 02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 2 of 6

2.3
C.
Crush material so that the percentage of fractured particles in the finished product
is as constant and uniform as practical. Crush to produce material where at least
35 percent of the material retained on the No. 4 sieve has at least one fractured
face.
D.
Incorporate all material produced in the crushing operation and passing the No. 4
mesh sieve into the base material necessary to meet the gradation requirements.
E.
The Contractor is required to furnish crushed base material. No Owner provided

material sources are available for this material.
GRADATION
A.
As determined by AASHTO Methods T11 and T27, furnish material for the
grading specified in the contract documents including binder or filler, which may
have been added at the plant or at the site, meeting the requirements of that
grading in the Table of Gradations below:
TABLE OF GRADATIONS
PERCENTAGES BY WEIGHT PASSING SQUARE MESH SIEVE
Passing
1 Inch
1 Inch
Inch
Inch
No. 4 Sieve
No. 10 Sieve
No. 200 Sieve
1 Minus
100
25 - 60
0-8
1 Minus
Minus
100
40 - 70
25 - 55
2 - 10
100
40 - 70
25 - 55
2 - 10
B.
Up to 5% oversized material is permitted provided that the oversized material

passes the screen size immediately larger than the top size specified. The
produced material between the maximum screen opening and the No.4 sieve shall
be reasonably well graded.
C.
Suitability of the aggregate is based on samples obtained during placement in the

project within limits allowed in the table for the particular grading specified.
D.
That portion of the fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve must be less than 60
percent of that portion passing the No. 40 sieve.
Section 02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 3 of 6

E.
2.4
WATERING:
A.
PART 3:
3.1
3.2
The liquid limit for that portion of the fine aggregate passing a No. 40 sieve
cannot exceed 25, nor the plasticity index exceed 6, as determined by AASHTO
T89 and T90.
Use uncontaminated water.
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Before placing the base course, smooth and shape the surface of the underlying
subgrade, sub-base or base course to the cross section shown on the plans before
placing the base course.
B.
Do not place base course on a wet or muddy subgrade or sub-base course.

Complete at least one area of finished and accepted subgrade, sub-base or
underlying base before the placing of any base course.
PLACEMENT AND SPREADING

A.
Mix and place the material in maximum 8 inches (20 centimeters) compacted
layers unless otherwise approved. Deposit and spread each load of material on
the prepared subgrade, or on a completed sub-base or base course layer
continuously without interruption. Discontinue operating haul units over
subgrade, or over any sub-base or base course completed if the haul units damage
the subgrade, sub-base or base course.
B.
Deposit and spread the material in a uniform layer, without segregation, to a loose
depth so that when compacted, and making allowance for any filler to be blended
on the road, the layer has the specified thickness.
C.
Spread material using dump boards, spreader boxes, or vehicles equipped to

distribute the material in a uniform layer. The material may be deposited in
windrows mixed and spread as described below.
D.
Construct each layer meeting these requirements. Blade smooth and thoroughly
compact each layer as specified before placing the succeeding layer.
Section 02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 4 of 6

3.3
3.4
E.
If segregation or moisture problems exist, or if the material was placed on the

road in windrows, thoroughly blade-mix the material of the affected layer by
alternately blading to the center and back to the edges of the street.
F.
Uniformly add water, when required, on site and place in amounts required to
compact the material as necessary to aid in densification and to limit segregation.
Maintain an adequate water supply during the work. Assure the equipment used
for watering is of the capacity and design to provide uniform water application.
G.
Apply water during the work to control dust and to maintain the base course in a
damp condition in accordance with Section 01500 under Dust Control.
H.
Water required for compacting base gravel may be obtained from the municipal
system if approved by the owner, or from other sources.
FIELD DENSITY REQUIREMENTS

A.
Compact placed material the full width by rolling with suitable tamping
equipment or power rollers. Correct all irregularities or depressions that develop
during rolling by loosening the material in these places and adding or removing
material, as required.
B.
Perform blading and compacting alternately as required or directed, to maintain a

smooth, even, uniformly compacted surface until the final inspection. Along
curbs, headers, manholes, and similar structures, and at all places not accessible to
the roller, compact the base course material with suitable mechanical tampers or
hand tampers to reach the compaction requirements.
C.
Provide the watering and rolling required to obtain a minimum field density of 95
percent of maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T99. No separate
compensation is made for rolling and watering the base course other than the base
course bid item or items listed on the contract documents.
SURFACE TOLERANCES
A.
The base course surface when finished and tested with a 10-foot (3.0 meter)
straight edge placed on the surface with its center line parallel to the center line of
the street, will not have a surface deviation from the straight edge exceeding 3/8inch (1.0 centimeter). Additionally, the finished grade cannot deviate more than
0.05 feet (1.5 centimeters) at any point from the staked elevation, and further, the
sum of the deviations from two points not more than 30 feet (9.0 meters) apart
cannot exceed 0.05 feet (1.5 centimeters).
Section 02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 5 of 6

B.
For base course receiving asphalt concrete surfacing, the finished grade cannot
deviate more than 0.02 feet (0.6 centimeters) at any point from the staked
elevations, and the sum of the deviations from two points not more than 30 feet
(9.0 meters) apart cannot exceed 0.02 feet (0.6 centimeters).
C.
If patching of the base course is necessary to meet the tolerances, perform

patching using methods and aggregates approved by the Engineer. Payment for
patching aggregate is at the unit price bid for the base course material.
PART 4:
4.1
MEASUREMENT
A.
CRUSHED BASE COURSE

1.
4.2
Crushed base course will not be measured separately. It is considered

incidental to other items.
PAYMENT
A.
No separate payment will be made for crushed base course. Crushed base course
is considered incidental to other items.
END OF SECTION
Section 02235
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 6 of 6

SECTION 02236
STABILIZED RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) BASE COURSE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
This work consists of constructing a stabilized base course layer composed of

recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) materials and a stabilizing agent meeting the
gradation and other quality criteria specified herein.
REFERENCES
AASHTO T11 Amount Finer than No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve in Aggregate
AASHTO T27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
AASHTO T89 Determining Liquid Limit of Soils
AASHTO T90 Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
AASHTO T176 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T96 Resistance to Degradation By Abrasion and Impact in the Los
Angeles Machine
AASHTO T99 (ASTM D698)
Moisture-density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
Using 5-lb (2.5 kg) Rammer and 12-Inch (305 mm) Drop
ASTM D5821 Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse
Aggregate
AASHTO T191 Density of Soil In-Place By Sand Cone Method
(ASTM D1556)
AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938)
In-Place density and water content of the soil and soil aggregate by
Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth)
1.3

A.

1.
Meet the quality control and quality assurance testing requirements in

Section 01400, Contractor Quality Control and Quality Assurance.
Section 02236
Page 1 of 6

2.
In-place field density tests for quality assurance are at Owner expense
meeting AASHTO T191 (ASTM D1556) Sand Cone method or
AASHTOT310 (ASTM ( D6938) Nuclear Densometer method. Quality
assurance field density testing frequency is at the discretion of the
Engineer.
3.
B. Laboratory Maximum Density and Optimum Moisture

1.
1.4
Moisture density curves will be provided by the Contractor for each base
material provided. These will be provided at the expense of the
Contractor.
MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
Submit to the Engineer gradations, moisture density curves and other test results
for sources to be used for base materials prior to delivery to the site for approval
by the Engineer.
Submit to the Engineer a plan for applying the stabilizing agent to the base
material for approval. The plan must include the method of application,
application rate, and a quality control method to ensure that the stabilizing agent
has been properly applied.
PART 2: PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT

2.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
2.2
2.3
Furnish aggregate base material meeting the applicable aggregate quality

requirements.
The contractor may use Minus Crushed Base Course in lieu of the Recycled
Asphalt Pavement Base Material. If Crushed Base Course is used, the gravel
must meet the Minus gradation per Section 02235 Crushed Base Course.
RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) BASE MATERIAL

A.
Consists of both fine and coarse fragments of RAP (milled pavement), and/or
natural gravel if required due to shortage of milled pavement.
B.
Use 100 percent RAP as provided by the owner. The primary stockpile of
recycled asphalt pavement material available to the contractor is located near
DOrazi Street in Missoula, Montana. This stockpile was created in 2012. The
Contractor is responsible for hauling the millings from this location to the project.
GRADATION
Section 02236
Page 2 of 6

A.
As determined by AASHTO Methods T11 and T27, furnish material meeting the
requirement below:
TABLE OF GRADATIONS
PERCENTAGES BY WEIGHT PASSING SQUARE MESH SIEVE
Passing
1 1/2 Inch
1 Inch
3/4 Inch
1/2 Inch
No. 4 Sieve
No. 10 Sieve
No. 200 Sieve
2.4
25 to 60
0 to 8
B.
Up to 5% "oversized" material is permitted provided that the "oversized" material

passes the screen size immediately larger than the top size specified. The
produced material between the maximum screen opening and the No.4 sieve shall
be reasonably well graded.
C.
Suitability of the aggregate is based on samples obtained during placement in the

project within limits allowed in the table for the particular grading specified.
D.
That portion of the fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve must be less than 60
percent of that portion passing the No. 40 sieve.
E.
The liquid limit for that portion of the fine aggregate passing a No. 40 sieve
cannot exceed 25, nor the plasticity index exceed 6, as determined by AASHTO
T89 and T90.
BASE STABILIZING AGENT:

A.
2.5
100
Provide a liquid-based aggregate stabilization product that is diluted and applied

with water. When dried, the stabilized base layer should achieve a minimum
CBR value of 100 or greater, or an unconfined compressive strength of 200 psi or
greater.
WATERING:
A.
Use uncontaminated water.
Section 02236
Page 3 of 6

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL
A.
Before placing the RAP base course layer, smooth, shape, and compact the
surface of the underlying subgrade to the cross section shown on the plans before
placing the base course. The subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum of 90
percent of ASTM D1557, or 95 percent of ASTM D698. In areas where the
trail is to be constructed on existing highway embankment, the contractor
will not use vibratory rolling methods to compact the subgrade. If the
contractor is experiencing difficulty achieving compaction of the subgrade
utilizing non-vibratory methods, the contractor will notify the Engineer who
will determine alternative compaction methods.
B.
Do not place base course on a wet or muddy subgrade. Complete at least one area
of finished and accepted subgrade before the placing of any base course layer.
PLACEMENT AND SPREADING

A.
Deposit and spread each load of material on the prepared subgrade continuously
without interruption. Discontinue operating haul units over subgrade if the haul
units damage the subgrade.
B.
Deposit and spread the material in a uniform layer, without segregation, to a loose
depth so that when compacted, and making allowance for the stabilizer to be
blended on the road, the layer has the specified 4-inch thickness.
C.
Spread material using dump boards, spreader boxes, or vehicles equipped to

distribute the material in a uniform layer. The material may be deposited in
windrows mixed and spread as described below.
D.
Construct each layer meeting these requirements. Blade smooth and thoroughly
compact each layer as specified before placing the succeeding layer.
E.
If segregation or moisture problems exist, or if the material was placed on the

road in windrows, thoroughly blade-mix the material of the affected layer by
alternately blading to the center and back to the edges of the street.
F.
Uniformly add water, when required, on site and place in amounts required to
compact the material as necessary to aid in densification and to limit segregation.
Maintain an adequate water supply during the work. Assure the equipment used
for watering is of the capacity and design to provide uniform water application.
Section 02236
Page 4 of 6

3.3
G.
Apply water during the work to control dust and to maintain the base course in a
damp condition in accordance with Section 01500 under Dust Control.
H.
Water required for compacting base gravel may be obtained from the municipal
system if approved by the owner, or from other sources.
STABILIZATION AND COMPACTION

A.
The base stabilizing agent shall be uniformly blended/mixed with the RAP base
material according to the manufacturers recommendations.
B.
The blended RAP material shall meet the previous gradation requirements listed
under Materials.
C.
An owners representative should perform moisture tests in advance of the

application of the stabilizing agent to determine the moisture content of the
material to be stabilized. The results of the moisture tests should be used in
conjunction with moisture/density values, determined using ASTM D698 or
D1557, to determine the application rate of the stabilizing product.
D.
The contractor shall utilize a vibratory steel drum roller capable of producing 250
lbs/in of drum width or a pneumatic tired roller (self propelled or towed) having a
compacting width of 5 feet or more and sufficient mass to provide 100-250 lbs./in
of rolling width. In areas where the trail is to be constructed on existing
highway embankment, the contractor will not use vibratory rolling methods
to compact the subgrade. If the contractor is experiencing difficulty
achieving compaction of the subgrade utilizing non-vibratory methods, the
contractor will notify the Engineer who will determine alternative
compaction methods.
E.
During the compaction process, the contractor shall provide sufficient water so
the stabilized mixture will be at +/- 2 percent of the optimum moisture content per
ASTM D698. If a nuclear density gauge is used to determine the in-situ density
and moisture content, care should be taken to correct for the asphalt content of the
stabilized material. All stabilized material shall be blended, spread, watered,
compacted, and shaped, by the end of each workday.
F.
Following placement and prior to paving, the contractor shall maintain the
reclaimed surface so it is free of ruts, washboards, and potholes. This may require
application of water and using a scarifying blade on a road grader. Stabilized
material with a wash board surface condition shall be scarified to a depth below
that lowest surface of the wash boarded area and recompacted immediately prior
to paving. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Any
costs associated with maintaining this surface is incidental to Stabilized Recycled
Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Base Course.
Section 02236
Page 5 of 6

3.4
G.
The contractor shall allow the stabilized layer to cure for a minimum of 10
calendar days prior to paving. Depending on the product used, traffic might be
allowed to travel on the surface upon completion of compaction. Should the
treated surface be exposed to significant rainfall (more than 4 hours of continuous
rainfall per day) during the recommended 10-day cure period, the reclaimed
material should be allowed a minimum of one additional dry day (no rainfall) to
cure for each day where rain fell for more than 4 hours.
H.
Prior to paving, water shall be applied when directed by the engineer for dust
control.
SURFACE TOLERANCES
A.
The base course surface when finished and tested with a 10-foot straight edge
placed on the surface with its center line parallel to the center line of the street,
will not have a surface deviation more than 0.02 feet (0.6 centimeters) at any
point from the staked elevations, and the sum of the deviations from two points
not more than 30 feet (9.0 meters) apart cannot exceed 0.02 feet (0.6 centimeters).
B.
If patching of the stabilized base course is necessary to meet the tolerances,

perform patching using methods and mateials approved by the Engineer.
PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1
MEASUREMENT
A.
RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) BASE COURSE

1.
4.2
Measure recycled asphalt pavement base course in its final compacted and
treated position. Compute the quantity using the average end areas
multiplied by the horizontal distance along a centerline or reference line
between the end areas. Deduct any quantity outside the designed or staked
limits. Do not measure the treatment of the base course or haul separately.
Treatment and haul are considered incidental to the construction of the
base course layer.
PAYMENT
A.
measurement as reflected in the bid schedule.
END OF SECTION
Section 02236
Page 6 of 6

SECTION 02401
RETAINING WALLS
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
Tetra Tech has conducted a geotechnical investigation (report dated June 16,
2014) along the retaining wall alignments that are detailed in the project plan
sheets, and the report includes; soil borings, laboratory testing, and slope stability
analyses at the proposed retaining wall locations. Prior to bidding on the work for
this project, the contractor is strongly advised to, 1) perform a site walk of the
entire retaining wall alignment, 2) thoroughly review the project geotechnical
report, and 3) thoroughly review the project specifications. The retaining wall
contractor will design and construct the retaining walls to meet the requirements
in the Section 02403 Gravity or MSE Retaining Walls or Section 02402 Soil Nail
Retaining Walls.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
Section 02403 Gravity or MSE Retaining Walls

Section 02402 Soil Nail Retaining Walls
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
PART 3:
See Section 02403 Gravity or MSE Retaining Walls, and Section 02402 Soil Nail
Walls.
EXECUTION
3.1
The retaining walls must be constructed at the precise locations shown on the plans.
3.2
Temporary slopes cut to allow construction of the retaining walls must be constructed per
OSHA requirements.
3.3
As outlined in the project special provisions, prior to constructing the walls, the
contractor must submit design details, and global stability analyses, to ensure adequate
factors for short and long-term stability of the wall systems, as well as for the slopes
above and below the proposed retaining walls.
3.4
The retaining walls and associated cuts must be constructed without removing or
affecting the stability of the existing guardrail, or the stability of Highway 93.
Section 02401
RETAINING WALLS
Page 1 of 2

3.5
The Contractor may choose to utilize Highway 93 for staging purposes, provided that
traffic control is secured, and that a traffic control plan is submitted to MDT for approval
prior to commencing construction.
3.6
The Contractor must select equipment, and payloads of delivery and material trucks, to
ensure stability of the embankment slopes during construction. The Owner may elect to
limit the size of delivery trucks and loads delivered to the site based on an evaluation by
the Tetra Tech geotechnical engineer during construction.
3.7
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the contractor may choose to construct the wall
system of their choice, provided the walls meet the requirements of the project special
provisions, and contains the facing requirements detailed in the special provisions. The
table shown on Sheet C.8 of the drawings indicates the type of wall that can be
constructed in certain locations on the project.
PART 4:
4.1
Measurement and Payment for the design and construction of retaining walls will be as
outlined in Section 02402 and Section 02403 as applicable.
END OF SECTION
Section 02401
RETAINING WALLS
Page 2 of 2

SECTION 02402
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
B.
C.
PART 2:
Division I, Section 5, Retaining Walls and other appropriate articles of the 17th
Edition of the AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges (2002)
including current interim specifications.
FHWA publication No. FHWA-SA-96-069R, Manual for Design and
Construction Monitoring of Soil Nail Walls, revised Oct. 1998.
FWHA publication No. FHWA-IF-03-017, Geotechnical Engineering Circular
No. 7, 2003.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
2.2
This work consists of furnishing all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to
design, construct, and test drilled and grouted soil nail retaining walls with
shotcrete facing in accordance with these specifications and the lines, grades, and
dimensions shown on the plans or otherwise established by the Project Manager.
Soil nails must be drilled and grouted. Self-drilling hollow bars are allowed to be
used on the project provide they meet the design criteria outlined in this special
provision. Soil nail construction techniques consisting of driven soil nails are not
acceptable. Have a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Montana
oversee the soil nail retaining wall design and sign and seal the design
calculations and drawings
REFERENCES
A.
2.1
GENERAL
All materials and products utilized in the construction of the soil nail walls shall
be in conformance with the references listed above, and as further detailed below.
SOIL NAILS
A.
Nail Solid Bar. AAHSTO M31/ASTM A615, Grade 420 or 520, ASTM A 722
for Grade 1035. Deformed bar, continuous without splices or welds, new,
straight, undamaged, bare, or epoxy-coated, or encapsulated as shown on the
Plans. Threaded, a minimum of 6 inches on the wall anchorage end, to allow
proper attachment of bearing plate and nut. Threading may be continuous spiral
deformed ribbing provided by the bar deformations (continuous thread bards) or
may be cut into a reinforcing bar. If threads are cut into a reinforcing bar, provide
the next-larger bar number designation from that is shown on the Plans, at no
Section 02402
Page 1 of 14

additional cost.
2.3
2.4
B.
Bar Coupler. Bar couplers shall develop the full ultimate tensile strength of the
bar as certified by the manufacturer.
C.
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating. ASTM A 775. Minimum 0.016 inch thickness
electrostatically applied. Bend test requirements are waived. Coating at the wall
anchorage end of epoxy-coated bars may be omitted over the length provided for
threading the nut against the bearing plate.
D.
Encapsulation. Minimum 0.04-inch thick, corrugated, HDPE tube conforming to

AASHTO M252 or corrugated PVC tube conforming to ASTM D1784, class
13464-B.
SOIL NAIL APPURTENANCES

A.
Centralizer. Manufactured from Schedule 40 PVC pipe or tube, steel, or other

material not detrimental to the nail steel (wood shall not be used); securely
attached to the nail bar; sized to position the nail bar within 1 inch of the center of
the drillhole; sized to allow tremie pipe insertion to the bottom of the drillhole;
and sized to allow grout to freely flow up the drillhole.
B.
Nail Grout. Neat cement or sand/cement mixture with a minimum 3-day

compressive strength of 1,500 psi and a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3,000 psi, per AASHTO T106/ASTM C109.
C.
Fine Aggregate. AASHTO M6/ASTM C33
D.
Portland Cement. AASHTO M85/ASTM C150, Type I, II, III, or V.
E.
Admixtures. AASHTO M194/ASTM C494. Admixtures that control bleed,

improve flowability, reduce water content, and retard set may be used in the grout
subject to review and acceptance by the Owner. Accelerators are not permitted.
Expansive admixtures may only be used in grout used for filling sealed
encapsulations. Admixtures shall be compatible with the grout and mixed in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
F.
Film Protection. Polyethylene film per AASHTO M171.
BEARING PLATES, NUTS, AND WELDED STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS

A.
Bearing Plates. AASHTO M183/ASTM A36.
B.
Nuts. AASHTO M291, Grade B, hexagonal, fitted with beveled washer or

spherical seat to provide uniform bearing.
Section 02402
Page 2 of 14

C.
2.5
WELDED WIRE FABRIC

A.
2.6
2.9
Manufactured with a drainage core and a drainage geotextile attached to or

encapsulating the core. Drainage core to be manufactured from long-chain
synthetic polymers composed of at least 85 percent by mass of polypropylenes,
polyester, polyamine, polyvinyl choloride, polyoleofin, or polystyrene and having
a minimum compressive strength of 40 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 1621 Procedure A. The drainage core with the geotextile fully encapsulating
the core shall have a minimum flow rate of 1 lieter per second per meter of width
tested in accordance with ASTM D 4716. The test conditions shall be under an
applied load of 10 psi at a gradient of 1.0 after a 100-hour seating period.
UNDERDRAIN AND PERFORATED PIPE

A.
Pipe. ASTM 1785 Schedule 40 PVC solid and perforated wall, cell classification
12454-B or 12354-C, wall thickness SDR 35, with solvent weld or elastomeric
joints.
B.
Fittings. ASTM D3034, cell classification 12454-B or C, wall thickness SDR 35,
with solvent or elastomeric joints.
TEMPORARY SHOTCRETE.
A.
PART 3:
3.1
Conform to AASHTO M31/ASTM A615, Grade 420, deformed.
GEOCOMPOSITE SHEET DRAIN

A.
2.8
Conform to AASHTO M55/ASTM A185 or A497
REINFORCING STEEL.
A.
2.7
Shear Connectors. AASHTO Construction Specifications, Section 11.3.3.1.
Submit for approval, all materials, methods, and control procedures for this work.
EXECUTION
CONTRACTOR EXPERIENCE
A.
The wall Contractor must have successfully completed a minimum of three

permanent walls of similar complexity within the last four years, totaling a
minimum face area of 2000 square yards and 500 permanent soil nails. At the
Pre-Construction Conference, submit a package to the Project Manager with a
brief description of each project. The submittal must contain the approximate
face area, number of permanent nails and average length, facing type, owners
name, and owners current contact information.
Section 02402
Page 3 of 14

3.2
WALL DESIGNER / ENGINEER EXPERIENCE

A.
3.3
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
3.4
The wall Designer/Engineer must have successfully designed and overseen a

minimum of three permanent walls of similar complexity within the last four
years. At the Pre-Construction Conference, submit a package to the Project
Manager with a brief description of each project. The submittal must contain the
approximate face area, number of permanent nails and average length, facing
type, owners name, and owners current phone number.
The wall Contractor and the wall Designer/Engineer must attend, or send a duly
appointed representative, to the Pre-Construction Conference.
DESIGN
A.
Meet the following requirements for the design of the soil nail wall(s).
Preliminary wall dimensions given on the plans are for estimating purposes only.
The contractor, through its chosen system, is responsible for producing a design,
which will establish:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.5
Soil nail reinforcement type, locations, inclinations, lengths, and strengths.

Nail reinforcement connections to permanent facing.
Type and dimensions of permanent facing.
Grouting procedures and specifications.
Design pullout resistance.
Minimum boring size for nails.
Ultimate anchor capacity.
Corrosion protection (75 year design life).
Construction sequencing for nail installation and soil excavation.
AVAILABLE INFORMATION
A.
Available information developed by the Owner or by the Owners duly authorized

representative includes the following items:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Roadway plans. The Roadway plans include the final plans, profile, and
cross-sections for the Contract, including the proposed soil nail wall
locations.
Geotechnical Report, prepared by Tetra Tech, dated June 16, 2014. This
report contains logs of all soil borings performed along the length of the
proposed soil nail wall. It is the responsibility of the contractor to obtain
any additional soil information required to complete the wall design.
The design peak ground acceleration is: 0.142g
The final design wall batter is 1H:10V
Section 02402
Page 4 of 14

e.
f.
g.
Ensure that the soil nail wall design meets the following minimum internal
factors of safety:
Soil Nail Pullout Resistance 2.0
Nail Bar Tensile Strength
1.8
Ensure that the facing strength of the wall design meets the following
minimum factors of safety:
Facing Flexure
1.5
Facing Punching Shear
1.5
Tetra Tech evaluated the proposed wall layout and determined that
adequate external factors of safety exist for global stability and bearing
capacity. Verify that the final nail wall design meets the LRFD
requirements for:
Global Stability
Compound Stability
Sliding
Seismic Stability
h.
Design the wall with a maximum 5-foot vertical and horizontal spacing
between soil nails. The soil nails must be spaced horizontally to penetrate
between the vertical guardrail posts along i.
i.
All steel components in the wall design must meet FHWA Buy America
requirements.
j.
Design a drainage system to drain water and prevent hydrostatic pressure

buildup behind the facing. Include details in the design for tying the top
of wall into the slope by extending the wire mesh back into the slope
and/or spraying toe of slope at top of wall with minimal shotcrete.
k.
Aesthetic Treatment. Apply an Aesthetic Treatment to the wall facing

consisting of a permanent stain applied by the Contractor.
1.
Obtain prior approval from the Project Manager for the aesthetic
treatment. The method(s) for demonstrating the quality and color
of the aesthetic treatment are the sole responsibility of the
Contractor. Do not begin the aesthetic treatment without written
approval from the Project Manager.
2.
Stain the facing to approximate and blend with the color(s) of
adjacent cut sections.
3.
Apply the permanent stain in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
4.
If the unstained color of the shotcrete facing generally matches the
color of the new adjacent cuts prior to staining, the Project
Manager may waive the staining requirement at their discretion.
l.
The shotcrete mixture must contain provisions for fiber reinforcement to

increase the durability of the mix and resistance to crack propagation. If
Section 02402
Page 5 of 14

steel fibers are used, the design must incorporate measures to prevent
rusting of the fibers and discoloration of the final wall face.
3.6
SOIL NAIL WALL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.

A.
3.7
SOIL NAIL WALL DESIGN SUBMITTALS

A.
3.8
Ensure that the wall has an adequate factor of safety with respect to both the
internal stability of the reinforced soil mass (including nail pullout and nail bar
tensile strength), and the external stability (including global stability, bearing
capacity, and sliding) in the wall design. The design life of the structure is 75
years unless otherwise specified. Design the wall in accordance with Division I,
Section 5, Retaining Walls and other appropriate articles of the 17th Edition of the
AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges (2002) including current
interim specifications. Design the wall using the Load Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) approach in accordance with FHWA publication No. FHWA-SA-96069R, Manual for Design and Construction Monitoring of Soil Nail Walls,
revised Oct. 1998 and general guidance from the FWHA publication No. FHWAIF-03-017, Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7, 2003.
At least 30 calendar days before the planned start of wall excavation, submit
complete design calculations and working drawings to the Owner for review and
comment. Include all details, dimensions, quantities, ground profiles, and crosssections necessary to construct the wall. Verify the limits of the wall and ground
survey data before preparing drawings.
DESIGN CALCULATIONS
A.
Design calculations must include, but not be limited to, the following items:
a.
A written summary report that describes the overall soil nail wall design.
b.
Applicable code requirements and design references.
c.
Soil nail wall critical design cross-sections geometry including soil strata
and location, magnitude, and direction of design slope or external
surcharge loads and piezometric levels.
d.
Design criteria including, soil/rock shear strengths (friction angle and
cohesion), unit weights, bond strength between the in situ soils and grout,
and any other assumptions for each soil strata.
e.
Factors of safety used for internal stability checks, surcharges, soil unit
weights, reinforcing material properties, and wall panel unit materials.
Minimum required global factors of safety for stability and sliding for
both construction, and long-term conditions.
f.
Design calculation sheets with:
Project Name
Wall Designer/Engineers project number
Wall location
Designation
Date of preparation
Section 02402
Page 6 of 14

g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
3.9
Initials of designer and checker
Page number at the top of each page.
An index page with the design calculations.

Design notes including an explanation of any symbols and computer
programs used in the design.
Soil nail wall final design cross-sections geometry including soil/rock
strata and location, magnitude, and direction of slope or external surcharge
loads and piezometric levels with critical slip surface shown along with
minimum calculated global stability and sliding factors of safety for both
construction, and long term conditions.
Structural design calculations for the shotcrete wall facing, connections,
soil nails, and connections between the soil nails and the facing.
Grout mix compressive strength test results, from a qualified independent
testing laboratory, verifying that the proposed nail grout mix will achieve
the specified 3-day (72 hour) compressive strength.
Other design calculations.
WORKING DRAWINGS
A.
Working drawings must include, but are not limited to, the following items:
a.
A plan view of the wall(s) identifying:
b.
A reference baseline and elevation datum.
c.
The offset from the construction centerline or baseline to the face of the
wall at its base at all changes in horizontal alignment.
d.
Beginning and end of wall stations.
e.
Limits of longest nails.
f.
Location of subsurface exploration borings performed by Tetra Tech.
g.
An elevation view of the wall(s) identifying:
h.
The elevation at the top of the wall, at all horizontal and vertical break
points, and at least every 50 feet along the wall.
i.
Elevations at the wall base.
j.
k.
The distance along the face of the wall to all steps in the wall base.
l.
Wall elevation view showing the location of wall drainage elements along
the wall length.
m.
Existing and finish grade profiles both behind and in front of the wall.
n.
Design parameters and applicable codes.
o.
Specifications for soil nails and connection pins.
p.
General notes for constructing the wall including construction sequencing,
wall excavation, foundation preparation, wall erection, grouting
procedures and other special construction requirements.
q.
Horizontal and vertical curve data affecting the wall and wall control
points.
r.
Match lines or other details to relate wall stationing to centerline
stationing.
s.
A listing of the summary of quantities on the elevation drawing of each
wall showing estimated square feet of wall face area.
Section 02402
Page 7 of 14

t.
4
5
6
7
Soil nail wall typical sections including excavation elevations, nail

inclination, and wall face batter.
Details and dimensions for wall appurtenances such as barriers, coping,
drainage gutters, guardrail installations, sign posts, fences, etc.
Details for constructing walls around drainage facilities (if applicable).
Details for terminating walls and adjacent slope construction.
Details for performing verification and proof testing of the nails.
B.
Have a Registered Professional Engineer sign and seal the drawings and
calculations. If the soil nail wall Contractor uses a Consultant designer
subcontractor or manufacturers representative to prepare the design, the soil nail
wall Contractor still retains overall contractual responsibility for both the design
and the construction.
C.
Submit 3 sets of the wall drawings with the initial submission. One set will be
returned with any indicated corrections. The Owner will review and provide
comments on the Contractor's submittals within 15 calendar days after receipt of a
complete submission. If revisions are necessary, make the necessary corrections
and resubmit 3 revised sets. When the drawings are approved, furnish 5 sets of
the drawings and a digital copy of the drawings in PDF format to the Owner.
The Contractor will not be allowed to begin wall construction or incorporate
materials into the work until the submittal requirements are satisfied and found
acceptable to the Owner. Changes or deviations from the approved submittals
must be re-submitted for approval. No adjustments in contract time will be
allowed due to incomplete submittals.
D.
Revise the drawings when plan dimensions are revised due to field conditions or
for other reasons. Within 30 days after completion of the work, submit as-built
drawings to the Owner. Provide revised design calculations signed by a
Registered Professional Engineer for all design changes made during the
construction of the wall.
E.
Provide 5 sets of the drawings and a digital copy of the drawings showing the
final as-built wall, design revisions, and revised calculations in PDF format to
the Owner.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTON REQUIREMENTS

Construct the wall and perform verification and proof testing according to the
approved set of working drawings and in accordance with the wall designers and
wall manufacturers recommendations, and the Special Provisions.
NAIL TESTING CRITERIA
Test nails using the following criteria:
a.
Perform both verification and proof testing of designated test nails.

Section 02402
Page 8 of 14

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Perform Verification Tests on sacrificial test nails at locations shown on

the Plans or directed by the Owner. Verification nails do not need to be
epoxy coated.
Proof test production nails at locations selected by the Owner. The Owner
will observe and verify the nail testing performed by the Contractor.
Do not perform Verification or Proof testing until the nail grout has cured
for at least 72 hours.
Provide temporary unbonded lengths for each test nail. Isolate the test nail
bar from the shotcrete facing and/or the reaction frame used during testing.
Isolation of a test nail through the shotcrete facing must not affect the
location of the reinforcing steel under the bearing plate. Accepted proof
test nails may be incorporated as production nails provided the temporary
test unbonded length is fully grouted subsequent to testing. Submit the
proposed test nail isolation methods, methods for providing an unbonded
test length and methods for grouting the unbonded length subsequent to
testing to the Owner for review and approval in accordance with the
Submittals section. Where temporary casing of the unbonded length of
test nails is provided, install the casing in a manner that prevents any
reaction between the casing and the grouted bond length of the nail and/or
the stressing apparatus.
Include dial gauges, dial gauge support, jack and pressure gauge,
electronic load cell, and a reaction frame in the testing equipment. The
load cell is required only for the creep test portion of the verification test.
Provide a description of test setup and jack, pressure gauge and load cell
calibration curves in accordance with Submittals section.
Design the testing reaction frame to be sufficiently rigid and of adequate
dimensions so that excessive deformation of the testing equipment does
not occur. If the reaction frame will bear directly on the shotcrete facing,
design it to prevent cracking of the shotcrete. Independently support and
center the jack over the nail bar so that the bar does not carry the weight of
the testing equipment. Align the jack, bearing plates, and stressing
anchorage with the bar such that unloading and repositioning of the
equipment will not be required during the test.
Apply and measure the test load with a hydraulic jack and pressure gauge.
Provide a pressure gauge graduated in 100 psi (689 kPa) increments or
less. Provide a jack and pressure gauge with a pressure range not
exceeding twice the anticipated maximum test pressure. Jack ram travel
must be sufficient to allow the test to be done without resetting the
equipment. Monitor the nail load during Pre-Production Verification tests
with both the pressure gauge and the load cell. Use the load cell to
maintain a constant load hold during the creep test load hold increment of
the verification test.
Measure the nail head movement with a dial gauge capable of measuring
to 0.01 inches (0.25 mm). Provide a dial gauge with sufficient travel to
allow the test to be done without having to reset the gauge. Visually align
the gauge to be parallel with the axis of the nail and support the gauge
Section 02402
Page 9 of 14

j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
independently from the jack, wall, or reaction frame. Use two dial gauges
when the test setup requires reaction against a soil cut face.
Perform verification testing of sacrificial nails a minimum of two working
days prior to installation of production nails to verify the Contractor's
installation methods and nail pullout resistance. Perform verification tests
at the locations and elevations shown on the Plans or as directed by the
Owner. Test a minimum of 2 times in each different soil/rock unit and for
each different proposed drilling/grouting method. Verification test nails
are considered sacrificial and cannot be incorporated as production nails.
Bare bars may be used for the sacrificial verification test nails.
Develop and submit the details of the verification testing arrangement,
including the method of distributing test load pressures to the excavation
surface (reaction frame), test nail bar size, grouted drillhole diameter, and
reaction frame dimensioning to the Owner for approval in accordance with
Submittals section.
Construct verification test nails using the same equipment, installation
methods, nail inclination, and drillhole diameter as planned for the
production nails. Changes in the drilling or installation method may
require additional verification testing as determined by the Owner and
must be provided at no additional cost to the Department.
Provide test nails with both bonded and temporary unbonded lengths.
Grout only the bonded length of the test nail prior to testing. Provide a
temporary unbonded length of the test nail of at least 3 feet (1 meter).
Determine the bonded length of the test nail based on the production nail
bar grade and size such that the allowable bar structural load is not
exceeded during testing, but not less than 10 feet (3 meters). Ensure the
allowable bar structural load during testing is not greater than 90 percent
of the yield strength for the specified bar Grade.
Determine the Design Test Load (DTL) during verification testing by the
following equation:
DTL = Design Test Load (kips or kN) = LBV x Qd
Where:
LBV =
Qd =
As-built bonded test length (ft or m)

Allowable pullout resistance (kips/ft or kN/m, of
grouted nail length, specified in the approved
submittals)
And:
Maximum Test Load (MTL) = 2.0 x DTL (kips or kN)
o.
Incrementally load the verification test nails to a Maximum Test Load of

200% of the Design Test Load (DTL) in accordance with the following
Loading Schedule. Record the soil nail movements at each load
increment. Develop a form to record test nail location, inclination,
azimuth, bond length, test start-finish time, incremental loading dial
records and measurements of creep during the Creep Test.
Section 02402
Page 10 of 14

VERIFICATION TEST LOADING SCHEDULE

LOAD
HOLD TIME
AL (0.05 DTL maximum)
1 minute
0.25 DTL
10 minutes
0.50 DTL
10 minutes
0.75 DTL
10 minutes
1.00 DTL
10 minutes
1.25 DTL
10 minutes
1.50 DTL (Creep Test)
60 minutes
1.75 DTL
10 minutes
2.00 DTL (Maximum Test Load)
10 minutes
p.
q.
r.
The Alignment Load (AL) should be the minimum load required to

align the testing apparatus and should not exceed 5% of the Design
Test Load (DTL). Set dial gauges to "zero" after the alignment
load has been applied. Monitor the verification test nails for the
creep test at the 1.50 DTL increment. Measure the nail movements
during the creep test and record at 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 50, and
60 minutes. Maintain the load during the creep test within 2% of
the intended load by use of the load cell.
Perform proof testing on 10% (1 in 10) of the production nails in each nail
row or minimum of 1 per row. The Project Manager will designate the
testing locations.
Provide proof test nails with both bonded and temporary unbonded
lengths. Prior to testing, grout only the bonded length of the test nail.
Provide a temporary unbonded length of the test nail of at least 3 feet (1
meter). Determine the bonded length of the test nail based on the
production nail bar grade and size such that the allowable bar structural
load is not exceeded during testing, but not less than 10 feet (3 meters).
Proof test nails shorter than 12 feet (4 meters) in length may be
constructed with less than the minimum 10 foot (3 meters) bond length
with the unbonded length limited to 3 feet (1 meter). Ensure the allowable
bar structural load during testing is not greater than 90% of the yield
strength for the specified bar Grade.
Determine the Design Test Load (DTL) during proof testing by the
following equation:
DTL =
Design Test Load (kips or kN) = LBP x Qd
Where:
LBP =
Qd =
As-built bonded test length (feet or meters)

Allowable pullout resistance (kips/ft or kN/m, of
grouted nail length, specified in the approved
submittals)
And:
Maximum Test Load (MTL) = 1.5 x DTL (kips or kN)
Section 02402
Page 11 of 14

s.
Perform proof tests by incrementally loading to a Maximum Test Load of

150% of the Design Test Load (DTL) in accordance with the following
Loading Schedule. Measure and record the nail movement at each load
with the Project Manager observing and verifying the data in the same
manner as the verification tests. Monitor the proof test load using a jack
pressure gauge with a sensitivity and range meeting the requirements of
pressure gauges used for verification test nails. At load increments other
than the Maximum Test Load, hold the load long enough to obtain a stable
reading.
PROOF TEST LOADING SCHEDULE
LOAD
HOLD TIME
AL (0.05 DTL maximum)
Until Stable
0.25 DTL
Until Stable
0.50 DTL
Until Stable
0.75 DTL
Until Stable
1.00 DTL
Until Stable
1.25 DTL
Until Stable
1.50 DTL (Maximum Test Load)
See Below
The Alignment Load (AL) should be the minimum load required to align
the testing apparatus and should not exceed 5% of the Design Test Load
(DTL). Set dial gauges to "zero" after the Alignment Load has been
applied. Maintain load increments within 5% of the intended load.
Depending on performance, perform either 10 minute or 60 minute creep
tests at the Maximum Test Load (1.50 DTL). Start the creep period as
soon as the Maximum Test Load is applied and measure and record the
nail movement at 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 10 minutes. Where the nail movement
between 1 minute and 10 minutes exceeds 0.04 inches (1mm), maintain
the Maximum Test Load an additional 50 minutes and record movements
at 20, 30, 50, and 60 minutes.
3.12
A.
TEST NAIL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

Consider test nail acceptable when:
a.
For verification tests, a total creep movement of less than 0.01 inches
(0.25 mm) per log cycle of time between the 6 and 60 minute readings is
measured during creep testing and the creep rate is linear or decreasing
throughout the creep test load hold period.
b.
For proof tests, a total creep movement of less than 0.04 inches (1 mm) is
measured between the 1 and 10 minute readings or a total creep movement
of less than 0.08 inches (2 mm) is measured between the 6 and 60 minute
readings and the creep rate is linear or decreasing throughout the creep test
load hold period.
c.
For verification and proof tests, the total measured movement at the
maximum test load exceeds 80% of the theoretical elastic elongation of
the test nail unbonded length.
Section 02402
Page 12 of 14

d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
A pullout failure does not occur at the applicable Maximum Test Load for
the test being performed (i.e. verification vs. proof testing). Pullout failure
is defined as the load at which attempts to further increase the test load
simply result in continued pullout movement of the test nail. Record the
pullout failure load as part of the test data.
Incorporate successful proof tested nails meeting the above test acceptance
criteria as production nails, provided that:
The unbonded length of the test nail drillhole has not collapsed during
testing.
The minimum required drillhole diameter has been maintained.
The specified corrosion protection is provided.
The test nail length is equal to or greater than the scheduled Production
Nail length.
Complete the installation of test nails meeting these requirements by
satisfactorily grouting the unbonded test length. Maintaining the
temporary unbonded test length for subsequent grouting is the Contractor's
responsibility. If the unbonded test length of production proof test nails
cannot be satisfactorily grouted subsequent to testing, the proof test nail is
sacrificial and must be replaced with an additional production nail
installed at no additional cost to the Department.
Test Nail Rejection Criteria.

If a test nail does not satisfy the acceptance criterion, determine the cause.
For verification test nails, the Owner will evaluate the results of each verification
test. Installation methods which do not satisfy the nail testing requirements will
be rejected. The Contractor must propose alternative installation methods and
install replacement verification test nails. Install and test replacement test nails at
no additional cost to the Department.
For proof test nails, the Project Manager may require the Contractor to replace
some or all of the installed production nails between a failed proof test nail and
the adjacent passing proof test tail.
Alternatively, the Project Manager may require the installation and testing of
additional proof test nails to verify that adjacent previously installed production
nails have sufficient load carrying capacity. Contractor modifications may
include, but are not limited to: the installation of additional proof test nails;
increasing the drillhole diameter to provide increased capacity; modifying the
installation or grouting methods; reducing the production nail spacing from that
specified in the approved submittals; and installing more production nails at a
reduced capacity.
Installation and testing of additional proof test nails or installation of additional or
modified nails as a result of proof test nail failure(s) will be at no additional cost
to the Department.
Section 02402
Page 13 of 14

3.14
A.
PART 4:
4.1
RECORDS
Submit records of each soil nail installation on a daily basis and submit a
summary form of all installations performed on a weekly basis to the Project
Manager.
MEASUREMENT
A.
SOIL NAIL WALL

a.
4.2
Soil Nail Retaining Walls will be measured by the finished area of wall
face per square foot. The finished area is calculated based on the height of
wall from the finished grade at the toe of the wall to the top of the wall as
measured in the field, installed, and accepted.
PAYMENT
A.
measurement as reflected in the bid schedule. Payment will be full compensation
for all labor, equipment, materials, tests, investigations, and incidentals necessary
to acceptably design, construct, and test the soil nail retaining walls.
END OF SECTION
Section 02402
Page 14 of 14

SECTION 02403
PART 1:
1.1
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A.
Description. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to design and
construct Gravity or Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) retaining wall(s) in
accordance with these specifications and the lines, grades, and dimensions shown
on the plans or otherwise established by the Owner. Have a professional engineer
licensed in Montana oversee the retaining wall design and sign and seal the design
calculations and drawings.
B.
Preliminary dimensions given on the plans are for estimating purposes only.
Produce a design for a Gravity or MSE wall system that will establish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Bottom elevation of leveling pad and wall

Reinforcement type, locations and lengths if applicable
Type and dimensions of facing materials
Reinforcement connection to facing
Size of concrete and/or crushed aggregate leveling pad.
Quantity and specifications of backfill
A drainage system that will provide free drainage behind the soil mass.
A design that takes into account interferences such as guardrail posts, and
pipes behind, passing through, or under the wall.
REFERENCES
FHWA-NHI-10-024
FHWA-SA-96-038
FHWA-HRT-10-077
FHWA-NHI-09-087
FHWA-RD-89-186
AASHTO
PART 2:
2.1
Design and Construction of Mechanically Stabilized

Earth Walls and Reinforced Slopes
Earth Retaining Systems
Composite Behavior of Geosynthetic Reinforced
Soil Mass
Corrosion/Degradation of Soil Reinforcements for
Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and
Reinforced Slopes
Durability/Corrosion of Soil Reinforced Structures
2013 LRFD Specifications for Highway Bridges
PRODUCTS
Use materials meeting the following requirements to construct Gravity or MSE walls.
Section 02403
Page 1 of 8

1.
2.
Concrete for Leveling Pads. Provide MDT Class DD or equivalent Concrete for
leveling pads a minimum of 6 inches thick. The bottom of the concrete leveling
pad shall be provided with a minimum soil cover of 1 foot.
Backfill Material. Use material meeting the following requirements:
a.
Gradation for backfill:

US Sieve Size
3 inch
1 inch
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
Percent Passing
100
70 - 90
20 40
10 20
08
Provide a minimum of 35% of the +No. 4 material with at least one

mechanically fractured face.
b.
Electrochemical Properties. For MSE walls, use backfill meeting the

following electrochemical requirements:
For Steel Reinforcements:
Requirements
Resistivity >3,000 ohm-cm
pH 5-10
Chlorides <100 parts per million
Sulfates <200 parts per million
Organic Content <1%
Test Methods
AASHTO T-288
AASHTO T-289
AASHTO T-291
AASHTO T-290
AASHTO T-267
For Geosynthetic Reinforcements:

Requirements
Polyester (PET) 3<pH<9
Polyolefin (PP &HDPE) pH>3
Test Methods
AASHTO T-289
AASHTO T-289
If the resistivity of the sites soils is greater than or equal to 5000

ohm-cm, the chloride and sulfates requirements may be waived.
c.
Soundness. Use materials that are substantially free of shale or other soft,
poor durability particles. Use material having a magnesium sulfate
soundness loss of less than 30 percent after four cycles, measured in
accordance with AASHTO T-104, or a sodium sulfate less of less than 15
percent after five cycles determined in accordance with AASHTO T-104.
Section 02403
Page 2 of 8

3.
4.
PART 3:
3.1
Reinforcement Material. Use reinforcement material that will not degrade over
the design life of the structure. When specifying the reinforcement material, use
the criteria given in the FHWA Publication Corrosion/Degradation of Soil
Reinforcements for Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil
Slopes, Publication No. FHWA-NHI-00-044.
Facing. Use modular block, welded wire grid, or precast concrete panel facing.
Use modular concrete blocks in conformance with ASTM C 1372, Standard
Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units. Use precast concrete panels
meeting the requirements set forth for precast members in AASHTO Section 5,
Concrete Structures.
EXECUTION
AVAILABLE DESIGN INFORMATION

A.
Available information developed by the owner or the owners representative

includes the following items:
1.
2.
3.
Project Geotechnical Report By Tetra Tech, Inc. dated June 16, 2014.
Boring Logs included in geotechnical report and the construction
drawings.
Contract Drawings including detailed drawings, plan and profile
drawings, and cross-section drawings for the proposed retaining wall
locations. These drawings will show right of way and construction limits,
and utilities.
B.
All retaining walls shall be designed to tolerate a seismic event characterized with
a coefficient of acceleration of 0.142.
C.
Internal wall stability shall be the responsibility of the contractor including design
for slopes immediately above and below retaining walls. The following design
properties may be assumed for on-site materials for gravity wall, MSE wall, and
slope design:
Total Unit Weight: 130 pcf
Angle of Internal Friction: 36 degrees
Cohesion: 0 psf
Nominal Bearing Capacity: 3,000 psf (based on wall base width of 6 feet
for gravity walls, or 10 feet for MSE Walls)
3.2
RETAINING WALL DESIGN SUBMITTALS

At least 30 calendar days before the planned start of wall excavation, submit complete
design calculations and working drawings to DJ and A for review. Include all details, diSection 02403
Page 3 of 8

mensions, quantities, ground profiles, and cross-sections necessary to construct the wall.
Verify the limits of the wall and ground survey data before preparing drawings.
A.
Design Calculations. Submit design calculations to include, but not be limited to,
the following items:
1.
Applicable code requirements and design references.
2.
Retaining wall critical design cross-section geometry including soil/rock
strata and location, magnitude, and direction of design slope or external
surcharge loads and piezometric levels along with the Capacity Demand
Ratios for, long-term conditions.
3.
Design parameters including drained and undrained soil/rock shear
strengths (friction angle and cohesion), unit weights, and any other
assumptions for each soil/rock strata along with reinforcing material
properties, and facing materials.
4.
Capacity Demand Ratios calculated from LRFD.
5.
Design calculation sheets with the project number, wall location,
stationing, date of preparation, initials of designer and checker, and page
number at the top of each page. Provide an index page with the design
calculations.
6.
Design notes including an explanation of any symbols and computer
programs used in the design.
7.
Design calculations for wall facing units, connection pins, and reinforcing
material, and connections between the reinforcing material and the facing.
8.
Other design calculations.
B.
Working Drawings. Provide drawings designed, signed and sealed by a registered

Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Montana. Working drawings shall
include, but not be limited to, the following items:
1.
2.
A plan view of the wall(s) identifying:

a.
A reference baseline and elevation datum.
b.
The offset from the construction centerline or baseline to the face
of the wall at its base at all changes in horizontal alignment.
c.
d.
Right-of-way and permanent or temporary construction easement
limits, location of all known active and abandoned existing
utilities, adjacent structures or other potential interferences within
the limits of the wall excavation. The centerline of any drainage
structure or drainage pipe behind, passing through, or passing
under the wall.
An elevation view of the wall(s) identifying:
a.
The elevation at the top of the wall, at all horizontal and vertical
break points, and at least every 50 feet along the wall.
b.
Elevations at the wall base.
c.
d.
The distance along the face of the wall to all steps in the wall base.
e.
Wall elevation view showing the location of wall drainage
Section 02403
Page 4 of 8

elements along the wall length.

Existing and finish grade profiles both behind and in front of the
wall.
Specifications for reinforcing material and connection pins.
General notes for constructing the wall including construction sequencing,
wall excavation, foundation preparation, wall erection, backfill placement
and any other special construction requirements.
Horizontal and vertical curve data affecting the wall and wall control
points. Match lines or other details to relate wall stationing to centerline
stationing.
A listing of the summary of quantities on the elevation drawing of each
wall showing estimated square meters of wall face areas.
Retaining wall typical sections including excavation elevations, and wall
face batter.
Details, dimensions, and schedules for all connection pins, facing, and
reinforcement materials.
Details and dimensions for wall appurtenances such as barriers, guardrails,
coping, drainage gutters, fences, signage, etc.
Details for constructing walls around utilities and drainage facilities (if
applicable).
Details for terminating walls and adjacent slope construction.
Clearly show all details and requirements to place guardrail posts.
Have a Professional Engineer licensed in Montana sign and seal the
drawings and calculations. If the retaining wall Contractor uses a
Consultant designer subcontractor or manufacturers representative to
prepare the design, the retaining wall Contractor still has overall contract
responsibility for both the design and the construction.
f.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Submit 3 sets of the wall drawings to DJ and A with the initial submission. DJ
and A will review the Contractor's submittals within 20 calendar days after receipt
of a complete submission. If revisions are necessary, make the necessary
corrections and resubmit 3 revised sets. After the drawings have been reviewed
and found acceptable, furnish 5 sets of the drawings. Do not begin wall
construction or incorporate materials into the work until the submittal
requirements are satisfied and found acceptable to DJ and A. Changes or
deviations from the accepted submittals must be re-submitted and reviewed. No
adjustments in contract time will be allowed due to incomplete submittals.
Revise the drawings when plan dimensions are revised due to field conditions or
for other reasons. Within 30 days after completion of the work, submit as-built
drawings to the Owner. Provide revised design calculations signed by a
Registered Professional Engineer for all design changes made during the
construction of the wall.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Construct the wall according to the approved set of working drawings, the special
Section 02403
Page 5 of 8

provisions, and the appropriate sections of the Standard Specifications.

1.
Reinforced Backfill Source Approval. At least 30 calendar days before
beginning wall construction, submit a sample from the proposed borrow
source for backfill material.
2.
Reinforcement Source Approval. Submit a manufacturers certificate of
compliance signed by an authorized manufacturers official stating that the
reinforcement material meets the requirements specified in the working
drawings. Submit a sample at least 5 feet in length by the full
reinforcement width for testing. After the sample and the required
information have been submitted to the Owner, allow 30 calendar days for
evaluation. Remove and replace any material not meeting the specified
requirements at the Contractors expense.
3.
Have a technical representative of the wall manufacturer on site during the
beginning of wall construction to ensure that the wall is installed properly.
4.
Excavation. Complete the excavation in reasonably close conformity to
the limits shown on the approved design plans. The contractor is
responsible for temporary excavation support (as required).
5.
Foundation Preparation. Prior to wall construction, compact the
foundation soils to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D698. The surface
should be smooth and level such that any shallow depressions or humps do
not exceed 6 inches in depth or height. Proofroll the subgrade and remove
and replace any unsuitable foundation soils with backfill material as per
Materials of these specifications. Do not use vibratory compaction
equipment unless approved by the Owner.
6.
After placement of the leveling pad concrete (minimum of 6 inches thick),
allow it to cure a minimum of 12 hours before placing wall panels or
modular block units.
7.
Backfill Placement. Place backfill following each course of facing. Place
and compact backfill in such a manner to avoid any disturbance of the
wall materials or misalignment of the facing or reinforcing element.
Remove and replace any wall materials that become damaged during
construction at Contractors expense. Place, spread, and compact backfill
in such a manner that minimizes development of wrinkles in or movement
of reinforcement. Place backfill near the facing to assure that no voids
exist directly beneath the reinforcing elements. Place backfill in
maximum 8 inch loose lifts. Compact backfill to a minimum of 95 percent
of the maximum density determined by ASTM D698 within +/- 2 percent
of the optimum moisture content. Compact the backfill within 4 feet of
the wall face using a lightweight mechanical tamper or roller. Do not use
vibratory compaction equipment unless approved by the Owner.. At the
end of each days operation, slope the level of the backfill away from the
wall facing to rapidly direct runoff away from the face. Do not allow
surface water from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site.
8.
Reinforcement Placement. At each reinforcement level, place and
compact the backfill to the level of the reinforcement. Place
reinforcement on a smooth horizontal surface. Pull the reinforcement
material tight before covering it with backfill. If using a geosynthetic
Section 02403
Page 6 of 8

9.
reinforcement, orientation of geosynthetic reinforcement is critical since

the strength of geosynthetic reinforcement varies with direction. Use soil
piles, pins, or the manufacturers approved method to hold the
reinforcement material tight during backfill placement. Do not operate
equipment directly on the reinforcement material. Do not splice or
overlap geosynthetic reinforcement in the principal strength direction.
Modular Block Fill. Fill the voids in all modular blocks with aggregate
satisfying the following gradation:
US Sieve Size
1 inch
inch
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
PART 4:
4.1
Percent Passing
100
50-75
0-60
0-50
0-5
Wall Batter. The completed wall has a vertical tolerance not exceeding
1/2 inch per 10 feet of wall height from the batter shown on the approved
set of working drawings.
Corrective Action. If any defects are found in the wall, begin repairing the
wall by a method approved by DJ and A. Within seven calendar days of
determining the need for wall repairs, submit four copies of calculations
and working drawings, stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in
Montana, to the Owner for modifications to the wall caused by the
remedial action. Furnish all material and labor necessary to correct the
wall at no cost to the Department.
Contractor shall submit a construction plan to the Owner approval prior to
mobilization of materials or equipment. The construction plan shall
include schedules, excavation plans, excavation safety, staging areas,
surface water management plan.
Contractor shall submit an emergency response plan for Owner approval
prior to mobilization of materials. The plan shall include provisions for
traffic management in the event of construction excavation slope failure.
Construction shall proceed in accordance with the approved construction
plan based on the type of walls selected.
MEASUREMENT
A.
GRAVITY OR MSE WALL

1.
Gravity or MSE retaining walls will be measured by the finished area of

wall face per square foot. The finished area is calculated based on the
height of wall from the finished grade at the toe of the wall to the top of
the wall as measured in the field, installed, and accepted.
Section 02403
Page 7 of 8

4.2
PAYMENT
A.
to acceptably design, construct, and test the retaining walls.
END OF SECTION
Section 02403
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 02406
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
This work is the excavation, placement, and compaction of material necessary to

construct the geosynthetic reinforced soil slopes (RSS) as shown in the plans and
cross sections.
PRODUCTS
Materials.
A.
Provide biaxial geogrid and permanent turf reinforcement mat in accordance with
Section 02407 Biaxial Geogrid and turf reinforcement mat.
B.
Provide special borrow backfill in accordance with Section 02231 Trail

Excavation.
PART 3:
A.
EXECUTION
Excavation and Subgrade Preparation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Excavate the embankment to the lines and grade as shown on the plans, or
as directed by the Project Manager. Create a subgrade surface that is level
and free from organics and other deleterious materials. Scarify and
compact the subgrade in accordance with Section 203 prior to placement
of the geogrid to provide a uniform and firm surface.
For reinforced soil slopes over 10 high, do not excavate more than 100
feet of slope (along stationing) face at one time to minimize surficial slope
failure of the 1:1 excavated slopes.
All slope faces exposed must have the RSS constructed within one day of
exposing the slope to prevent surficial slope failures.
Geogrid Placement.
1.
Place each layer of geogrid as shown on the plans and cross sections,
oriented such that the principal direction is perpendicular to slope face (i.e.
roll out the geogrid perpendicular to the slope face). Lay the geogrid in
horizontal layers. Place the first and lowest layers of geogrid as shown on
the plans. Keep geogrid layers horizontal and spaced vertically at the
intervals shown on the plans.
Section 02406
Page 1 of 3
2.
3.
4.
C.
Backfill Placement. Use backfill material as specified in the Special Borrow

special provision.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Place backfill material in accordance with Section 203.

Do not operate any construction equipment on top of the geogrid with less
than 8 inches of loose backfill cover. Place fill by dumping onto
previously placed fill and pushing into place.
Place backfill evenly so that the elevation of the fill progression is the
same across the entire length of the reinforced soil slope. Place soil from
the backslope outward to ensure tension in the soil reinforcement. Place
soils using a method that eliminates the development of wrinkles and
movement of the geogrid.
Operate compaction equipment parallel to the slope face. Avoid sudden
braking and sharp turns when operating equipment on backfill over the
geogrid. Do not operate equipment directly on the geogrid. Do not use
Sheeps Foot or studded compaction equipment to compact the backfill.
Due to the location of the trail on the existing fill embankment,
vibratory rolling methods to compact the pavement layer are not
allowed, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. If the contractor
is experiencing difficulty achieving compaction utilizing non-vibratory
methods, the Engineer will contact Tetra Tech to discuss alternative
compaction methods.
Backfill Placement. Use backfill material as specified in the Special Borrow

special provision.
1.
2.
E.
Geogrid should extend the full width of the fill section without any
overlaps or breaks parallel to the slope face. Adjacent rolls of geogrid
perpendicular to the slope face should overlap by a minimum of 12 inches.
Place only the amount of geogrid required for immediately pending work
to prevent undue damage.
Hand-tension the geogrid to remove all wrinkles and use pins, stakes, soil
piles, or the manufacturers approved method to anchor the geogrid ahead
of the backfill placement to ensure flat contact between the geogrid and
underlying material.
Place backfill material in accordance with Section 203.

Do not operate any construction equipment on top of the geogrid with less
than 8 inches of loose backfill cover. Place fill by dumping onto
previously placed fill and pushing into place.
Turf Reinforcement Mat.

1.
Topsoil and seed the exposed slope prior to placing the turf reinforcement
mat according to Section 02910 Seeding.
Section 02406
Page 2 of 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PART 4:
4.1
4.2
Place each layer of reinforcement mat as shown in the plans, oriented such
that the principal direction is perpendicular to slope face (i.e. roll out the
mat perpendicular to the slope face).
Mat should be placed without any overlaps or breaks parallel to the slope
face. Adjacent rolls of mat perpendicular to the slope face should overlap
by a minimum of 6 inches.
Protect the reinforced mat after placing to prevent undue damage.
Hand-tension the mat to remove all wrinkles and use pins, stakes, soil
piles, or the manufacturers approved method to anchor the geogrid ahead
of the backfill placement to ensure flat contact between the geogrid and
underlying material.
Measurement
A.
Measure Special Borrow in accordance with Section 02231 Trail Excavation
B.
Measure Geogrid and Turf Reinforcement Mat in accordance with the Section
02407 Biaxial Geogrid and Turf Reinforcement Mat.
Basis of Payment.
A.
Accepted quantities of Special Borrow are paid for in accordance with the special
borrow Special Provision.
B.
Accepted quantities of Geogrid are paid for in accordance with Section 02407
Biaxial Geogrid.
END OF SECTION
Section 02406
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 02407
BIAXIAL GEOGRID AND TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
PART 2:
2.1
This work is the furnishing of labor, equipment and materials to construct biaxial
geogrid and turf reinforcement mat as detailed in the plans or as directed in
writing by the Project Manager.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.
Provide geogrid manufactured using long-chain synthetic polymers, composed of

at least 95 percent by weight of polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides. Fabricate
the geogrid into a stable network such that the ribs, filaments, or yarns retain their
dimensional stability relative to each other, including selvages. Conform to Table
1 for GRSS reinforcement geogrid property values. All property values, with the
exception of maximum opening size represent minimum average roll values
(MARV). Identify, store, and handle geogrids according to ASTM D 4873.
TABLE 1. GEOGRID PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
TYPE 1,
TEST
PROPERTY
UNITS
MIN. REQ.
METHODS
VALUE1,2
TYPE 2,
MIN. REQ.
VALUE1,2
Ultimate Tensile Strength
ASTM D 6637
lb/ft
850
1,310
Tensile Strength at 5%
Strain
ASTM D 6637
lb/ft
580
810
Flexural Stiffness
ASTM D 5732
(mg-cm)
250,000
750,000
Junction Efficiency
ASTM D7737-11
93
93
Resistance to UV
Degradation
ASTM D 4355
% at 500
hrs
100
100
Notes:
1) Values, except Ultraviolet Stability, are MARVs (average value roll value minus two standard
deviations).
2) Minimum strength direction.
B.
Provide permanent turf reinforcement mats conforming to Table 2. Furnish a

non-degradable turf reinforcement mat with sufficient thickness, strength and void
Section 02407
BIAXIAL GEOGRID AND TRUF REINFORCEMENT MAT
Page 1 of 3
space for permanent erosion protection and vegetation reinforcement on

geotechnically stable slopes with gradients up to 2V:1H and other areas where
design flow conditions exceed the limits of natural vegetation.
TABLE 2. TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS
MINIMUM
TEST
PROPERTY1
UNITS
REQUIRED
METHODS
VALUE1,2
Minimum Tensile
ASTM D 4595
lb/ft
125
Strength2
UV Stability (minimum %
% at 500
ASTM D 4355
80
tensile retention)
hrs
Minimum thickness
ASTM D 6525
Inches
1/4
Minimum permissible
shear stress3
ASTM D 64604
Lb/sf
Notes:
1) For turf reinforcement mats containing degradable components, obtain all property values on the nondegradable portion of the matting alone.
2) Minimum average roll values, machine direction only.
3) Minimum shear stress the turf reinforcement mat (fully vegetated) can sustain without physical
damage or excess erosion (>1/2-inch soil loss) during a 30 minute flow event in large-scale testing.
These performance test values should be supported by periodic bench scale testing under similar test
conditions and failure criteria using Erosion Control Technology Council Test Method #3.
4) Other qualified independent large scale test methods may be used if determined acceptable by the
Project Manager.
PART 3:
A.
B.
PART 4:
4.1
EXECUTION
Install geogrid in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Place
geogrid above geotextiles when both are specified, shown or directed by the
Project Manager in the contract.
Install turf reinforcement mat in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. Place anchors in such a manner to tie the mat to the geogrid
(when available).
MEASUREMENT
A.
Geogrid is measured by the square yard as staked by the Project Manager.

Measurement excludes laps, seems, and joints.
B.
Turf reinforcement mat is measured by the square yard as staked by the Project
Manager. Measurement excludes laps, seems, and joints.
Section 02407
Page 2 of 3
4.2
PAYMENT
A.
Payment at the contract unit price per square yard is full compensation for all
resources necessary to complete the work.
END OF SECTION
Section 02407
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 02502
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
This work is the single application of asphalt material as specified in the Contract
documents on a prepared subgrade, sub-base, base or asphalt surface meeting the
plans and specifications.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
B.
Furnish asphalt material of the grade and type specified below and meeting the
requirements of Table 1 and Table 2 in this Section.
Type and Grade
Use
LIQUID ASPHALT, MC-70

EMULSIFIED ASPHALT, SS-1 or SS-1h
EMULSIFIED ASPHALT, CRS-1 OR CRS-2
Asphalt Prime Coat

Asphalt Tack Coat
Asphalt Tack Coat
Furnish Blotter Sand as specified below meeting the requirements of MDT

407.02.2.
1.
Blotter material shall be 100% passing the -inch (12.5 mm) screen
having a PI of 6 or less.
Section 02502
Page 1 of 6

TABLE 1
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALTS
TYPE
RAPID SETTING
GRADE
RS-1
MEDIUM SETTING
RS-2
MS-1
SLOW SETTING
MS-2
MS-2h
SS-1
SS-1h
Test of Emulsions:
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Viscosity, Saybolt-Furol at 77F (25C)
20
100
...
...
20
100
100
...
100
...
20
100
20
100
Viscosity, Saybolt-Furol at 122F

(50C)
...
...
75
400
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Demulsibility*, 35ml, 0.02N CaCI2,

percent
60
...
60
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Residue by Distillation, percent
55
...
63
...
55
...
65
...
65
...
57
...
57
...
Penetration, 77F (25C), 100g, 5s
100
200
100
200
100
200
100
20
40
90
100
200
40
90
Ductility, 77F (25C), 5cm/min, cm.
40
...
40
...
40
...
40
...
40
...
40
...
40
...
Solubility in Trichloethylene
97.5
...
97.5
...
97.5
...
97.5
...
97..5
...
97.5
...
97.5
...
Suggested Uses:
Surface treatment penetration

macadam and tack coat
Test on Residue from distillation tests
*The demulsibility test shall be made

within 30 days from the date of shipment.
Surface treatment
and penetration
macadam
Plant or road mixture with

course aggregate,
substantially all of which is
retained on a No. 8 (2.36 mm)
sieve and practically none of
which passes a No. 200
(0.075 mm) sieve, tack
Section 02502
Page 2 of 6

course aggregate,
substantially all of which is
retained on a No. 8 (2.36 mm)
sieve and practically none of
which passes a No. 200
(0.075 mm) sieve, tack

graded and fine aggregates,
substantially quantity of
which passes a No. 8 (2.36
mm) sieve and a portion of
which may pass a No. 200
(0.075 mm) sieve. Slurry seal
treatment.

TABLE 2
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CATIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALTS - ASSHTO M208
TYPE
RAPID SETTING
GRADE
CRS-1
MEDIUM SETTING
CRS-2
CMS-1
SLOW SETTING
CMS-2h
CSS-1
CSS-1h
Test of Emulsions:
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
20
100
20
100
...
20
100
100
400
50
450
50
450
...
...
...
...
DemulsibilityA, 35ml, 0.08% sodium dioctyl

sultrosuccinate, %
40
...
40
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Particle Charge Test
Pos
...
Pos
...
Pos
...
Pos
...
PosB
...
...
...
PosB
...
...
...
...
12
...
12
...
...
...
...
60
...
...
65
...
65
...
65
...
...
57
...
57
100
250
100
250
100
250
40
90
100
250
40
90
...
40
...
40
...
40
...
...
40
...
40
...
40
...
...
97.5
...
97.5
...
97.5
...
...
97.5
...
97.5
Distillation:
Oil distillation by volume of emulsion, percent
Residue, percent
Test on Residue from distillation tests
Penetration, 77F (25C), 100g, 5s
Ductility, 77F (25C), 5cm/min, cm.
Solubility in Trichloethylene
Suggested Uses:
A
The demulsibility test shall be made within 30 days
from the date of shipment.
97.5
Surface treatment
penetration
macadam and tack
coat
Surface treatment
and penetration
macadam
Plant or road mixture with course

aggregate, substantially all of which is
retained on a No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve and
practically none of which passes a No.
200 (0.075 mm) sieve, tack
B
If the particle charge test result is inconclusive,
material having a maximum pH value of 6.7 will be
acceptable.
Section 02502
Page 3 of 6
Plant or road mixture with graded and fine

aggregates, substantially quantity of which passes a
No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve and a portion of which may
pass a No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. Slurry seal
treatment.

PART 3:
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION
DISTRIBUTORS
A.
Use a pressure distributor for prime and tack coats that distributes the required
amount of asphaltic material at the specified temperature in a uniform spray,
without atomization. Assure the distributor is pneumatic tired and does not rut or
otherwise damage the surface being sprayed. Equip it with a bitumeter having a
dial visible to the truck driver for maintaining the constant speed required for
application at the specified rate.
B.
Assure the pump is operated by a separate power unit or by the truck power unit.
Equip the pump with tachometer having a dial readily visible to the operator,
registering gallons per minutes passing through the nozzles.
C.
The distributor shall be designed so that the normal width of application shall be
not less than 12 feet (3.66m), with provision for the application of lesser or
greater width when necessary. The distributor shall be designed or equipped so
that the height of the spray bar above the surface to be sprayed, may be set and
maintained within a tolerance of inch (13 mm) (plus or minus) of the height
required to provide a uniform application.
D.
Assure the distributor is equipped and operated so that the asphaltic material is
circulated or agitated throughout the entire heating system. Provide a means for
constant, accurate temperature indication of the asphaltic material is provided.
Assure the thermometer well is placed without contacting the heating tube.
ASPHALT PRIME COAT

A.
Asphalt prime coat will be applied only if specified in the contract documents.
B.
Spray the asphalt prime coat, under average conditions, from 0.20 to 0.50 gallons
per square yard (0.9 to 8.2 liters per square meter) of low viscosity MC-70 asphalt
on the prepared surface of a non-asphaltic base course.
C.
Immediately before applying the prime coat, clean the surface to be primed of all
dirt and loose materials using blowers or a power broom, supplemented by hand
brooming if necessary. Finish the surface to receive the asphalt material to the
specified requirements for smoothness, compaction, and grade . Apply prime coat
when the surface is dry or slightly damp and when the air temperature in the
shade is not less than 50 F (10C).
D.
Apply asphalt material using a pressure distributor at the rate or rates directed by
the Engineer.
Section 02502
Page 4 of 6

3.3
E.
Before spraying, spread building paper over the surface from the joint back, for
the distance required for the spray bar to begin spraying and operating at full force
when the surface to be treated is reached. Once the asphalt is applied, remove and
dispose of the building paper. Assure the spray bar is shut off instantaneously at
each construction joint to assure a straight line and full application of asphalt
prime up to the joint. If required to prevent dripping, insert a drip pan under the
nozzle where the application ends. Use a hand sprayer to apply primer material to
touch up all spots missed by the distributor.
F.
Protect the surfaces of structures and trees adjacent to the area being treated from
being spattered or marred. Do not discharge asphalt material into borrow pits or
gutters.
G.
After the prime coat has been applied, assure it is left undisturbed for at least 24
hours or until it is cured or blotted. Blot all excess asphalt material remaining on
the surface after 24 hours with sand before opening the surface to traffic.
Maintain the primed or tacked surface until the surfacing has been placed.
Maintenance includes spreading any additional sand required to prevent asphalt
material adhering to the tires of vehicles using the surface and patching all breaks
in the surface with additional bituminous material. Any area of surface disturbed
by traffic or otherwise, is to be cleaned before the next course is placed. Before
placing the surface course, sweep all excess and/or loose sand used for blotter
from the surface.
ASPHALT TACK COAT

A.
The asphalt tack coat is the application of a diluted, slow-breaking, SS-1 or SS-1h
asphalt emulsion to insure bond between the surface being paved and the
overlying course. Immediately before applying the tack coat, clean the surface to
be tacked of all dirt and loose materials using blowers or power brooms,
supplemented by hand brooming if necessary.
B.
Apply tack coat when the surface is dry or slightly damp, and when the air
temperature in the shade is at least 50F (10C).
C.
Dilute the asphalt emulsion, SS-1 or SS-1h, with water at one part emulsion to
one part water. Apply the diluted emulsion using a pressure distributor at the rate
of 0.1 gallon per square yard (4.5 liters per square meter).
D.
Before application, spread building paper over the surface, from the joint back,
for the required distance for the spray bar to begin spraying and operating at full
force when the surface to be treated is reached. Once the asphalt is applied,
remove and dispose of the building paper. Shut off the spray bar shall
instantaneously at each construction joint to assure a straight line and full
application of asphalt prime up to the joint. If required to prevent dripping,
Section 02502
Page 5 of 6

insert a drip pan, under the nozzle where the application is stopped. Use a hand
sprayer to apply primer material for touching up all spots missed by the
distributor.
E.
After the tack coat has been applied, assure it is undisturbed until the asphalt
emulsion has broken, generally within 30 minutes of application. Place the next
paving course after the emulsion has broken.
F.
Schedule operations so that all tack coats are placed with the asphalt paving
course in the same day.
PART 4:
4.1
ASPHALT PRIME COAT

A.
4.2
Asphalt prime coat will not be measured or paid for separately. All asphalt prime
coat necessary for this project is considered incidental to other pay items. Price
and payment for other items is full compensation for all demurrage, storage,
handling, and other charges; all material (including the asphalt prime coat
material), tools, equipment, labor and performance of all work necessary to the
furnishing, testing, delivery, unloading, heating, hauling and spreading of the
asphalt prime coat, cleaning the surface to be primed, blotting excess prime
material, maintaining the primed surface, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the item.
ASPHALT TACK COAT

A.
Asphalt tack coat will not be measured or paid for separately. All asphalt tack
coat necessary for this project is considered incidental to other pay items. Price
and payment for other items is full compensation for all demurrage, storage,
handling, and other charges; all material (including the asphalt tack coat material
and water for diluting), tools, equipment, labor and performance of all work
necessary to the furnishing, testing, delivery, unloading, heating, diluting, hauling
and spreading of the asphalt tack coat, cleaning the surface to be tacked,
maintaining the tacked surface, and all incidentals necessary to complete the item.
END OF SECTION
Section 02502
Page 6 of 6

SECTION 02510
PART 1:
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work is the production and placement of plant mix asphalt concrete
pavement.
B.
Hot plant mix asphalt concrete is a mineral aggregate and asphalt material mixed
at a central hot plant meeting these specifications and placed in one or more
courses on a newly prepared or existing street roadway in accordance with the
contract documents.
REFERENCES
AASHTO T11
(ASTM D1140)
ASTM D5361
AASHTO T27
(ASTM C136)
AASHTO T89
(ASTM D4318)
AASHTO T90
(ASTM D4318)
AASHTO T283
(ASTM D4867)
AASHTO T176
(ASTM D2419)
AASHTO T245
(ASTM D6926, D6927)
AASHTO T96
(ASTM C131)
ASTM D2041
ASTM C1097
ASTM D3666
ASTM D5821
ASTM C123
ASTM D6307
ASTMC142
Amount of Material Finer than No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve

in Aggregate
Standard Practice for Sampling Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures for Laboratory Testing
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
Determining Liquid Limit of Soils
Resistance of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures to MoistureInduced Damage
Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using
Marshall Apparatus
Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Mixtures
Hydrated Lime for Use in Asphaltic Concrete Mixtures
Evaluating and Qualifying Agencies Testing and
Inspecting
Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in
Coarse Aggregate
Lightweight Particles in Aggregate
Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt by Ignition Method
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
Section 02510
Page 1 of 20

MS-2
PART 2:
2.1
2.2
Asphalt Institute - Mix Design Methods
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
The specific type and grading of aggregate shall be consistent with those used on
other local, state, or federal projects with similar type construction as is outlined
for this project. Submit proposed aggregate gradation to the Engineer for
approval. Aggregate types and grades are described in this specification.
B.
The furnishing of asphalt materials for use in asphaltic concrete mixes shall meet
the requirements for the particular grade specified in the contract documents. The
types and grades are described in this specification.
C.
Prepare pavement course to conform to the lines, grades, thickness and typical
cross sections shown in project documents and plans, and shall be rolled, finished,
and approved by the Engineer before the placement of the next course.
PLANT MIX AGGREGATES

A.
Furnish aggregates from acceptable sources approved by the Engineer. Up to 20

percent by weight Recycled Asphalt Pavement (RAP) may be substituted for
Plant Mix Aggregate, provided the RAP meets the gradation requirements
below, and the RAP mix meets the mix design requirements listed below.
B.
Furnish test data as outlined in this section on each source to be used for
acceptance by the Engineer.
C.
Designation of the sources of supply and the acceptability of the material there
from, does not extend to the grading of the material as it may naturally come from
the pit or crusher. Adjust the crusher and screens to remove certain portions of
the material as may be necessary to furnish gravel that will comply with the
specifications in the contract. No additional compensation will be allowed for
such adjustment of the equipment or the rejection of waste. It is understood that
the Engineer may order procurement of material from any portion of any area
designated as a pit site and may reject portions of the deposit as unacceptable.
D.
Aggregate materials shall not contain more than 1.5% by weight of clay lumps,
shale, or coal, nor lightweight particles shall exceed 3.5% by weight. No
combination of clay, shale, coal, or lightweight particles shall exceed 3.5% by
weight. Do not use Scoria (fired clay). Aggregate materials shall conform to the
grading stipulated in the contract documents. Use reasonable care in the selection
of material in a pit so that uniform product will be produced at all times. No
compensation will be allowed for such stripping of the pit as may be required in
order that satisfactory material may be secured.
Section 02510
Page 2 of 20

E.
Aggregate used shall consist of gravel, crushed to the specified size, crushed
stone, composed of hard durable pebbles or stone fragments, reclaimed asphalt
pavement, and finely crushed stone filler, sand or natural clean material, or other
fine mineral material. The portion of the material retained on the No. 4 sieve
(4.74 mm) will be called coarse aggregate and that passing the No. 4 sieve (4.74
mm) and retained on the #200 sieve (0.075) will be called fine aggregate. The
material passing the #200 (0.075 mm) will be called mineral filler. The reclaimed
asphalt pavement shall be removed from its original location and reduced by
suitable means to such particle size as may be required for use in hot plant mix
asphalt concrete.
F.
For all gradings of fine aggregate, including any blended fine aggregate and
mineral filler, passing a No. 40 sieve (0.425 mm), shall have a liquid limit not
exceeding 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6.
G.
Produce coarse aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve (4.74 mm) having a
minimum of 50% by weight of particles with at least one mechanically fractured
face. The coarse aggregate shall not exceed 40% wear at 500 revolutions.
H.
Preliminary acceptance of aggregates proposed for use may be made at the point of
production. Final acceptance will be made only after tests of the aggregates are
complete and in place.
I.
Surface Course Asphalt Plant Mix Aggregate:

TABLE 1
REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADING OF SURFACE COURSE AGGREGATE

Percentage by Weight Passing
Job Mix Target Bands
Sieve Size
1"
(25.0 mm)
3/4" (19.0 mm)
1/2"
(12.5 mm)
3/8" (9.5 mm)
No. 4 (4.75mm)
No. 10 (2.00 mm)
No. 40 (0.425mm)
No. 200 (0.075 mm)
1.
Type A
100
91-93
76-89
61-79
41-54
31-39
16-27
4-7
Job Mix
Tolerance
7
7
7
7
6
6
5
2
The above gradation bands represent the job mix target limits, which
determine the suitability of aggregate for use. The final job mix target
Section 02510
Page 3 of 20

gradation must be within the specified bands and uniformly graded from
coarse to fine and not vary from the low limits on one screen to the high
limits on the adjacent screen, or vice versa. The final job mix gradation
limits are established by applying the job mix tolerances to the job mix
targets.
2.
2.3
The job mix formula establishes target values. During production of the
mix, the target gradation shall lie within the job mix grading limits
specified in Table 1. For example, Type A, No. 200 band is 4-7. ZA
job mix target of 5 has been selected for the final mix. The job mix
gradation limits is 5, plus and minus 2. Therefore, the job mix gradation
limits for production is 3-7.
ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL

A.
Furnish Asphalt binder material to be used as specified in the contract documents

that meet the type and grade specified requirements in this section and Table 3.
1.
Grade:
a.
(PGAB) PG 58-28
B.
The percentage of asphalt by weight, to be added to the aggregate will be,

generally, between 4 and 8 percent of the weight of the total mix. The mix design
will establish the exact percentage of asphalt in the mix, based upon preliminary
laboratory tests, sieve analysis and grading and character of the aggregate
furnished within the specification limits. No claim is allowed for the payment for
rejecting any batch or load of mixture containing an excess or deficient amount of
asphalt binder varying more than 0.4 of a percent from the fixed mix design
percentage.
C.
Obtain Engineer approval of the asphalt material source before shipments are
made to any project. The source of supply cannot change after work is started
unless approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer is not liable for the
quantity shipped.
D.
Samples of asphalt binder material may be taken, as directed by the Engineer, and
placed in uncontaminated one-quart containers. When sampled, these shall be
taken from the tanker car or truck at the point of delivery on the project and
submitted to the Engineer.
E.
All transport vehicles must be equipped with a spigot or gate valve installed in
either: (1) the unloading line, (2) in the tanker at the centerline on the tank, (3) in
the pressure line from the unloading pump, or other locations approved by the
Engineer. Assure the spigot or gate valve has a diameter of between 3/8 inch (1
cm) and 3/4 inch (2.5 cm). The spigot valve must be located to prevent
contamination from plant dust or other contaminants.
Section 02510
Page 4 of 20

F.
The supplier furnishing the asphalt binder material shall inspect each tanker car or
truck before it is loaded and ship only in clean, uncontaminated, fully insulated
cars or trucks, sealed after loading by the supplier.
G.
The material supplier shall issue, in duplicate, a certificate showing full

compliance with the specifications for the designated grade of material, together
with the following information. Project number, date of shipment, source of the
material, car or truck initial and number, destination, gross quantity loaded,
loading temperature, and net quantity in gallons at 60F (15.5 C) or tons,
whichever unit of measurement is stipulated. Assure the certificate of compliance
accompanies the shipment and is furnished to the Engineer. The certificate,
signed by the supplier representative, must also certify that the conveyance vessel
was inspected and found to be free of contaminating material.
H.
The certificate of compliance is the basis for tentative acceptance and use of the
material. Samples taken according to applicable sampling methods and retained
by the Engineer may be tested at the Engineers discretion. Failure of the asphalt
material to meet these specifications may result in rejection of the entire,
associated work. If rejected, remove and replace rejected work.
I.
Apply asphalt material at temperatures that assure uniform mixing or spreading.

Application temperature ranges for each grade of material should be accompanied
with the mix design. Application temperature for mixing applications will be in
accordance with the mix design.
J.
Upon request by the Engineer, furnish the Engineer and/or laboratory (responsible
for completing the mix design) with data or a report showing the temperatureviscosity relationship of each asphalt binder used on the project. Assure this data
covers the range of temperatures used for mixing and compaction. In addition,
the Engineer may request a complete set of test results from Table 3 for each
grade used on the project.
Section 02510
Page 5 of 20

TABLE 3
PERFORMANCE GRADED ASPHALT BINDER (PGAB)
Performance Grade
PG 58
-22
Average 7-day Maximum Pavement

Design Temperature, C
Minimum Pavement Design
Temperature, C
PG 64
-28
-22
>-28
>-22
<58
>-22
Test Methods
-28
<64
>-28
Original Binder
Flash Point Temp.: Minimum C
230
Viscosity: Maximum, 3 Pa s (3000

cP), Test Temp, C
135
AASHTO
T48
ASTM
D4402
Dynamic Shear: G* / sin delta,

58
64
Minimum, 1.00 kPa Test Temp @ 10
rad / s, C
Rolling Thin Film Oven (AASHTO T240) or Thin Film Oven (T179) Residue
Mass Loss, Maximum, %
1.0
58
64
Minimum, 2.20 kPa Test Temp @ 10
rad / s, C
Pressure Aging Vessel Residue (AASHTO PP1)
100
100
PAV Aging Temp, C
Minimum, 5000 kPa Test Temp @
10 rad / s, C
Creep Stiffness a: S, Minimum, 300
MPa m-value, Minimum, 0.300 Test
Temp, @ 60 sec, C
Direct Tension a: Failure Strain,
Minimum, 1.0%, Test Temp @ 1.0
mm/min. C
a.
AASHTO
TP5
AASHTO
T240
AASHTO
TP5
AASHTO
PP1
AASHTO
TP5
22
19
25
22
-12
-18
-12
-18
AASHTO
TP1
-12
-18
-12
-18
AASHTO
TP3
If creep stiffness is below 300 MPa, the direct tension test is not required. If the creep
stiffness is between 300 and 600 MPa, the direct tension failure strain requirement can be
used in lieu of the creep stiffness requirement. The m-value requirement must be
satisfied in both cases.
Section 02510
Page 6 of 20

2.4
COMPOSITION OF MIXES:
A.
General
1.
Submit to the engineer for approval a mix design for each mix required on
the project. Assure the job-mix formula is within the gradation limits in
Part 2 Products in this Section.
2.
Have the job-mix formula prepared by an independent testing laboratory

approved by the Engineer. The requirements of ASTM D-3666 are the
guidelines for testing laboratory approval. The cost of the job-mix
formula(s) is at Contractor expense.
3.
Keep the job mix formula current and contain the following minimum
information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
4.
B.
Gradation of all constituent aggregates.

Specific gravity of constituent aggregates and asphalt cement.
Source of supply of all materials and grade of asphalt cement.
Marshall design curves for stability, unit weight, flow and
volumetric requirements (VMA and total voids) at asphalt contents
below and above optimum (four points minimum).
Measured voidless (Rices) specific gravity used in voids
computations.
Composite aggregate grading.
Recommended asphalt cement content.
Marshall compactive effort (50 blows).
Date of mix design (job mix formula).
Index of retained strength.
In addition to the job mix formula, all asphalt concrete surfacing mix
submittals will have laboratory tests indicating that the Tensile Strength
Ratio (TSR) as determined by AASHTO T-283, is at least 70%. Test shall
be performed at 7.0 +/- 1% air voids and shall include the freeze cycle.
Asphalt Concrete Surface Course

1.
The maximum permissible variation from the job-mix formula within the
specification limits is as follows:
a.
b.
c.
Aggregate Gradation.. Within Job Mix Tolerances

Asphalt 0.4 percent*
Temperature of Mix 20 F
Section 02510
Page 7 of 20

2.
This tolerance will be permitted only if the job mix parameter

curves indicate that the corresponding Marshall design limits are
not exceeded.
Produce Hot Plant Mix Asphalt Concrete Base Courses having the
following characteristics as measured by AASHTO T245, ASTM D6726
& D6927 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures by means of
the Marshall Apparatus:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Number of compaction blows, each end of specimen..........................35

Stability, minimum ............................................................................500
Flow................................................................................................ 8 - 18
Air voids, percent ............................................................................. 3 - 5
Percent voids in mineral aggregate (minimum) .................... See Table 4
TABLE 4
REQUIRED VOIDS IN MINERAL AGGREGATE (VMA)
Nominal particle size (table 2)
Voids in Mineral Aggregate, Min.
3/8 - inch
(9.5 mm)
14
- inch
(12.5 mm)
13
3/4 - inch
(19.0 mm)
12
1 - inch
(25.0 mm)
11
1 - inch
(37.5 mm)
10
Nominal maximum particle size is one size larger than the first sieve to retain more than 10
percent.
2.5
ROOT INHIBITOR
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
Provide a root inhibitor, trifluralin or approved equal, which shall be

applied under the asphalt paved trail within the city portion of the project.
The herbicide shall be applied in liquid form, and shall be applied at the
manufacturers recommended rate.
Contractor shall submit product specifications and manufacturers
application recommendations to the Engineer for approval prior to use on
the project.
Section 02510
Page 8 of 20

PART 3:
3.1
EXECUTION
CRUSHING:
A.
Crushing Equipment
1.
B.
Screening Plants
1.
C.
3.2
Fit crushing plant-screening equipment, when required, with blowers or

other devices capable of removing excess and undesirable fines.
Screening plants consist of a revolving trommel screen, shaker screen,

vibrating screen, or other devices capable of removing oversize material,
excess and undesirable fines.
Scales
1.
Furnish scales, when required, satisfactory to the Engineer. Test and

certify scales prior to their use on the project and as often thereafter as the
Engineer may consider necessary to insure their accuracy. Have on hand
not less than ten, 50-pound weights for testing scales.
2.
House the recording devices of the scales in a suitable manner. Place the
scales in a location suitable to facilitate accurate weighing of loads. The
scales shall be accurate to one-half of one percent at any weight. Alternate
methods or devices for weighing may be acceptable, provided that these
methods or devices produce the same degree of accuracy as required of
platform scales.
MATERIAL HANDLING:
A.
All work involved in clearing and stripping pits and quarries, including handling
unsuitable material encountered, are performed with no additional compensation
being allowed for this work. The pits as utilized shall immediately be opened so
as to expose the vertical faces of the various strata of acceptable material and,
unless otherwise directed, the material shall be secured in successive vertical cuts
extending through all the exposed strata.
B.
Provide, unless otherwise specified, material containing as large a proportion as

possible of crushed aggregate. Combine the crushed material with the screened
material to obtain a uniform product.
C.
No material will be accepted which is loaded into hauling units in a segregated

condition or which does not meet the required grading. In case the material
deposit contains sand or other material in excess of the specification gradation
requirements, or of an unacceptable quality, such excess or undesirable material
Section 02510
Page 9 of 20

shall be removed and disposed of prior to crushing, or during screening

operations, if crushing is not required.
D.
3.3
3.4
Provide a storage bin of ample capacity to insure uniform quality and delivery of
material. Loading of trucks directly from the conveyor belt, from the crusher or
screening plant will not be permitted.
STOCKPILES:
A.
Grub and clean sites for aggregate stockpiles prior to storing aggregates. Assure
the site is firm, smooth and well drained. Maintain a bed of aggregate suitable to
avoid the inclusion of soil or foreign material.
B.
Build up coarse aggregate stockpiles in tiers of not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) in
thickness. Assure each tier is completely in place before the next tier is placed.
Do not allow material to cone down over the next lower tier.
C.
Dumping, casting or pushing over the sides of stockpiles will be prohibited,

except in the case of the fine aggregate stockpiles.
D.
Space stockpiles of different gradations of aggregate far enough apart, or

separated by suitable walls or partitions, to prevent the mixing of the aggregates.
E.
Any methods of stockpiling aggregate, which allows the stockpile to become

contaminated with foreign matter or causes excessive degradation of the
aggregate, will not be permitted. Excessive degradation will be determined by
sieve tests of samples taken from any portion of the stockpile over which
equipment has operated and failure of such samples to meet all grading
requirements for the aggregate discontinuance of such stockpiling procedures.
F.
Transfer the aggregate from the stockpiles in such a manner that uniform grading
of the material is preserved.
CONVEYOR STOCKPILING:
A.
3.5
Materials stockpiled by conveyors shall be deposited in a succession of mergingcone piles. Do not drop material over 12 feet (3.66m) nor allow cones to exceed
12 feet (3.66m) in height. Cones should be leveled to a thickness of
approximately 4 feet (1.2m) prior to starting another tier.
TRUCK STOCKPILING:
A.
Materials stockpiled by trucks shall construct the stockpile in tiers approximately

4 feet (1.2m) in thickness. Complete each tier before the next tier is started.
Section 02510
Page 10 of 20

3.6
3.7
ASPHALT MIXING PLANTS

A.
Use mixing plants of either the weight batching type, the continuous flow mixing
type, or drum dryer type. Use drum dryer mixers specifically designed and
constructed for producing hot mix.
B.
Equip all plants with approved conveyors, power units, aggregate handling
equipment, aggregate screens and bins that are coordinated and operated to
produce a uniform mixture within the specified job mix tolerances.
C.
Use batch-type plants having a minimum batch production capacity of 2,000

pounds (900 kg). Use continuous flow or drum dryer plants having a minimum
production capacity of 60 tons per hour (27 kg per hour). These capacity
requirements may be modified if specified in the Contract Documents.
D.
Stop production and remove from the project mixing plants that fail to
continuously produce a mixture meeting requirements as specified.
INSPECTION AND CONTROL OF ASPHALT MIXING PLANT:

A.
3.8
MIX DESIGN:
A.
3.9
For verification of weights and measures, character of materials and

determination of temperatures used in the preparation of the paving mixes, the
Engineer or his authorized representatives will, at all times, have access to all
portions of the mixing plant, aggregate plant, storage yards and other facilities for
producing and processing the materials for the work. All sampling and testing of
processed and unprocessed material is performed in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract Documents.
The Contractors independent testing agency shall provide the engineer with a
gradation analysis of the completed mix to assure that the materials being
produced and used are within the tolerances of the mix design and the
specifications of the mix being used.
SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR ACCEPTANCE:

A.
Sampling and testing of aggregates or other constituent materials will be

performed by the independent testing agency at a frequency determined by the
owner or the owners representative. Marshall field control is performed under
AASHTO T245, ASTM D6926 & D6927. Field density testing is by core
testing for acceptance purposes. Densities to conform to Section 2510, 3.28.
Gradations to be within the job mix gradation limits. Oil content to be within 0.4
percent of the Marshall Mix Design.
B.
Samples will be used to verify compliance with the requirements set forth in this
Section. If there is a dispute, a third party testing firm may be retained by the
Section 02510
Page 11 of 20

Contractor for additional testing.

3.10
3.11
WEATHER LIMITATIONS:
A.
When the moisture in the stockpiled aggregate or the dryer adversely effects the
quality of mix production, normal plant operations, or when pools of water are
observed on the base, mixing and placing of hot-mix asphalt is prohibited.
B.
Do not place asphalt hot-mix surface course mixture when the air temperature is
less than 40F (4C) and rising. Do not place asphalt hot-mix base course
mixtures of compacted lifts 4 inches (10 cm) or more when the air temperature is
less than 30F (-1C) and rising. Do not place asphalt upon a surface which is
frozen or that has a temperature of less than 32F (0C). Do not place paving
during rainfall or in standing water.
SURFACE PREPARATION:
A.
3.12
NEW WORK:
A.
3.14
Assure the area to be paved is true to line and grade and has a dry and properly
prepared surface before starting paving operations. Assure the surface is free
from all loose screenings and other loose or foreign material.
For new work, meet the surface preparation requirements in Sections 02230,
02234 or 02235 of these specifications. Prime stabilized layer if indicated as a
bid item in the Contract Documents.
PATCHING:
A.
Weather Limitations
1.
B.
Follow procedures set out in Section 3.10.
Surface Preparations
1.
Assure the area to be paved is true to line and grade, is dry and properly
prepared surface before starting paving operations. Clean the surface of
all loose screenings and other loose or foreign material.
2.
Before paving, proof roll the base. Areas that yield excessively or crack
under such wheel loads will be excavated and replaced, to correct yielding
and cracking problems. This does not replace the base or subgrade
compaction requirements. Cut the edge of existing pavements against
which additional pavement is to be placed straight and vertical.
3.
Minimum standards for patching new or existing pavement include the

Section 02510
Page 12 of 20

following:
4.
C.
a.
Neatly cut all asphalt edges using an asphalt saw.
b.
Cut asphalt edges to form as regular a patch shape as practical and

should, in general, approximate a rectangle.
c.
Cut asphalt edges at least 30 cm (12 inches) wider than the trench
width on each side of trench excavations; and, in general, be cut
parallel to the street centerline for mainline construction and
perpendicular to the street centerline for service lateral
construction.
Remove and replace asphalt surface widths of less than 3 feet (90 cm).
Compaction
A.
Compact to a density equal to or greater than 92 percent of Maximum

Theoretical Density (RICE) as determined by ASTM D2041. Due to the location of the trail
on the existing fill embankment, vibratory rolling methods to compact the pavement
layer are not allowed, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. If the contractor
is experiencing difficulty achieving compaction utilizing non-vibratory methods, the
Engineer will contact Tetra Tech to discuss alternative compaction methods.
3.15
TRANSPORTATION OF MIX:
A.
3.16
Transport the mix in vehicles cleaned of all foreign material which may affect the
mix. The truck beds must be painted, or sprayed with a lime-water, soap or
detergent solution at least once a day or as often as required. After this operation,
elevate the truck bed and thoroughly drain it, with no excess solution being
permitted. Dispatch the vehicles so that all material delivered is placed in
daylight, unless the Engineer approves artificial light. Deliver material to the
paver at a uniform rate and in amount well within the capacity of the paving and
compacting equipment.
SPREADING AND FINISHING:
A.
Spread and finish meeting the following requirements

1.
2.
3.17
Apply the root inhibitor treatment to the base material directly in front of
the paver. The root inhibitor may not sit for longer than 15 minutes before
being with asphalt mix.
The maximum compacted lift thickness is 2 inches.
MECHANICAL PAVERS:
Section 02510
Page 13 of 20

3.18
A.
Spread and strike off the base and surface courses with a mechanical paving
machine. Operate the paving machine so that material does not accumulate and
remain along the sides of the receiving hopper.
B.
Do not use equipment, which leaves tracks or indented areas, which cannot be
corrected in normal operation, produces flushing or other permanent blemishes, or
fails to produce a satisfactory surface.
C.
Construct longitudinal joints and edges to true line markings. Establish lines for
the paver to follow in placing individual lanes parallel to the centerline of the
proposed roadway. Position and operate the paver to follow closely the
established lines.
D.
When using pavers in echelon, assure the first paver follows the marks or lines
with the second paver following the edge of the material placed by the first paver.
To assure a hot joint and obtain proper compaction, assure the pavers work as
close together as possible, not exceeding 100 feet (30 m) apart. In backing trucks
against the paver, take care not to jar the paver out of its proper alignment.
E.
As soon as the first load of material has been spread, check the texture of the
unrolled surface to determine its uniformity. Segregation of materials is not
permitted. If segregation occurs, suspend spreading operation until the cause is
determined and corrected.
F.
Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses at least 2 feet (0.6 m). Offset
longitudinal joints at least 6 inches (15 cm).
G.
Correct all irregularities in alignment left by the paver by trimming directly

behind the machine. Immediately after trimming, thoroughly compact the edges
of the course by tamping. Avoid distorting the pavement during this operation.
H.
Assure edges against which additional pavement is to be placed is straight and

approximately vertical. Use a lute or covered rake immediately behind the paver,
when required, to obtain a true line and vertical edge. Correct all irregularities in
the surface of the pavement course directly behind the paver. Remove excess
material forming high spots by a shovel or lute. Fill low areas with hot mix and
smooth it with the back of a shovel being pulled over the surface. Fanning of
material over such areas is not permitted.
HAND SPREADING:
A.
In small areas where the use of mechanical finishing equipment is not practical,
the mix may be spread and finished by hand, if so directed by the Engineer. Wood
or steel forms, approved by the Engineer, rigidly supported to assure correct grade
Section 02510
Page 14 of 20

and cross section, may be used. In such instances, measuring blocks and
intermediate strips must be used to obtain the required cross-section. Perform
hand placing carefully. Uniformly distribute the material to avoid segregation of
the coarse and fine aggregate. Broadcasting of material is not permitted. During
the spreading operation, loosen and uniformly distribute all material using lutes or
covered rakes. Reject material that has formed into lumps and does not break
down readily. Following placing and before rolling, check the surface with
templates and straightedges and correct all irregularities.
B.
3.19
Maintain on the project heating equipment for keeping hand tools free from
asphalt. Exercise caution to prevent heating that may burn the material. Assure
the temperature of the tools when used is not greater than the temperature of the
mix being placed. Use heat only to clean hand tools; petroleum oils or solvents
are not permitted.
COMPACTION:
A.
Due to the location of the trail on the existing fill embankment, vibratory
rolling methods to compact the pavement layer are not allowed unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer. If the contractor is experiencing
difficulty achieving compaction utilizing non-vibratory methods, the
Engineer will contact Tetra Tech to discuss alternative compaction methods.
B.
Furnish the number of Non-Vibratory rollers necessary to provide the specified

pavement density. During rolling, keep the roller wheels moist to avoid picking
up the material.
C.
After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, start rolling
longitudinally at the sides and progress toward the center of the pavement.
Operate the rollers at a slow, uniform speed with the drive roll or wheel nearest
the paver. Do not exceed 3 miles per hour (4.8 km per hour).
D.
Do not quickly change the line of rolling reversing direction suddenly. If rolling
displaces the material, re-work the area using lutes or shovels and restore it the
original grade of the loose material before re-rolling. Do not permit heavy
equipment or rollers to stand on the finished surface before it has been compacted
and has thoroughly cooled.
E.
When paving in single width, roll the first lane placed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Transverse joints
Outside edge
Initial or breakdown rolling, beginning on the low side and progressing
toward the high side.
Second rolling, same procedures as 3
Finish rolling
Section 02510
Page 15 of 20

3.21
F.
When paving in echelon, or abutting a previously placed lane, perform the

longitudinal joint rolling the same as transverse joint rolling.
G.
When paving in echelon, leave 2 or 3 inches (5 to 7.5 cm) of the edge unrolled,
which the second paver can match unrolled. Then the joint between the lanes can
be rolled together. Do not leave edges exposed more than 15 minutes without
being rolled.
H.
In laying a surface mix adjacent to any finished area, place it high enough so that,
when compacted, the finished surface is true and uniform.
I.
On slight grades, check gutters with a straightedge and test with running water to
assure drainage to the planned outlet.
J.
The average density shall be equal to or greater than 93 percent of the maximum
density as determined by ASTM D2041 and no individual sample shall be less
than 92 percent of maximum density.
TRANSVERSE JOINTS:
A.
Construct and compact transverse joints to provide a smooth riding surface. Joints
will be straight edged and string lined to assure smoothness and true alignment.
B.
Joint formed with bulkheads to provide a straight line and vertical face will be
checked with a straightedge before fresh material is placed against it to complete
the joint. If bulkheads are not used to form the joint and the roller is permitted to
roll over the edge of the new material, locate the joint line in back of the rounded
edge the distance required to provide a true surface and cross-section. If a joint
has been distorted by traffic or by other causes, trim it to line. Paint the joint face
with a thin coating of asphalt before the fresh material is placed against it.
C.
Place the material against the joints vertical face with the paving machine
positioned so that the material overlaps the edge of the joint 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5
cm). Maintain a uniform depth of the overlapped material. Remove and dispose
of the coarse aggregate in the overlapped material that dislodged during raking.
D.
Position rollers on the previously compacted material transversely so that no more

than 6 inches (15 cm) of the rolling wheel rides on the edge of the joint. Operate
the roller to pinch and press the mix into place at the transverse joint. Continue
rolling along this line, shifting position gradually across the joint, in 6 to 8-inch
(15 to 20 cm) increments, until the joint has been rolled by entire width of the
roller wheel.
E.
Keep the number of transverse joints to a minimum. When paving single width
and maintaining traffic, pave one lane no farther than one block. Complete all
lanes to the same station at the end of each paving day. When paving in echelon,
bring the lanes up even as is practical.
Section 02510
Page 16 of 20

3.22
3.23
3.24
LONGITUDINAL JOINTS:
A.
Roll longitudinal joints directly behind the paving operation. Assure the first lane
placed is true to line and grade and has a vertical face. Place the material in the
lane being paved up firmly against the face of the previously placed lane. Position
the paver during spreading to assure the material overlaps the edge of the lane
previously placed by 1 inch to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm). Uniformly maintain the
width and depth of the overlapped material at all times. Keep the paver aligned
with the line or markings placed along the joint for alignment purposes. Before
rolling, remove and dispose of the coarse aggregate in the material overlapping
the joint.
B.
Shift rollers onto the previously placed lane so that not more than 6 inches (15
cm) of the roller wheel rides on the edge of the fine material left by brooming.
Operate the rollers to compact the fines gradually across the joint. Continue
rolling until a compacted, neat joint is obtained. When the abutting lane is not
placed in the same day, paint the joint with a very think coating of asphalt before
placing the abutting lane. If the joint is distorted during the days work by traffic
or by other causes, carefully trim the edge of the lane to a neat line.
EDGES:
A.
Roll the pavement edges concurrently with or immediately after rolling the
longitudinal joint.
B.
Exercise care in consolidating the course along the entire length of the edges. In
rolling pavement edges, extend the roller wheels 2 to 4 inches (5 to 10 cm)
beyond the pavement edge.
BREAKDOWN ROLLING:
A.
3.25
Immediately begin breakdown rolling following the rolling of the longitudinal

joint edges. Operate rollers as close to the paver as required to obtain density
without causing undue displacement. Operate the breakdown roller with the drive
roll or wheel nearest the finishing machine. The Engineer may make exceptions
when working on steep slopes or super-elevated curves.
SECOND ROLLING:
A.
Assure the second rolling follows the breakdown rolling as close as possible while
the paving mix is still at a temperature that will provide the specified density.
Section 02510
Page 17 of 20

3.26
3.27
3.28
FINISH ROLLING:
A.
Perform the finish rolling while the material is still warm enough to remove roller
marks. If necessary, the Engineer may require using pneumatic-tired rollers.
Complete finish rolling the same day the mixture is placed.
B.
In places inaccessible to standard rollers, perform compaction using trench rollers

or others to meet the specified compaction requirements. Operate the trench
roller as directed until the course is compacted. Hand, manual or mechanical
tamping, may be used in such areas if it is proved to the Engineer that the
operation will provide the specified density.
SHOULDERS:
A.
Where paved shoulders or curbs are not specified, do not place the shoulder
material against the pavement edges until the surface course rolling completed.
Take care to prevent distortion of the pavement edge from specified line and
grade. When shoulders are paved (except in conjunction with the traveled way
paving), cold joint construction procedure is required to assure a tight bond at the
joint.
B.
When the rolling of the surface has been completed and the edges have been
thoroughly compacted, immediately place shoulder material against the edges and
roll it.
DENSITY AND SURFACE REQUIREMENTS:

A.
The average mat density shall be equal to or greater than 93 percent of the
maximum density as determined by ASTM D2041 and no individual sample shall
be less than 92 percent of maximum (Rices) density, prepared as specified in Part
2-Products in this section and made from plant mix meeting the job-mix formula.
Verification of maximum density as determined by ASTM D2041 from plant
produced material during production is recommended.
B.
Produce a final surface that is uniform in texture and meets the line and grade
specified. Before final acceptance of the Project or during the progress of the
work, the Engineer will determine the thickness of all courses. Repair or replace
all unsatisfactory work.
C.
Assure density and thickness meets the plans and specifications. During
compaction, preliminary tests to aid in controlling the thickness, may be
performed by inserting a flat blade, correctly graduated, through the material to
the top of the previously placed base, or by other approved methods.
D.
In checking compacted depth, the cutting of the test holes, refilling with
acceptable materials and proper compaction may be performed by the Owners
testing agency.
Section 02510
Page 18 of 20

3.29
E.
For testing the surface on all courses, a 10-foot (3 m) straightedge will be used
with the centerline of the straightedge placed parallel to the roadway centerline.
F.
Any variations that exceed 5/16-inch (0.8 cm) in 10 feet (3 m) for base course and
1/4-inch (0.64 cm) in 10 feet (3 m) for surface course must be corrected. Correct
irregularities that may develop before the completion of rolling by loosening the
surface mix and removing or adding materials as is required. If any irregularities
or defects remain after the final compaction, remove the surface course and place
and compact new material to a true and even surface. All minor surface
projections, joints and minor honeycombed surfaces must be rolled smooth to
grade, as directed.
G.
Remove and replace areas of new pavement requiring patching as directed.

Patching material will be tested for meeting specifications. The cost of testing is
at Contractor expense.
PAVEMENT AND MATERIAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS:

A.
Contractors independent testing agency will provide core samples of asphalt

surface courses to check in place density and compacted depth. The cores are 4inch (10 cm) diameter. Materials and acceptance tests will be made by the
Contractors independent testing agency to determine the Contractors compliance
with the specifications.
B.
Materials failing to meet the tests specified may be retested if approved and as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall pay the costs of any required retesting for acceptance purposes. Re-testing will be performed by the Owners
testing agency unless otherwise approved by the owner. If there is a dispute, a
third party testing firm may be retained by the contractor for additional retesting
for the Engineers review and consideration.
C.
The costs of the following tests are at Contractor expense:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Initial aggregate quality tests

Job-Mix Formula
Any tests the Contractor requires to control his crushing, screening or
other construction operations
Initial in place density and compacted depth
Re-testing of failing tests as provided above
D.
Correct all pavement composition, field density, or thickness, deficiencies at

Contractor expense.
E.
The field density and thickness of the pavement is determined by measuring the
cores tested. The actual thickness must be no less than 1/4-inch (6.5 mm) from
the specified thickness.
Section 02510
Page 19 of 20

F.
PART 4:
4.1
When the measurement of any core is less than the plan thickness by more than
the allowable deviation, the actual thickness of the pavement in this area may be
determined by taking additional cores at intervals of parallel to the centerline in
each direction from the affected location. Continue in each direction until a core
is found which is not deficient by more than the allowable deviation. The
Engineer will evaluate areas found deficient in thickness and determine which
areas warrant removal. Remove and replace the areas with asphaltic concrete of
the thickness shown on the plans. Additional coring is considered as re-testing of
failing areas.
MEASUREMENT
A.

1.
B.
ROOT INHIBITOR
1.
4.2
Measure asphalt paving mixture by the ton (2000 pounds) including the
asphalt. The quantities measured for payment are the amount of asphalt
paving materials actually used in the completed and accepted work in
accordance with the plans and specifications. To measure asphalt concrete
pavement, provide a commercial or project weighing system meeting
requirements as outlined in Section 02231 Trail Excavation 4.1.
The quantity of root inhibitor will not be measured. The bid amount is
reflective of all work shown in the contract documents, and includes all
labor, equipment, materials, tests, investigations, and incidentals necessary to
acceptably apply the root inhibitor under the asphalt concrete pavement.
PAYMENT
A.
measurement as reflected in the bid schedule.
END OF SECTION
Section 02510
Page 20 of 20
Montana Public Works Standard Specifications

SECTION 02528
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
1.3
AASHTO M 213
Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
AASHTO M148
Standard Specification for Liquid-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete
TESTING
A.
Meet the quality control and quality assurance testing requirements in section
01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance.
B.
In place quality assurance testing shall be performed for the crushed base course
material as required in section 02235. Crushed Base Course
Furnish joint material meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213.
GRAVEL BASE MATERIAL

A.
2.4
Furnish structural concrete meeting the requirements of Section 03310,

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
PRE-FORMED EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL

A.
2.3
PRODUCTS
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
A.
2.2
This work is constructing combined curb and gutter using structural concrete and
meeting the lines, dimensions, and grades shown on the plans and these
specifications.
REFERENCES
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
Furnish gravel base meeting all applicable portions of Section 02235, CRUSHED
BASE COURSE, and meeting gradation requirements for 3/4" minus material.
CURING AND PROTECTIVE COATING MATERIALS
Section 02528
Page 1of 6

A.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

1.
B.
Emulsified Linseed Oil Compound

1.
PART 3:
3.1
3.3
Assure it meets all requirements of AASHTO M148 and contains at least

2.7 pounds (0.32 kg) of linseed oil per gallon (liter). Furnish a
manufacturers certification showing that the formulated weight of linseed
oil per gallon equals or exceeds this limit.
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
3.2
Furnish liquid membrane-forming compound meeting the requirements of

AASHTO M148, Type 1, clear or translucent.
Concrete curb and gutter may be machine-laid or hand-formed. Perform work

meeting these requirements and the applicable requirements of Section 03310,
FOUNDATION PREPARATION
A.
Excavate the foundation to the specified depth. Assure the subgrade or base
course for the concrete has a firm and even surface and is compacted meeting
Section 02230, TRAIL EXCAVATION.
B.
Complete excavation to the lines shown in the contract documents.
C.
Place and compact crushed base course material to depths shown on the plans
compacting it to a firm, even surface under all curb and gutter. This requirement
is waived if curb and gutter is installed on a portion of street base course material
of 4 inches or more in thickness.
D.
For new street construction or street reconstructing place gravel base course for
the street to the back of the curb.
FORMS
A.
Use metal forms unless otherwise approved of the depth equal to the face of the
item being constructed. Obtain Engineer approval of in-place forms before
placing concrete.
B.
Assure forms produce the shape, lines, and dimensions shown on the plans and/or
drawings. Assure forms prevent leakage of mortar and maintain position and
alignment. Thoroughly clean and oil before placing and do not remove forms
until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage.
Section 02528
Page 2of 6

3.4
C.
Where the curb and gutter is to abut an existing sidewalk, use an approved faceof-gutter form secured to maintain an established gutter grade. Vary the curb
height to assure the top of curb matches as nearly as possible the standard curb
and gutter cross section. Obtain Engineer approval to hand form lengths not
exceeding 10 feet (3m).
D.
Form radii using flexible or curved metal forms set to fit the specified curvature.
Obtain Engineer approval before using wood forms. Radii may be formed by
using segments of straight forms if the length of the straight segment does not
exceed one-tenth of the length of the radius.
REINFORCEMENT
A.
3.5
3.6
Place reinforcement as required. Place and hold in position before placing

concrete.
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place and compact the gravel base material to the specified grade before placing
concrete. Dampen the gravel base material just before placing the concrete.
Spade and tamp the concrete thoroughly into the forms to provide a dense,
compacted concrete free of rock pockets. Float, finish, and broom the exposed
surfaces. Each placing/finishing crew shall have at least one ACI Flatwork
Finishing Technician, or approved equivalent, on site at all times.
B.
Do not place concrete at a rate that exceeds the finishing operations ability to
meet these specifications.
C.
Machines or equipment that extrude curb and gutter may be used when approved,
provided they produce a finished product matching that obtained by the set-form
method. Use slip-form machines that are automatically controlled for
longitudinal grade, alignment, and transverse slope by sending devices operating
from string lines set from construction stakes placed by the Engineer.
STRIPPING FORMS AND FINISHING

A.
Forms
1.
B.
Remove forms when the concrete is sufficiently set to prevent chipping or

spalling. When forms are removed before the curing period has expired,
protect the concrete edges with moist earth or spray edges with curing
compound. Clean, oil, and examine all forms for defects before they are
used again.
Finishing
Section 02528
Page 3of 6

C.
1.
Finish the surface of concrete curbs and gutters true to the lines and grades
shown on the plans.
2.
Fill honeycomb or other blemishes in formed surfaces with grout to the

specified finish. Tool all edges to a -inch (6.4 mm) radius. Float the
surface using a magnesium float to a smooth and uniform surface. When
the concrete in the curb and gutter has hardened sufficiently, give the
surface a broom finish. Obtain Engineer approval of the broom before
use. Broom the surface without tearing the concrete. Broom to produce
regular corrugations not exceeding 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) deep.
Crew
1.
3.7
CURING
A.
3.8
3.9
Do not apply additional surface water. The Engineer may permit adding
water, but it must be applied by fog spray only. Use of an evaporation
retardant, Confilm, or equal, following the manufacturers directions is
permitted.
Curing meeting Section 03310, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, requirements.
JOINTS
A.
Place curb and gutter monolithically with no construction joints permitted, except
at planned expansion joints.
B.
Construction expansion joints at radius points, construction joints, junctions with

existing concrete, opposite to or at expansion joints in adjacent concrete, and at
maximum 330-foot (92 m) intervals, in a continuous run of concrete being placed.
Form expansion joints using -inch (12.7 mm) thick, pre-formed expansion joint
filler, as specified in Section 02528.2.2.
C.
Form or cut contraction joints 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) wide to one-fourth the depth of
the concrete being placed. Construct the joints to coincide with the joints in
adjacent concrete or in uniform sections 10 feet (3 m) in length. Where required
to make a closure, sections less than 10 feet (3 m) in length will be permitted with
the minimum length being 4 feet (1.2 m). When contraction joints are made by
approved forming or grooving before the concrete has set, tool the edges to the
approved radius.
CURB BACKFILL
A.
Complete the curb backfill to 4 inches (10 cm) below the top of curb before final
grading of the subgrade and placing the base course.
B.
Backfill using topsoil up to 4 inches (10 cm) below top of curb. Do not use sand
Section 02528
Page 4of 6

or gravel backfill in this area.
3.10
C.
In areas of existing lawns or constructed boulevards, use black loam or approved

topsoil for the top 4 inches (10 cm) of backfill. Place it out from the curb and in
the amount required to replace the turf or lawn removed during installation. Place
the backfill to a point level with the top of the curb, immediately adjacent to the
curb, and grade and blend to match the existing undisturbed lawn area.
D.
Where lawns do not exist, place the top 4 inches (10 cm) of backfill using
impervious dirt and conforming to the typical sections shown on the plans.
E.
Compact backfill to prevent settlement and level the surface to be free draining.
PRIME AND SEAL COAT PREPARATION

A.
3.11
TOLERANCES
A.
PART 4:
4.1
Paint the edge of the gutter adjacent to the asphalt surfacing with an asphalt prime
coat before placing the pavement surface course. When an asphalt seal coat is
specified, apply the oil and cover aggregate 3 inches (7.6 cm) on to the gutter to
provide a good seal on the joint between the concrete and pavement.
Perform the work to produce a curb and gutter meeting the specified line and
grade uniform in appearance and structurally sound. Remove and replace at
contractor expense curb and gutter having unsightly bulges, ridges, and/or low
spots in the gutter, or other defects as directed. Grade cannot deviate more than
1/8-inch (3.2 mm), and alignment not vary more than -inch (6.4 cm) from plan
elevation, grade or alignment. Tolerances may be checked using survey
instruments, straight edges, or water puddling. Puddled water cannot exceed inch (6.4 mm) in depth.
MEASUREMENT
A.

1.
Concrete curb and gutter will be measured by the finished and accepted
length of curb and gutter per linear foot. The finished curb and gutter
quantity is calculated by measuring the total length of curb along the top
back of curb as measured in the field, installed, and accepted.
Measurement of curb and gutter includes the crushed base course.
Minimum compacted depths of crushed base course must match those
shown on the plans.
Section 02528
Page 5of 6

4.2
PAYMENT
A.
to acceptably design, construct, and test the concrete curb and gutter.
END OF SECTION
Section 02528
Page 6of 6

Sixh Edition, April, 2010
SECTION 02529
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS, APPROACHES, CURB TURN FILLETS,
VALLEY GUTTERS AND MISCELLANEOUS NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This work is the construction of concrete sidewalk and driveway approaches, curb
turn fillets, valley gutters, new street monuments, and all other miscellaneous new
concrete construction complete in place.
REFERENCES
AASHTO M213
AASHTO M148
1.3
TESTING
A.
Meet the quality control and quality assurance testing requirements in section
01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance.
B.
In place quality assurance testing shall be performed for the crushed base course
material as required in section 02235. Crushed Base Course
PART 2:
2.1
Furnish structural concrete meeting the requirements of Section 03310,

PRE-FORMED EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL

A.
2.3
PRODUCTS
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
A.
2.2
Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint

Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
Standard Specification for Liquid-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete
Furnish joint material meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213.
GRAVEL BASE MATERIAL

A.
Furnish crushed base course material meeting applicable requirements of Section

02235, CRUSHED BASE COURSE, and meeting the gradation requirements for
3/4" minus material.
Section 02529
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS, APPROACHES, CURB TURN FILLETS, VALLEY GUTTERS
AND MISCELLANEOUS NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Page 1of 6

2.4
CURING AND PROTECTIVE COATING MATERIALS

A.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

1.
B.
Emulsified Linseed Oil Compound

1.
2.5
PART 3:
3.2
Furnish and supply conduit of the diameter shown on the Drawings to be placed
under the trail at locations shown on the drawings or as specified by the Engineer.
Conduit material other than Sch. 40 PVC must first be approved by the Engineer.
TRUNCATED DOMES
A.
3.1
Apply water-soluble or emulsified linseed oil compound between August

15 and April 14 as a protective coat. Assure it meets all requirements of
AASHTO M148 and contains at least 2.7 pounds of linseed oil per gallon.
Furnish a manufacturers certification showing that the formulated weight
of linseed oil per gallon equals or exceeds this limit.
CONDUIT
A.
2.6
Use liquid membrane-forming compounds meeting the requirements of

AASHTO M148, Type 1, clear or translucent. Apply the compound
between April 15 and August 14.
Furnish and supply truncated dome panels at pedestrian crossing locations shown
on the Drawings. Truncated dome panel material shall be iron.
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Construct sidewalks and driveway approaches, either new or replacement, valley

gutter and curb turn fillets at the locations shown on the plans and where directed
by the Engineer meeting these specifications and the applicable portions of
Section 03310, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
B.
The use of slip form machines is prohibited for items in this section unless
otherwise specified or permitted by the Engineer.
FOUNDATION PREPARATION
A.
Excavate to the specified depth. Assure the subgrade where the concrete to be
placed has a firm and even surface and is compacted as specified in Section
02230, STREET EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION.
B.
Place and compact crushed base course material to the compacted depth shown on
the plans to a firm, even surface. This requirement is waived for concrete if it is
Section 02529
Page 2of 6

to be installed on street crushed base course material exceeding 4 inches or more

in thickness.
C.
3.3
3.4
FORMS
A.
Furnish forms to produce the shape, lines, and dimensions shown on the plans
and/or drawings. Assure forms prevent leakage of mortar and are maintained in
proper position and accurate alignment. Thoroughly clean and oil forms with an
approved form oil before placing concrete and remove forms only after the
concrete has hardened sufficiently to support all loads without damage.
B.
Form radii using flexible or curved metal forms set to the required curvature. Use
wood forms only with the Engineers approval. Radii may be formed by using
segments of straight forms if the length of the straight segment does not exceed
one-tenth of the length of the radius.
C.
Use 6-inch (15 cm) forms and 6-inch (15 cm) pre-formed expansion joint material
for concrete 6 inches (15 cm) in depth.
REINFORCEMENT
A.
3.5
3.6
Place conduit below the gravel base material at locations specified by the
Engineer.
Place and hold in position reinforcement meeting the contract requirements before
placing the concrete.
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Assure the base is compacted and brought to specified grade before placing
concrete. Dampen the subgrade immediately before placing the concrete. Spade
and tamp the concrete into the forms providing a dense, compacted concrete free
of rock pockets. Float, finish and broom the exposed surfaces. Each
placing/finishing crew shall have at least one ACI Flatwork Finisher Technician,
or approved equivalent, on site at all times.
B.
Assure the rate of concrete placement does not exceed the rate at which the
various placing and finishing operations can be performed in accordance with
these specifications.
STRIPPING FORMS AND FINISHING

A.
Forms
1.
Remove forms when the concrete is sufficiently set to prevent chipping or

spalling. When forms are removed before the curing period has expired,
Section 02529
Page 3of 6

protect the concrete edges with moist earth or spray edges with curing
compound. Clean, oil, and examine all forms for defects before they are
used again.
B.
3.7
1.
Finish the concrete surface true to the lines and grades shown on the plans.
Float the concrete surface using a magnesium float to a smooth and uniform
surface. Plastering of the surface is prohibited. Edge all outside edges of the
slab and all joints using a -inch (6.5 mm) radius-edging tool. After concrete
has hardened sufficiently, give the surface a broom finish. Assure the broom
strokes are square across the concrete from edge to edge, overlapping adjacent
strokes. Broom without tearing the concrete. Assure the broomed finish
produces regular corrugations not exceed 1/8-inch (3mm) in depth.
2.
Place stamps or markings at locations where conduit under the sidewalk has
been installed. Submit proposed stamping styles and techniques to the
Engineer for approval before implementation.
3.
Install truncated dome panels at locations as shown on the drawings. Place

panels in wet concrete according to manufacturer guidelines and printed
instructions.
CURING
A.
3.8
Finishing
Cure meeting Section 03310, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE requirements.
JOINTS
A.
Extend isolation joints the full depth of the concrete and fill using -inch (12
mm) thick, pre-formed joint filler as specified in Section 02529.3.3. Place
isolation joints meeting this requirement where new concrete abuts existing
concrete. Form isolation joints around all appurtenances, such as manholes,
utility poles, etc. extending into and through the concrete.
B.
Install pre-formed joint filler between concrete and any fixed structure, such as a
building or bridge. Assure all expansion joint materials extend the full depth of
the concrete. Place isolation joints at radius points, junctions with existing
concrete, and opposite to or at expansion joints in adjacent concrete. Form cold
joints at unions of consecutive pours as shown on the plans or directed by the
Engineer. Assure the cold joint is vertical, the full depth of the concrete, and
tooled to a -inch (6.5 mm) radius.
C.
Divide sidewalk into sections using contraction joints formed by a jointing tool or
other approved methods. Extend the contraction joints into the concrete for at
least one-fourth of its depth and be approximately 1/8-inch (3 mm) wide. Unless
Section 02529
Page 4of 6

otherwise directed, space contraction joints at maximum 10-foot (3 m) intervals or

at a distance equal to the sidewalk width, whichever is less. In continuous
sidewalk runs, install isolation joints at the location of a regular contraction joint
if the distance between isolation joints does not exceed 300 feet (91 m).
3.9
3.10
BACKFILL
A.
In areas adjacent to existing lawns, backfill the top 4 inches (100 mm) using black
loam or good topsoil suitable for lawn growth. Place it out from the sidewalk or
driveway to replace turf or lawn removed during installation. Place the backfill
level with the top of the curb, immediately adjacent to the curb, graded and
blended to match the existing undisturbed lawn area.
B.
Where lawns do not exist, backfill the top 4 inches (100 mm) with impervious dirt
and place to meet the typical sections shown on the plans.
C.
Compact backfill to prevent settlement and level the surface to a neat appearing
and free draining surface.
TOLERANCES
A.
3.11
MISCELLANEOUS NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

A.
PART 4:
4.1
Assure all items of construction covered by this section present clean, uniform
surfaces and lines free of irregularities and distortions. Plane surfaces and vertical
tangent lines are tested with a 10-foot straightedge and cannot deviate more than
-inch (6.5 mm) from the straightedge.
Construct new street monuments, new street light bases, and other miscellaneous
concrete construction in accordance with detail drawings.
MEASUREMENT
A.
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
1.
B.
Concrete sidewalk or pathway will be measured by the finished and

accepted area of concrete sidewalk per square foot. The finished area is
calculated based on horizontal lengths and widths of actual concrete
sidewalk constructed at the depths shown on the plans and bid schedule as
measured in the field, installed, and accepted. Measurement of concrete
sidewalk includes crushed base course material.
CONDUIT
Section 02529
Page 5of 6

1.
C.
TRUNCATED DOMES
1.
4.2
Conduit will be measured by the linear foot of conduit trail crossing

completed and accepted.
Truncated domes will be measured by square foot of panel installed and

accepted.
PAYMENT
A.
to acceptably construct the concrete sidewalks, conduits, and truncated domes as
specified in the contract documents.
END OF SECTION
Section 02529
Page 6of 6

SECTION 02581
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND MARKERS
(PRE-FORMED PLASTIC, PAINTS AND ENAMELS)
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
This work is painting pavement lines, words and symbols, or applying plastic
lines, words, symbols, channelization buttons, and other reflective markers
meeting these specifications, the standard drawings, and in reasonably close
conformity with the lines and dimensions shown in the contract documents or
established by the Engineer. Striping locations are shown on the plans and typical
sections.
PRODUCT
PRE-FORMED PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL

A.
Furnish plastic pavement markings and legends consisting of reflectorized, prefabricated, homogeneous, thermoplastic ribbon of the specified thickness. Assure
the plastic contains reflective glass spheres uniformly distributed throughout its
cross section and is capable of being affixed to bituminous or Portland cement
concrete pavements using a liquid contact cement or pre-coated, pressuresensitive adhesive. Furnish white and yellow meeting standard highway colors.
Assure the white plastic material is non-yellowing, and the yellow plastic material
is non-facing for their expected useful life.
B.
For strip line widths of 6 inches (150 mm) or less, furnish plastic pavement
striping material in a single manufactured width equal to the specified width. For
specified stripe line widths exceeding 6 inches (150 mm), furnish plastic
pavement striping material in a single manufactured width equal to the specified
width or in two or more widths totaling the specified width.
C.
Cut the plastic marking material edges clean and true. Use at least 0.09-inch
(2.25 mm) thick plastic material for inlaying into new asphaltic surfaces. Use at
least 0.06-inch (1.50 mm) thick plastic material for application to existing
surfaces or to hardened new surfaces.
D.
Assure plastic pavement markings for inlay into new asphaltic surfaces are
capable of being applied just before the final rolling of the new surface and can be
rolled into place with conventional pavement rollers. For inlay applications,
assure the plastic and adhesive are not damaged by pavement temperatures
exceeding 175 F (79 C) or by water on roller drums.
E.
Assure the plastic pavement marking material and its adhesive are tack free to
Section 02581
Page 1of 13

provide easy handling without using a protective backing and can be repositioned
on the surface before being permanently fixed in position. Pre-coated adhesive
must be uniformly distributed over the entire contact surface of the plastic
material.
F.
Furnish plastic pavement marking material capable of molding itself to pavement

contours, breaks, and other surface irregularities under traffic at normal pavement
temperatures. Assure the plastic material will fuse with itself and with previously
applied markings of the same composition under normal use conditions.
G.
Assure pavement legends and symbols meet the applicable shapes and sizes
specified by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices as adopted by the
Federal Highway Administration (FHWA).
H.
Assure product agents or distributors furnish the manufacturers specifications

showing that the material furnished meets or exceeds these requirements and
submit evidence of successful product use over a one-year period under similar
climatic conditions. Plastic pavement marking material not meeting this use
requirement will be rejected.
I.
Submit a 4-inch (100 mm) by 1-foot (300 mm) sample from each lot of plastic
material proposed for use on the project to the Engineer for approval. Use only
approved plastic pavement marking material on the project.
1.
Composition Requirements
a.
Furnish pre-formed plastic pavement marking material consisting

of plasticizers, pigments, and graded glass spheres combined and
proportioned to meet the following requirements.
1)
2.
Pigments: Minimum 20% titanium dioxide of total

pigment for white marking material; Minimum 18%
medium chrome yellow of total pigment for ;yellow
marking material. Use graded glass spheres that are clean,
transparent, and meet the requirements of Section
02581.2.02.A.1. Assure the glass spheres are uniformly
distributed throughout the entire material.
Physical Requirements
a.
Tensile Strength
1)
Assure the plastic material has a minimum tensile strength

of 40 psi (270 kPa) of cross section when tested under
ASTM D638. The break resistance is based on an average
of at least three (3) samples tested at a temperature of 70 80 F (22 - 27 C) using a jaw speed of 0.25 inches (6.25
Section 02581
Page 2of 13

mm) per minute.

b.
Plastic Pull Test

1)
c.
Bend Test
1)
d.
f.
The plastic material must be flexible so that at 80 F (27

C), a 3" by 6" (75 mm by 150 mm) sample of the material
can be bent over a 1" (25 mm) diameter mandrel until the
end faces are parallel and 1" (25 mm) apart without
showing any fracture lines in the uppermost surface under
unassisted visual inspection.
Skid Resistance
1)
e.
A 1" - 6" (25 mm - 150 mm) sample of the plastic material

must support a dead weight of 0.66 lb per 0.01 inch (.28 kg
per 2.5 0 mm) of material thickness for at least 5 minutes at
70 - 80 F (22 - 27 C).
The surface friction of the plastic cannot be less than 35

BPN when tested under ASTM E303.
Reseal Test
1)
The plastic must re-seal to itself without adhesives when

tested as follows: Overlap two 1" x 3" (25 mm by 75 mm)
pieces face-to-face so that they form a single 1" (25 mm)
by 5" (125 mm) with a 1 square inch (25 square mm)
overlap in the center.
2)
Place the piece on a hard surface with a 1000 gram weight

resting uniformly on the entire overlap area and maintain at
140 to 190 F (60 - 88 C) for 2 hours. The actual
temperature to be maintained depends on the material being
tested but must be within the specified range. After cooling
to room temperature, the pieces must not separate without
tearing.
Reflectivity
1)
Furnish reflective pavement marking material having

reflective values not less than those listed in the table
below. Reflective values are measured under Federal
Specifications L-S-300C. The reflective values must be
measured on a 2 by 2- foot (.6 m by .75 m) panel at 85
incidence and be expressed as average candlepower per
Section 02581
Page 3of 13

foot (meter)-candle per 5 square feet (1.5 m 2) of material.

Divergence Angle
0.2 Degrees
0.5 Degrees
2.2
White
0.20
0.15
Yellow
0.15
0.10
WATERBORNE PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT

A.
Waterborne Pavement Marking Paint

1.
Furnish acrylic latex white and lead-free yellow waterborne pavement

marking paint meeting the following requirements.
a.
Composition - The exact composition is at the manufacturers

discretion except that the vehicle is to be 100% acrylic polymer
and the paint is not to contain any ingredient listed below.
1)
Lead or chromate compounds; Mercury; Lead; Chromate

compounds; Chlorinated Solvents; Hydrolysable chlorine
derivatives; Ethylene based glycol ethers and their acetates.
2)
Meet the following requirements:

White
Yellow
Pigment, % solids
ASTM D-3723
68 max
68 max
Total Solids, % by weight

ASTM D-2369
75 min
75 min
Titanium Dioxide, lbs./gal.

ASTM D-4563 & D-1394
1 lb. min.
0.15 lb. min
% Non-volatile vehicle of
total vehicle weight
ASTM D-2697
41 min.
41 min.
VOC content, maximum

EPA Method 24
150 g/L
150 g/L
pH, min.
ASTM E-70
9.6
9.6
Section 02581
Page 4of 13

White
Yellow
Viscosity (Krebs Stormer),

K.U., ASTM D-562 @
77F, (25C)
80-95
80-95
Grind, Hegman, min.

ASTM D-1210
Deviation in percent
weight per gallon, max.
(from manufacturer
specified weight)
.30
.30
Daylight1
Reflectance, min.
ASTM D-2805
85
59.12
Contrast Ratio, 15 mils

wet min., ASTM D-2805
0.92
0.88
The Y-Tristimulus value (luminance is obtained using a

standardized Tristimulus colorimeter using a C illuminant at a twodegree observation angle. The paint sample is drawn to a 15 mil
wet film thickness over a white substrate. The department uses a
Hunter Lab Miniscan XE Colorimeter and Leneta Corporation
Form 5C opacity charts to determine this value.
Color to match the V+ color on the Hale color chart 6%.
ASTM TEST
WHITE AND YELLOW
D 7121 mod.1
Dry Time, 15 mil wet film, 65% RH, minutes, max. 10
D1640 mod.2
Dry through @ 90% RH, 15 mil wet film, minutes, max.

130
ASTM TEST
WHITE AND YELLOW
D 22433
Freeze-Thaw, White and Yellow ................................... Pass
D 2486
Scrub Resistance, cycles min ...........................................600
D-969
Bleeding Ratio, min .........................................................0.95
Section 02581
Page 5of 13

1
Use a wet film thickness of 15 plus or minus 1 mil.

Immediately place in a humidity chamber controlled at 65
3% relative humidity and 72.5 F 2.5 F (22.5C
1.4C) with minimal airflow.
2
Apply a 15 1 mil thick film to a non-absorbent substrate

and place in a humidity chamber controlled at 855% R.H.
and 72.5F 2.5F (22.5C 1.4C). Determine dry
through time under ASTM D 1640 exerting the minimum
pressure needed to maintain contact with the thumb and
film.
3
See B(7), Freeze-Thaw Stability.
3)
b.
Titanium. Use Titanium Dioxide meeting ASTM D-476,

Type I or II.
Characteristics
1)
Flexibility and Adhesion. Apply 15 mil wet film thickness

to a 3" by 5" (75 mm by 130 mm) tin panel. Dry at 77F
(25C) for 24 hours followed by two hours at 122F
(50C). Bend sample over a -inch (13 mm) mandrel.
Paint to adhere firmly without showing cracking or flaking.
2)
Water Resistance. Apply 15 mil wet film thickness to a 4"

by 8" (102 mm by 203 mm) glass plate. Dry at 77F
(25C) for 72 hours. Immerse in distilled water at 77F
(25C) for 24 hours. Air dry for two hours on a flat
surface. Paint to not show blistering or adhesion loss.
3)
Skinning and Lumps. Fill a pint (0.473 L) container 3/4

full of paint and seal tightly. After 72 hours, strain paint
through a 100 mesh screen. No lumps or skin retained on
the screen is permissible.
4)
Settling. Fill a centrifuge tube with paint and revolve for

two hours at 1112 Newtons (250 ft/lbs). Separation from
top of vehicle to top of pigment not to exceed 13 mm (inch).
5)
Skinning. Fill pint (0.236 L) container half full of paint

and seal. Let stand for 24 hours. No skinning to be visible.
6)
Bleeding. When tested under ASTM D-969, paint to not

show perceptible bleeding when painted on a bituminous
surface.
Section 02581
Page 6of 13

7)
Freeze-Thaw Stability. When tested under ASTM D-2243,

paint to not show coagulation or viscosity change
exceeding 10 Krebs units.
8)
Static Heat Stability. Pour paint into a pint (473 mL)

within 0.25 inches (6.4 mm) of the top, put the lid on and
seal with tape, and place the container in an oven heated to
60C 1C (140F2F) for seven days. Equilibrate the
paint at standard conditions and thoroughly mix by stirring
for at least five minutes. Ensure the paint does not show
signs of livering, hard settling, coagulation, lumps or
course particles. Perform a consistency test meeting
ASTM D-562 at 25C (77F). Paint viscosity to not vary
10 K.U. from the original viscosity measured at 25C
(77F).
c.
Packaging and Marking. Meet subsection 714.04.9 requirements.
d.
Sampling and Acceptance. Draw three samples meeting

subsection 714.04.8 requirements.
e.
Retro-reflective Glass Beads. Use silene-coated moisture resistant

glass beads meeting subsection 714.05 requirements.
f.
Application. Follow the manufacturers requirements for

pavement cleaning and traffic paint application or as follows,
whichever is more restrictive.
1)
Apply to a dry surface.
2)
Clean the pavement of all loose rock, dirt, and debris

immediately before applying the traffic paint.
3)
Do not heat the traffic paint to exceed 110F (43.3C)

before and during application.
4)
Apply the traffic paint when the ambient temperature is

50F (10C) and rising. Stop application when the
temperature is 50F (10C) and dropping and when rain or
other weather adverse to the traffic paint during its drying
time is imminent.
5)
Apply traffic paint at 15 mils (0.38 mm) wet thickness in a

single application meeting subsection 620.03.3(A).
Section 02581
Page 7of 13

g.
6)
Remove and replace all defective pavement marking

damaged by weather at contractor expense.
7)
Re-paint, at contractor expense, all striping represented by

paint samples where any specified property is outside 20%
of the specified value.
Reflective Glass Beads

1)
Glass beads for use in reflectorizing traffic paint markings

on pavement by the drop-on method must be spherical and
transparent with smooth, lustrous surfaces. The beads, as
delivered, must be spherical and transparent with smooth,
lustrous surfaces. The beads, as delivered, must be free
from extraneous material and clumps of beads that cannot
be broken up easily when applying to the stripe.
2)
Imperfections - The glass beads cannot include more than

25% irregularly shaped particles when tested under ASTM
D1155. Assure the beads are free from scratches, pits,
milkiness, dark particles, and excessive air bubbles.
3)
Color - The glass beads must be colorless to the extent that

they do not impart a noticeable daytime hue to white
pavement markings.
4)
Chemical Stability - The beads must withstand refluxing in

distilled water in a Soxhlet extractor for 90 hours without
noticeable dulling of surface luster and not more than 2.5%
loss in weight.
5)
Index of Refraction - The glass from which the beads are

made must have an index of refraction of at least 1.50 by
the immersion method using tungsten light.
6)
Gradation - Assure the glass beads meet the following

gradation requirements when tested under the Standard
Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Glass Spheres,
ASTM D1214.
Section 02581
Page 8of 13

Sieve No.
20
30
50
100
PART 3:
3.1
Total Percent Passing

100%
75-95%
15-35%
0-5%
7)
Packaging and Marking - Furnish glass beads in bags

containing 50 lb. (26 kg) net. Assure the shipping bags are
moisture proof, paper-lined burlap bags meeting
specification ICC-36-C under Interstate Commerce
Commission Regulation Section 78-234. Mark each bag
with the name of contents, manufacturer of beads, and net
weight.
8)
Certification - Submit certification from a testing

laboratory approved by the Engineer certifying the beads
meet these expectations.
EXECUTION
APPLICATION OF PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL

A.
Apply plastic pavement marking materials only to clean, dry surfaces free of
paint, dirt, and foreign matter. On newly constructed surfaces to which a sealer
has been applied, clean the surface receiving the plastic pavement marking to
neutralize any acid and remove the sealer.
B.
Apply following the manufacturers recommended procedures. Apply plastic

pavement marking materials only to surfaces at temperatures within the range
specified by the manufacturer for optimum adhesion.
C.
When activators are required for the adhesive or when various special coatings are
required for different pavement surfaces, supply such information to the Engineer,
indicating special application procedures.
D.
Assure the width and layout of stripes or the area of application of plastic
pavement markings and legends meet the dimensions shown in the contract
documents or standard drawings.
E.
Before applying the plastic striping material, the Engineer will establish control
points on the roadway for striping alignment. The Engineer will establish control
points every 100 feet (30 meters) on tangent, at least every 100 feet (30 meters)
on curves of 2 degrees or less, and at 50-foot (15 meters) intervals for curves over
2 degrees. The Engineer will also designate other pavement striping locations
such as stop bars, crosswalks, and the like. Maintain all lines within 2" (50 mm)
of established lines shown on the drawings.
Section 02581
Page 9of 13

F.
3.2
Place asphaltic surfacing on the roadway just before final compaction and roll into
the new surface during final completion. Assure pavement markings or legends
are flush with the finished surface.
PAINT TRAFFIC LINES

A.
Clean the surface to be painted for dirt, rocks, gravel and any other foreign matter.
Apply the paint by hand or mechanical means consistent with the scope of the job.
Assure the width and layout of stripes or the area to be painted meets the plans or
standard drawings.
B.
Paint the top and traffic side of curbs at those locations where parking is to be
restricted, as shown in the contract documents or in the pavement marking
manual. Paint the top and traffic sides of all island curbs, median curb, and other
specified curb. Paint by uniformly applying one (1) coat of yellow traffic line
paint meeting the requirements of Section 02581.2.2.A.1 as applicable. Paint the
curb after it has cured at least 30 days after being cast. Apply the paint at a rate
that the curb surface is completely covered and hidden. Assure surfaces to be
painted are clean and free of all foreign matter before painting.
C.
Before applying paint, mark the roadway or between control points established by
the Engineer. The Engineer will establish such control points on tangent every
100 feet (30 meters) and on curves at least every 100 feet (30 meters) for under 2degree curves and at 50 foot (15 meters) intervals on curves over 2-degree
curvature or as shown on the drawings. Maintain the line within 2" (50 mm) of
the established lines. The Engineer will also designate other pavement striping
locations such as stop bars, crosswalks, and the like.
D.
Apply traffic striping during daylight hours when the air and pavement
temperatures are 40F (4C) or higher, the pavement surface is dry and the
weather is not foggy, rainy, or stormy.
E.
Apply paint and glass beads with equipment manufactured specifically for that
purpose and using workmen experienced in operating such equipment. Locate the
bead applicator directly behind and synchronized with the paint applicator. Assure
both devices are shielded to avoid spraying of paint or loss of beads outside of the
designated width of line. Assure the equipment is also capable of painting a stripe
or stripes of the specified width with a tolerance of plus or minus inch (6.25
mm). In no passing zones, the machine must be able to paint three (3) stripes
simultaneously. For centerline painting, assure the machine is equipped with an
automatic skip control giving the specified broken-line pattern within a tolerance
of 6" (150 mm) over each cycle.
F.
Use hand-operated equipment to stripe stop bars, crosswalks, and other areas not
readily accessible to the pavement striping machine.
G.
Apply the pavement striping paint at the following rates per gallon (liter):
Section 02581
Page 10of 13

1.
Four-inch stripe (100 mm) - at least 250 but not more than 275 linear feet
(meters) per gallon (liter).
2.
Four-inch (100 mm) dashed stripe (9 foot [2.8 meter] stripe-15 foot [4.6
meter] gap) - at least 665 but not more than 735 linear feet (meters) per
gallon (liter).
3.
Four-inch (100 mm) dashed stripe (10 foot [3 meter] - 30 foot [9 meter]
gap) at least 1000 but not more than 1100 linear feet (meters) per gallon
(liter).
H.
Apply beads at the rate of 6 pounds (kg) per gallon (liter) of paint, plus or minus
0.1 pound.
I.
For quality control, the Engineer will check the application at the beginning of
each days paint striping and as often as considered necessary. If equipment
settings fail to produce quality striping within the limits specified, stop striping
work until corrected.
J.
Protect all markings until dry by placing approved guarding or warning devices as
necessary. Correct all markings smeared or otherwise damaged at no expense to
the owner.
K.
When plastic pavement markings are specified, use paint for the interim markings
of the specified color and apply as specified in the contract documents. The final
application must be plastic.
L.
Apply two (2) full applications of the specified centerline and shoulder line
striping on open graded friction course and seal coat pavement surfaces meeting
the following table. Apply the second application a minimum of 30 days after the
first application.
Section 02581
Page 11of 13

PAVEMENT STRIPING - OGFC AND SEAL COATED SURFACES

Pavement Surface Type
2 lane
OGFC and
Seal Coated
Surfaces
Number of
Striping Application - Direction of Travel
Applications*
First Application
Second Application
2
Not specified
Apply in opposite
direction of first
application
Apply in same
direction as traffic
flow.
Apply in same
direction as traffic
flow.
2-way
4-way
* All transverse lines must receive two (2) applications applied in opposite directions.
3.3
REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A.
As shown in the contract documents or directed by the Engineer, remove

temporary pavement markings or markings that are no longer appropriate to the
roadway.
B.
Approved methods of removing markings include sand blasting with air or water;
high pressure water; steam or superheated water; mechanical grinders, sanders,
scrapers, brushes, burning, and the like.
C.
Choose, subject to Engineer approval, the removal method best suited to the
existing condition of the paint and pavement surface.
D.
No other methods of removal other than those specified here will be allowed. The
contractor may make written request to the Engineer for approval to use other
methods, materials, or equipment. The Engineer may subsequently disapprove
any prior approved method should it prove detrimental to the pavement surface or
inadequate in removing the markings.
E.
Remove sand or other material deposited on the pavement resulting from

removing traffic markings as the work progresses. If the striping removal results
in light or discolored lines on the roadway, cover the areas with a thin asphalt fog
coat. Repair all damage to the pavement or surfacing caused by pavement
marking removal at no cost to the owner.
Section 02581
Page 12of 13

PART 4:
4.1
MEASUREMENT
A.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
1.
4.2
Painted traffic lines, words, shapes, and symbols will not be measured
separately. The bid amount is reflective of all work shown in the contract
documents.
PAYMENT
A.
measurement as reflected in the bid schedule. Painted traffic lines, words, and
symbols will be paid for as a lump sum. Payment will be full compensation for all
labor, equipment, materials, tests, investigations, and incidentals necessary to
acceptably place pavement markings.
END OF SECTION
Section 02581
Page 13of 13

SECTION 02725
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
Furnish and install all drainage culverts and other appurtenant structures as
specified in the Contract and this section. Pipe strength classifications are
specified on the plans, listed in the Contract Documents or herein.
CERTIFICATION BY MANUFACTURER
A.
1.3
GENERAL
Furnish a manufacturers certification on all pipe, certifying that the pipe and
fittings meet the contract requirements.
REFERENCES
AASHTO M36
AASHTO M218
AASHTO M245
AASHTO M274
AASHTO M294
ASTM D361
ASTM C76
ASTM C443
ASTM C506
ASTM C507
ASTM C655
ASTM C665
ASTM A761
ASTM C789
ASTM C850
PART 2:
2.1
Corrugated Galvanized Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches

Galvanized Steel Coil
Pre-Coated Galvanized, Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe
Arches
Type II Aluminized Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
Low Head Pressure RCP
Reinforced Concrete Pipe
O-ring Rubber Gaskets
RCP Arch Pipe
RCP Elliptical Pipe
RCP Tongue & Groove Pipe
RCP D-Load Pipe
Corrugated Steel Structural Plate
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
Furnish all culvert piping as specified in the Contract Documents and meeting the
materials and testing requirements of this Section. Furnish the pipe sizes and
strength classifications shown in the Contract documents.
B.
References to ASTM, ANSI or AASHTO designation, means the latest revision at

the time of call for bids.
Section 02725
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 1of 5

2.2
C.
Assure all pipe is clearly marked with type, class and/or thickness as applicable.
Assure lettering is legible and permanent under normal handling and storage
conditions.
D.
Furnish the joint type, class, thickness designation, casting, lining, marking,
testing, etc. as specified.
E.
Culverts: Culverts shall be defined as open ended pipes in inlet our outlet control.
If plastic pipe is used in Culvert applications, concrete headwalls or prefabricated
metal end sections shall be used to protect the pipe ends from Ultraviolet
Radiation. All culverts larger than 15-inch diameter shall have end treatments
conforming to the embankment side slopes such as flared end terminal sections
(FETS) or road approach culvert end treatments (RACET). The engineer shall
determine if cut-off walls and edge protection are necessary to protect the
installation from erosion.
PIPE MATERIALS
A.
Corrugated Metal Pipe

1.
2.3
Furnish corrugated metal pipe meeting ASTM A 760(AASHTO M36).

Connections must be made with minimum coupling band width of 101/2. When specified by the Engineer, materials shall meet the following
standards:
ASTM A760 (AASHTO M36)
Specifications for Corrugated Steel

Pipe, Metallic-coated for Sewers and
Drains
Specifications for Corrugated steel

Pipe, Polymer Pre-coated for Sewers
and Drains
Specifications for Steel Sheet,

Metallic Coated and Polymer Precoated for Corrugated Steel Pipe
Specifications for Steel Sheet

Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip
Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe
(Aluminized Type II)
BEDDING MATERIAL
A.
Crushed Aggregate
Section 02725
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 2of 5

1.
PART 3:
3.1
Furnish material meeting the specifications shown in the gradation table in

Section 02235 for 1 minus crushed aggregate material.
EXECUTION
PIPE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Excavation and Backfill

1.
Excavate and backfill culverts in accordance with manufacturers

specifications, as shown on the plans, and in Standard Drawings No.
02725-1 and 02725-2 (MDT).
2.
Bedding material and backfill around and over culverts shall be compacted
to 95% of maximum laboratory dry-density, ASTM D690 for all culverts
installed in roadway embankments, unless specified otherwise by
Engineer.
Responsibility for Materials

1.
Be responsible for all material furnished. Replace all material found

defective in manufacture or damaged in handling after delivery by the
manufacturer. This includes furnishing all material and labor required for
the replacement of installed material discovered defective before final
acceptance of the work or during the guarantee period.
2.
Be responsible for the safe storage of material for the work until it has
been incorporated in the completed project.
Handling of Pipe
1.
Deliver and distribute all Contractor furnished pipe. Load and unload
pipe, fittings and accessories by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to
avoid shock or damage. Do not drop the materials. Do not skid or roll
pipe handled on skidways against pipe already on the ground.
2.
In distributing the material at the work site, unload each piece opposite or
near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. Keep the pipe interior
and other accessories free from dirt and foreign matter at all times.
3.
Handle pipe to prevent coating or lining damage. Repair or replace all

coating or lining damage in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
Laying Pipe.
1.
Lay and maintain all pipe to the specified liens and grades with fittings, at
Section 02725
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 3of 5

the specified locations.
E.
2.
Use tools and equipment meeting Engineer approval for the safe and
convenient prosecution of the work. Carefully lower all pipe and fittings
into the trench preventing damage to pipe materials and protective
coatings and linings. Do not dump or drop materials into the trench.
3.
Exercise care to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe as it is

installed. When pipe laying is not in progress, close the open ends of pipe
using a plug or other means approved by the Engineer. Remove and clean
all sand, gravel, concrete and cement grout that has entered the lines
during construction.
Tolerances
1.
3.2
3.3
Install pipe within inch of the specified alignment and within 1/4-inch
of the specified grade for pipe 15-inch in diameter and smaller and 1/3inch of specified grade for pipe larger than 15-inch diameter. These
tolerances apply to any point along the entire pipe length.
INLETS AND CATCH BASINS

A.
Construct inlets and catch basins as shown on the plans for the type specified.
B.
Construct inlet structures to the line, cross-section and dimensions specified.

Furnish concrete and reinforcing steel meeting Section 03310: STRUCTURAL
CONCRETE and Section 03210: REINFORCING STEEL. Inlet structures may
be precast or cast-in-place.
TESTS
A.
Visual Inspection
1.
B.
Inspect culverts for line, grade and roundness. Repair or replace culverts
that are out of round, excessively deflected, or not installed to line and
grade requirements.
Joints
1.
All joints shall be silt tight joints to prevent infiltration and exfiltration of
soil and water.
Section 02725
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 4of 5

PART 4:
4.1
MEASUREMENT
A.
PIPE CULVERTS
1.
4.2
Measure pipe culverts by the linear foot along the invert. The finished
culvert quantity will be as measured in the field, installed, and accepted.
PAYMENT
A.
to acceptably construct culverts as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Section 02725
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 5of 5
SECTION 02810
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
Description
A. This work shall consist of designing, furnishing and installation of the subterranean
drip irrigation system and the quick coupler valve system as directed in the plans and
these specifications.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. A design of a commercial-grade system that complies with the Contract documents and
meets City of Missoula Parks and Recreation standards.
B. Material List: Before any irrigation system materials are delivered to the job site, submit
to the Engineer a complete list of all irrigation system materials proposed to be
furnished and installed.
C. Show manufacturer's name and catalog number for each item, furnish complete catalog
cuts and technical data, and furnish the manufacturer's recommendations as to method
of installation. All special features specified in the drawings shall be identified and
marked on the submittals. Where materials proposed differ from those specified,
furnish complete shop drawings and design calculations to demonstrate equivalent
performance of the proposed installation.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified irrigation installer whose work has been in at
least 12 commercial or institutional irrigation systems.
1.
Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of
this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of
materials being installed and material manufacturer's recommended methods of
installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section.
B. Codes and Standards: Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with
the requirements of this section of these Specifications, the more stringent provisions
shall govern.
1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the
latest rules of the National Electrical Code for all electrical work and materials.
2. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water and authorities having
jurisdiction for preventing backflow and back siphonage.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Section 02810
PAGE 1 of 12
A.Protection: Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before,
during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and
replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner's Representative and at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Investigate and determine available water supply pressure and flow characteristics
to ensure proper operation of system as designed.
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: The entire irrigation and water system shall be guaranteed by the
contractor to give satisfactory service for a period of one year from date of acceptance
by the Owner.
1. Should any defect develop within the time specified above due to inferior or faulty
materials or workmanship, the defect shall be corrected at no expense of the
Owner.
2. Any and all damages resulting from faulty materials or workmanship shall be
repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner, at no cost to the Owner.
B. Warranty Period Services: The Contractor shall winterize the system and perform spring
start-up of the system during the guarantee period. These functions shall be coordinated
in advance with the Owner, and the Owner's personnel shall be encouraged to
participate.
1. Upon re-energizing the system, the Contractor shall repair any leaks or breaks
and shall check each head and emitter, making any adjustment necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE
A. Plastic Pipe: Provide s c h e d u l e 4 0 PVC.
a. The material used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be domestically produced
rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound, Type I Grade I, with a Cell
Classification of 12454 as defined in ASTM D1784, trade name designation H707
PVC. This compound shall be white or gray in color as specified, and shall be
approved by NSF International for use with potable water.
b. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes,
foreign materials, blisters, deleterious, wrinkles, and dents.
c. All pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the following
information: Manufacturer's name or trademark, size, schedule and type of pipe,
Section 02810
PAGE 2 of 12
working pressure at 73 degrees F. and National Sanitation Foundation (N.S.F.)

approval.
B. Plastic Pipe Fittings: Provide molded plastic pipe fittings manufactured of the same
material as the pipe and shall be suitable for solvent weld, slip joint ring-tile seal or
screwed connections.
a. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedules 40 and 80.
b. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80.
c. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and
tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends.
d. Size slip fitting socket taper so that a dry unsoftened pipe end can be inserted no
more than halfway into the socket. Plastic saddle and flange fittings will not be
permitted. Only schedule 80 pipe may be threaded.
e. When connection is plastic to metal, plastic male adaptors shall be used. The male
adaptor shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench.
f. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick
unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
g. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Pipe Sleeves: Pipe Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC.
2.2
PIPE JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to
ASTM F 656.
B. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
VALVES
A. Bronze Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Legend;
T-1001 or approved equal meeting the following requirements:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110.
2. SWP Rating: 150 psig.
3. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
4. Body Design: Two piece.
5. Body Material: Bronze.
6. Ends: Threaded or solder joint if indicated.
7. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
8. Stem: Bronze.
9. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
10. Port: Full.
B.
Quick Coupler Valves: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly;

Section 02810
PAGE 3 of 12
removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, purple colored, rubber-covered

cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 1 -11.5 NH threads for garden hose on outlet;
and operating key. Provide 2 operating keys to the Owner at the completion of the
project.
C.
Air Release Valve: Combination air and vacuum release valve incorporated into one
single pastic valve body with an operating pressure of 1.5 to 145 psi.
D.
Plastic, Automatic Control Valves:

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lrritrol;
700 with OMR-100 and RW60-Kit or comparable product that has a molded-plastic
body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow adjustment, and operated
by 24-V ac solenoid.
2.5
VALVE BOXES
A. General: All remote control valve, manual control valve, zone shut-off valve, gate
valves or globe valve filters and drains unless otherwise indicated, shall be installed in
valve access box of proper size as required for easy access to the valve.
B. Plastic Control-Valve Boxes: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping;
designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valve and service.
Electric control valve must be placed in square valve boxes with polyethylene sidewall and
cover materials. Lettering on the cover will be "IRRIGATION."
2.6
SPECIALTIES
A. Automatic Irrigation Controller: The automatic irrigation controller shall be 117 volt
input, 26.5 volt output, with the number of valve stations. Power will be provided by
others.
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
Rainbird; ESP-LXD or approved equal.
3. Decoder: Provide single station decoder of like brand of controller for each
electric control valve and sensor. Install per manufacturers instructions.
B. Exterior Control Enclosures: Weatherproof, with locking cover and two matching keys;
include provisions for grounding and enameled-steel, sheet metal material of a
freestanding type mounting system.
Section 02810
PAGE 4 of 12
C. Remote Control Drip Valve Kit: Drip zone control kit with a flow of .5 to 20 GPM and a
pressure range of 15 to 120 PSI. Contains a filter and a heavy duty solenoid.
D. Subterranean Drip System: Self contained system that supplies water to root zones as
depicted in the City Parks & Recreation details.
E. Mini-Weather Station: The Mini-Weather Station shall be a combination rain, wind
and freeze sensor.
The wind sensor portion of the weather station shall be capable of interrupting the power
from the irrigation controller to the valve when wind speed exceeds a set rate. The
sensor can be set to actuate at various wind speeds from a minimum of 12 miles per
hour) to a maximum of 35 miles per hour. The sensor shall also have an adjustable reset
for wind speeds of between 8 and 24 miles per hour.
The rain sensor portion of the weather station shall be capable of interrupting the power
from the irrigation controller to the valve when rainfall exceeds a pre-selected amount. The
sensor shall be adjustable, using settings on the unit to measure rainfall quantities of 1/8" to
1".The reset rate of the unit shall be adjustable by turning a plastic collar on the device
that regulates an opening, thus varying the rate of evaporation from the disks.
The freeze sensor portion of the weather station shall be capable of interrupting the
power from the irrigation controller to the valves when ambient air temperature falls
below 37 degrees Fahrenheit (3 degrees Centigrade).
The weather station shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
published instructions.
F. Decoder Control Cable: All electrical control cable shall be direct burial single
conductor insulated wires sizes 14 AWG, utilizing low density high molecular weight
polyethylene insulation, twisted, suitable for direct burial applications for operation up
to 600 volts and conductor temperatures up to 60C. UL Listed. Conductor shall be
shaft drawn bar copper meeting the requirements of ASTM B-3 or B-8. Insulation
thickness shall be 0.060". Surface shall be marked with the manufacturer's
identification.
1. All splices are to be completed within valve boxes using one-piece, jelly-filled,
waterproof wire connectors with 20 expansion coils per splice. Splicing shall be
accomplished with articles 300.5 (underground installations) and 110.14
(electrical connections).
E. Concrete: Use class 'F' Concrete for thrust blocks and protection.
F. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
irrigation system installation, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and
subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Section 02810
PAGE 5 of 12
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection: Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
1. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all
pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards,
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner's
Representative.
1. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
C. Field Measurements: Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise
fit of items in accordance with the original design.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. General: Layout the piping system in accordance with the plans.
1. Where piping is shown on the plans to be under paved areas but running parallel
and adjacent to planted areas, the intention is to install the piping in the planted
areas.
B. Line Clearance: All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 4- inches from each
other, and 6- inches from lines of other trades, except through pipe sleeves.
1. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one
another.
C. Inspection of Pipe and Fittings: Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before
installation, removing all dirt, scale, and burrs and reaming as required; install all pipe
with all markings up for visual inspection and verification.
D. Plastic Pipe: Plastic pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion
and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer.
1. All plastic joints shall be solvent-weld joints or slip seal joints. Only the solvent
cement recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be used. All plastic pipe and
fittings shall be installed as outlined and instructed by the pipe manufacturer and it
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements with the pipe
manufacturer for any field assistance that may be necessary. The Contractor shall
assume full responsibility for the correct installation.
2. All plastic to metal joints shall be made with plastic male adaptors.
3. The solvent-weld joints shall be made dry.
4. The solvent-weld joints shall be allowed to set at least 24 hours before pressure
is applied to the system on PVC pipe.
3.3
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

Section 02810
PAGE 6 of 12
A General: Perform all trenching required for the installation of items where the
trenching is not specifically described in other sections of these specifications.
1. Make all trenches in accordance with OSHA Requirements with sufficient width
to provide free working space at both sides of the trench and around the installed
item as required for gluing, joining, backfilling, and compacting while
minimizing width of trenches.
B. Depth: Trench as required to provide the elevations shown on the Plans.
1. Trench to sufficient depth to give a minimum of 18 inches of fill above the top
of the pipe measured from the adjacent finished grade under driveways and
sidewalks.
2. All mainline shall have a minimum cover of 18 inches above the pipe. All laterals
shall have a minimum cover of 12 inches above the pipe. All drip laterals shall
have a minimum cover of 8 inches above the pipe.
3. All sleeves shall be installed at a depth on line and grade with existing or
proposed irrigation lines. Sleeves with excessive or shallow invert depth will
be rejected.
C. Correction of Faulty Grades: Where trench excavation is inadvertently carried below
proper elevations, backfill with material approved by the Owner's Representative and
then compact to provide a firm and unyielding subgrade to the approval of the
Owner's Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Trench Bracing: Properly support all trenches in strict accordance with all pertinent
rules and regulations.
1. Brace, sheet, and support trench walls in such a manner that they will be safe and
that the ground alongside the excavation will not slide or settle, and that all
existing improvements of every kind will be fully protected from damage.
2. In the event of damage to such improvements, immediately make all repairs
and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner's Representative
and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Arrange all bracing, sheeting and shoring so as to not place stress on any portion of
the completed work until the general construction thereof has proceeded far enough to
provide sufficient strength.
E. Removal of Trench Bracing: Exercise care in the driving and removal of sheeting,
shoring, bracing, and timbering to prevent collapse or caving of the excavation faces
being supported.
F. Grading and Stockpiling Trenched Material: Control the stockpiling of trenched material
in a manner to prevent water running into the excavations.
1. Do not obstruct surface drainage but provide means whereby storm and waste
waters are diverted into existing gutters, other surface drains, or temporary drains.
G. Methods: All trench excavation shall be made by open cut. During excavation, material
suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner, a sufficient distance from
Section 02810
PAGE 7 of 12
the banks of the trench to avoid overloading, and to prevent slides or cave-ins. All
material not required for backfill or not suitable for backfill, shall be removed from the
site by the Contractor. Banks of trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible,
and shall be properly sheeted and braced as may be necessary to prevent caving.
1. Trench widths in paved streets or in areas where proximity to other structures
require vertical cuts, shall not be wider than is required for proper handling,
jointing and bedding of the pipe.
2. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to line and grade, and provide
uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil, at
every point along its entire length. Depressions for joints shall be dug after the
trench bottom has been graded, and shall be only of such length, depth and width as
required for properly making the particular type joint. Care shall be taken not to
excavate below the depths indicated.
3. Where rock occurs in trench excavation, the rock shall be removed to a depth of six
(6) inches below the established grade line, and to a width of twelve (12)
inches greater than the outside diameter of the pipe to be installed in the
trench.
H. Pavement Removal: Where excavation of trenches requires the removal of pavement,
the pavement shall be cut in a straight line along the edge of the excavation by use of a
spade bitted air hammer, concrete saw or similar approved equipment to obtain
straight, square and clean break; and, after backfilling and subgrade preparations are
completed, the pavement section and surfacing shall be replaced.
1. Excess material, including rock, broken concrete, bituminous materials, debris or
other materials not suitable for backfill, shall be removed from the site and
disposed of by the Contractor.
3.4
BORING
A. Locations: Boring shall be used to route pipe, wiring, or both under structures such as
walks or curbs where trenching is impractical. Sleeves shall be installed in all bored
holes.
B. Method: Boring shall be accomplished with a drill, auger, water jet, or any other
instrument approved by the Owner's Representative capable of producing a precise
hole. Boring shall not disturb overlaying structures or cause settlement and damage to
those structures.
3.5 SLEEVES
A. Locations: Install sleeves wherever routing of a pipe, wiring, or both crosses a paved
area or passes through a bored hole.
B. Methods: Sleeves laid in open trenches shall be uniformly and evenly supported
by undisturbed soil on the trench bottom. Backfill shall conform to standards
hereinafter specified.
Section 02810
PAGE 8 of 12
1. Sleeves installed in borings shall be forced through and have a snug fit throughout
the length of the bored hole. Sleeves cracked or broken shall not be accepted.
2. Installation of pipe for sleeving shall occur where pipe lines run under or through
pavements or structures and as shown on the plans. Sleeve inverts shall be laid at
the grade of the lines it will carry and sloped to drain. All permanent sleeves shall
be laid side by side in all locations unless noted otherwise. Inverts in and out shall
be permanently marked in the field and on the as built drawings.
3.6
BACKFILL
A Inspection: The trenches shall not be backfilled until inspection has been completed
and the pipe installation, including the grade, alignment and jointing has been found
to be in compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications.
B. Around and Over Pipe: Select backfill material consisting of sand, or fine gravel, free
of large lumps or rocks larger than 3/4 inch shall be used in backfilling around and
over the installed pipe.
1. The select material shall be obtained from the excavation material removed from
the trench and shall be processed by screening, sifling, or selective sorting, so as
to produce the type of backfill herein specified. The Contractor may at his option
and expense provide an acceptable imported material.
2. This backfill material shall be carefully deposited around and over the pipe in layers
not more than six inches thick, loose measurement, unless otherwise permitted by
the Owner's Representative, wetted to optimum moisture content and uniformly
compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density obtainable at optimum
moisture content as determined by ASTM 0698 (latest revision), until the pipe has
a cover depth of at least one (1) foot.
C. Remainder of Trench Backfill: The remaining depth of the trench shall be backfilled
with excavation material removed from the trench, which shall be wetted or dried to
near optimum moisture content.
1. Inclusion of a limited amount of stones and rocks will be permitted. Stones and
rocks shall in no case be larger than 1 inch, and they shall be placed so that each
piece is completely surrounded with material compacted to the density specified.
The size and amount of rocks used in backfill shall be such that they will not
interfere with proper compaction.
2. This material shall be carefully deposited in layers of a thickness suitable to the
equipment selected by the Contractor for proper compaction and compacted to at
least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 (latest
revision) under pavements and structures. The method of compaction selected by
the Contractor shall not cause damage of any nature to the installed pipe. In
planted areas compact to 85% of maximum density at optimum moisture.
3. The use of water settlement for this portion of the trench backfilling is permissible
if the specified density can be obtained and the backfill material is suitable for this
type of trench compaction.
Section 02810
PAGE 9 of 12
3.7
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A General: All fittings, valves, etc., shall be carefully placed in the trenches with
concrete thrust blocks to be placed where required, or at angle points as shown on
the plans and details.
1. Mark the underside of all valve box covers, indicating the valve controller
station number. All markings shall be made in a neat and legible manner using
white enamel paint.
2. Install subterranean drip tubing so as to sufficiently water each plants root zone in
accordance with the Citys details and standards.
3.8.
TESTING AND
INSPECTION
A. Closing-in Uninspected Work: Do not allow or cause any of the work in this section
to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by the
Owner's Representative.
B. Flushing: Before backfilling the mainline, and with all control valves in place, but before
lateral pipes are connected, completely flush and test the mainline andrepair for all leaks;
flush out each section of lateral pipe before sprinkler heads are attached.
C. Testing: Make all necessary provisions for thoroughly bleeding the line of air and debris.
1. Before testing, fill the line with water for a period of at least 24 hours.
2. After valves have been installed, test all live water lines for leaks at a pressure of
100 psi for a period of two hours, with all couplings exposed and with all pipe
sections center loaded.
3. Furnish all necessary testing equipment and personnel.
4. Correct all leaks and retest until acceptance by the Owner's
Representative.
D. Final Inspection: Thoroughly clean, adjust, and balance all systems.
1. Demonstrate the entire system to the Owner's Representative, proving that all remote
control valves are properly balanced, that all heads are properly adjusted for radius
and arc of coverage, that all emitters are functioning, and that the installed system is
workable, clean, and efficient.
3.9
PAVEMENT
REPLACEMENT
A. Pavement Replacement: Pavement replacement shall utilize the same materials
and design as the original pavement.
3.10
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Cleanup: Upon completion of the work, the entire site shall be cleared of all debris,
and ground surfaces shall be finished to smooth, uniform slopes and shall present a
neat and workmanlike appearance. Cleanup shall be considered an incidental item,
Section 02810
PAGE 10 of 12
and no additional payment shall be made for any cleanup item. All fences, culverts,
gravel driveways or other obstructions removed during construction, shall be replaced
in a condition at least equal to their existing condition.
3.11
IRRIGATION MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance: The Contractor shall, for a period of one (1) year after completion and
final acceptance of the work, maintain and repair any trench or boring settlement
which may occur, and shall make suitable repairs to any pavements, sidewalks, or
other structures which may become damaged as a result of settlement. All such
maintenance and repair shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3.12
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Drawings: Maintain as-built drawings on site at all times. Record accurately
on one set of black and white prints of the site plan all installed work including both
pressure and non-pressure lines.
1. Upon completion of each increment of work, transfer all such information and
dimensions to the print. The dimensions shall be recorded in a legible and
workmanlike manner.
2. Dimension from two permanent points of reference (buildings, monuments,
sidewalks, curbs, pavement, etc.). Locations shown on as-built drawings shall be
kept day to day as the project is being installed. All dimensions noted on drawings
shall be 1/8-inch in size (minimum).
3. Show locations and depths of the following items: Point of connection, routing of
sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along routing), isolation
valves, electric control valves, underground wire splices, quick coupling valves,
routing of control wires, sprinkler heads, drip lines and other related equipment.
B. Provide the Owner's Representative as-built drawings both electronically on a CD and
reproducible mylars. In addition, the field set must be provided to the Owner's
Representative.
C. Controller Charts: As-built drawings must be approved by Owner's Representative
before charts are prepared.
1. Provide one controller chart for each controller supplied showing the area
covered by automatic controller, of the maximum size controller door will allow.
2. The chart is to be a reduced drawing of the actual as-built system.
3. Chart shall be a black line print and different colored shading used to show
area of coverage for each station.
4. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed
between two pieces of plastic. The chart shall be mounted using velcro or
equal type of semipermanent fastening device.
5. These charts must be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of the
irrigation system by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for final
drawing of these charts including reproduction and mounting.
Section 02810
PAGE 11 of 12
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare and deliver to the Owner's

Representative within ten calendar days prior to completion of construction, all
required and necessary descriptive material in complete detail and sufficient quantity,
properly prepared in two individually bound copies of the operations and
maintenance manual. The manual shall describe the material installed and shall be
in sufficient detail to permit operating personnel to understand, operate and maintain
all equipment. Spare parts lists and related manufacturer information shall be
included for each equipment item installed. Each complete, bound manual shall
include the following information.
1. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, duration of
guarantee period, list of equipment with names and addresses of local
manufacturer representatives.
2. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
3. System start up and shut down instructions.
4. In addition to the above maintenance manuals, provide the maintenance
personnel with instructions for system operation and show written evidence to
the Owner at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
END OF SECTION
Section 02810
PAGE 12 of 12
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
This section includes all labor, equipment, and materials for landscaping,
planting of trees and shrubs, and mulch, as shown on the plans. It includes
furnishing and placement of soil backfill mixes; soil preparation, including
ripping and rotor-tilling; furnishing plants and performing planting
operations; and fine grading of planting areas.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Materials. Before any planting materials are delivered to the job site,
submit a list of all plants and other items proposed to be installed. Include
complete data on source, size, and quality, demonstrating conformance
with the requirements of this section. Written permission is required in
advance by the Engineer and Missoula City Parks and Recreation
Department for substitution of specific items described in the plans or
these Special Provisions.
B.
Certificates. Provide all certificates required by law with shipments of

trees. Upon delivery of the trees, give all certificates to the Engineer.
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
TREES, SHRUBS AND GRASSES

A.
Provide plants and planting materials that meet or exceed the

specifications of federal, state, and county laws requiring inspection for
plant disease and insect control. Quality and size shall conform to the
current edition of the American Standards for Nursery Stock. In all cases,
botanical names take precedence over common names.
1.
Furnish required plant materials, including trees, shrubs, and

perennials of all descriptions, for the project in accordance with the
plans and specifications. All plant material must be true to name,
which shall conform to the Standardized Plant Names of American
Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, and legibly
tagged with the name and size of the material according to the
general nursery practice as recommended by the American Nursery
and Landscape Association.
2.
Provide first class representatives of normal species or varieties.

Unless otherwise specified, provide plants with average or
normally developed branch systems and vigorous root systems.
Provide plants free from scale, disfiguring sun-scald injuries,
abrasions of the bark, or other objectionable blemishes. Weak
SECTION 2900
LANDSCAPING
Page 1 of 6
plants will not be accepted. Plants must show appearance of

normal health and vigor in strict accordance with these
specifications. Provide nursery-grown stock, unless otherwise
noted. Plant materials grown under artificial climatic conditions
promoting soft succulent growth are not acceptable.
3.
2.2
B.
Product Handling (Delivery and Storage). Deliver all items to the site in
their original containers with all labels intact and legible at the time of
inspection. If necessary, designate a storage area and provide access to the
Engineer.
C.
Inspection. Provide a schedule of plant material delivery to the Engineer.

Ensure inspection of the plant material by the Engineer and the Contractor
upon delivery. The Engineer and the Contractor will agree to their
preliminary acceptance.
D.
Demonstrate the planting procedure for each size and condition of plant
for approval by the Engineer prior to planting of trees.
ORGANIC MULCH
A.
2.3
Provide 2 dia. X 8 pine peeler poles and 1-3/4 polypropylene black

webbing for staking of trees as shown on plans.
SOIL AMENDMENT
A.
2.6
Provide steel edging for plant beds where shown. Edging shall be 11 ga.
X 4 w/ steel stakes, dark green powder coated.
TREE STAKING MATERIALS

A.
2.5
Provide shredded bark organic mulch in a particle size not to exceed 2-
EDGING
A.
2.4
Provide plants scheduled for spring availability and planting with

dormant buds that have been over-wintered and exposed to
natural conditions. Failure to comply with this hardening-off
requirement shall be reason for rejection of plant material. Obtain
plant materials from a nursery within the USDA Hardening Zone
1- 4, or as approved by the Engineer.
Provide soil amendment for each planting hole. The amendment shall be
100% organic compost meeting the EPA Class A "Exceptional Quality"
compost, such as Eko compost or equal.
FERTILIZER
SECTION 2900
LANDSCAPING
Page 2 of 6
A.
2.7
TOPSOIL
A.
PART 3:
3.1
3.2
Provide an approved 10-10-10 (N-P-K) slow release fertilizer for each

planting.
The City of Missoula will be providing topsoil for the portion of the
project within the Missoula City limits. Topsoil can be obtained from the
stockpile located at 1335 Rodgers St, Missoula, MT 59802. Topsoil
obtained from this location may ONLY be used on this section of this
project and may not be used by the Contractor for any other purpose. The
contractor will be required to load and haul the topsoil from this location
to the job site.
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Provide one person to act as supervisor at all times during execution of

this portion of the work. This person shall be thoroughly familiar with the
types of materials being installed and best methods for their installation,
and shall direct all work performed under this section.
B.
Plant material for this project is subject to inspection before, during, and
after planting. Damaged plant material, containers, or loose, torn, or
broken burlaped root balls will not be approved by the Engineer and must
be removed immediately from the storage area or project.
C.
The Engineer reserves the right to require root ball washing to two percent
(2%) of materials to inspect root girdling or root bound conditions. Reject
the entire lot if 2% are unsatisfactory. Remove rejected plants immediately
from the site and replace with acceptable material. No placing or planting
is to be done until plants have been approved for quality by the Engineer.
Approval does not impair the right of further inspection and rejection of
material during the progress of work
D.
Engineer reserves the right to inspect locations of plants prior to

installation; inspect planting operations during installation; inspect work
after planting operations are complete for the purposes of establishing the
maintenance period; and conduct the final acceptance inspection. The cost
of testing materials not meeting specifications is to be borne by the
Contractor.
PLANTING
A.
Plant nursery stock immediately upon delivery to the site and approval by
the Engineer. If this is not feasible, heal-in all balled material with damp
soil and protect from the sun, wind and freezing. Regularly water all
nursery stock in containers, and place in a cool area protected from the sun
SECTION 2900
LANDSCAPING
Page 3 of 6
and drying winds. Approval of off-site storage is required by the

Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for all maintenance and watering
of trees and seeded areas until acceptance by the City.
3.3
B.
Mark tree and shrub locations on site using stakes, gypsum or similar
approved means. Secure location approval by the Engineer before plant
holes are dug and after adjustments are made. Dig pits circular in outline
with vertical sides as detailed on the drawings. After pits are dug, break
sides to open wall of pit for root penetration, and loosen bottom of pit to a
depth of 3 inches.
C.
Provide a mound of soil in the center of the hole to support the ball of the
plant. Place the plant on the mound and hold in vertical position. All
B&B plants are to be handled by the earth ball, not by the top, exercising
care not to drop or loosen the ball. Set the plant, so that after settlement, it
will stand at approximately the same depth it stood in the nursery or field.
D.
After setting the plant at proper depth, cut, loosen and remove ropes, twine
and burlap carefully from top one third without disturbing earth ball.
Score burlap around circumference of ball. Check roots for girdling or
circling roots; cut or pull to straighten. All materials used to wrap the ball
are to be removed and disposed of lawfully.
E.
Provide planting mixtures for plant pits consisting of 3 parts plant pit
backfill to one part soil amendment, thoroughly mixed. All planting mix to
be blended in batches, not mixed in the plant pits. Blend in the approved
fertilizer with the above mixture at the rates recommended by the
manufacturer. Fill around the roots with the planting mixture backfill.
Press in gently by hand to fill in air pockets while protecting the roots.
Build 3 ft diameter watering basins around trees and shrubs to drain
through rootball. Form basins with 6" high berms. Mulch basins to a 4"
depth with shredded bark mulch and thoroughly water.
F.
Prune trees to preserve the natural form and character in a manner

appropriate to the particular species requirements. In general, limit
pruning to the removal of dead, rubbing, or damaged branches, and
unwanted suckers. Under no circumstances shall any newly planted trees
be headed back as an attempt to induce additional branches.
G.
Stake deciduous trees as shown on plans.
PLANT CARE
A.
Acceptance of Work.
1.
The Contractor is responsible for care of all plant materials through

final acceptance of the work, starting with delivery of plant
materials and continuing until written final acceptance from the
Engineer. This includes watering, cultivating, spraying, and
SECTION 2900
LANDSCAPING
Page 4 of 6
pruning to keep the planted areas neat and attractive over the 2year warranty period.
B.
C.
PART 4:
4.1
2.
If plant stress is present, adjust and control watering frequency and

coverage as required to alleviate stress.
3.
If any tree settles more than 1 to 1 inches below the established

grade, plant to the proper level at no cost to the Owner.
4.
Provide a warranty period of 2 years after initial written acceptance

for all plant materials.
5.
Final acceptance of the work shall be scheduled in no case, less

than 2 years after the initial written acceptance of work.
Schedule and conduct inspections, giving the Engineer at least 48 hours

prior notice of readiness for inspection, as follows:
1.
Inspection of plant upon delivery in containers prior to planting.
2.
Inspection of plant locations, to verify compliance with the plans.
3.
Acceptance inspection after completion of planting. Schedule the

substantial completion inspection sufficiently in advance, and in
cooperation with the Engineer and City Parks and Recreation, so
that inspection may be conducted within 48 hours after completion
of planting.
4.
Final inspection at the end of the warranty maintenance period,

provided that all previous deficiencies have been corrected.
Replacements.
1.
At the final inspection, all plant material shall be in a healthy

growing condition.
2.
Should the appearance of any plant indicate weakness and

probability of dying, immediately replace the plant with a new and
healthy plant of the same type and size without additional cost to
the Owner prior to the final acceptance period.
3.
When Final Inspection is made and deficiencies noted, care and

replacement will continue, until such deficiencies are corrected, at
no cost to the Owner.
GENERAL
A. Landscaping is measured and paid for at the unit bid price for the completed
and accepted quantities according to the items listed in the bid schedule.
SECTION 2900
LANDSCAPING
Page 5 of 6
B. Payment indicated to include complete compensation for all labor, equipment,

materials, and incidentals required for the completion of the work.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 2900
LANDSCAPING
Page 6 of 6

SECTION 02910
SEEDING
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
This section includes ground surface preparation; furnishing and placing topsoil;
furnishing and applying fertilizer; and furnishing and planting seed in areas
described in the contract documents or directed by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
Submit to the Engineer applicable seed mixture certifications, fertilizer

descriptions and mulch certifications. Furnish duplicate signed copies of the
vendors statements certifying that each seed lot has been tested by a recognized
seed testing laboratory within 6 months of date of delivery. Assure the statement
includes: Name and address of laboratory, date of test, lot number for each seed
species and the test results including name, percentages of purity and of
germination, percentage of weed content for each kind of seed furnished and, for
seed mixes, the proportions of each kind of seed.
PRODUCTS
SEED
A.
Furnish seed and seed mixture, free of all prohibited noxious weed seed or any
other weed seed prohibited by state or local ordinance.
B.
Seal and label all seed containers to comply with Montana Seed Law and
Regulations or meeting U.S. Department of Agriculture and Regulations under the
Federal Seed Act, if shipped in interstate commerce.
C.
Do not use wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed in the work.
E.
Furnish the following seed mixture within the county portion of the project:
1. Dryland Turf Seed to be placed in the county portion:
25% Hard Fescue
20% Sheep Fescue
20% Fairway Crested Wheatgrass
10% Sodar Streambank Wheatgrass
5% Canada Bluegrass
Section 02910
SEEDING
Page 1of 5

*Seed at 1-2 pounds per 1,000 Sq. Ft.

2. Dryland Grass & Forbs Seed to be placed in the City portion:
Grasses:
30% Pseudoroegneria spicata (bluebunch wheat grass)
20% Poa sandbergeii (Sandbergs bluegrass)
20% Koelaria cristata (prairie junegrass)
15% Festuca idahoensis (Idaho fescue)
15% Agropyron smithii (Western wheatgrass)
Wildflowers (supplier will recommend rate):
Artemesia frigida (fringed sage)
Achillea millefolium (native white yarrow)
Gaillardia aristata (blanket flower).
*Seed to be drilled at 13 lb/acre
F.
2.2
2.3
Furnish seed in standard containers labeled with the seed name, lot number, net
weight, percentages of purity, germination, hard seed, and percentage of
maximum weed seed content for each seed species.
TOPSOIL
A.
Use topsoil preserved during construction in the County Base Schedule, from
station 1000+00 to 5011+50. If topsoil is imported, ensure that it is loose, friable,
loamy soil, free of excess acid and alkali. Assure topsoil does not contain
objectionable amounts of sod, hard lumps, gravel, sub-soil or other undesirable
material that would form a poor seedbed. Before striping topsoil, assure it has
supported the growth of healthy crops, grass or other vegetable growth.
B.
A stockpile of acceptable topsoil is available for the contractors use on this project
for the City Base Schedule, from station 5011+50 to 5049+95. The stockpile of
topsoil available to the contractor is located at the Northside Materials Storage
Yard, 1335 Rogers St. Missoula, MT 59802. Use of this material source is
optional. If the contractor elects to use another material source the topsoil used
must be fertile, friable, free draining, sandy loam that is free of subsoil, refuse,
stumps, roots, brush, weeds, rocks larger than 1 inch, or other substances
detrimental to the development of vegetative growth.
FERTILIZER
A.
Furnish standard commercial fertilizers supplied separately or in mixtures

containing the specified percentages of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid,
and water soluble potash. Apply fertilizer at the specified rate and depth meeting
the applicable State and Federal laws. Furnish fertilizer in standard containers
Section 02910
SEEDING
Page 2of 5

clearly labeled with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents. No

cyanamide compounds of hydrated lime are permitted in mixed fertilizers.
B.
2.4
PART 3:
2.
A finely-ground fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by

power sprayers; or
3.
A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower equipment.
Use soil for filling and topsoiling repair areas of equal quality to the existing
topsoil being repaired. Assure the soil is free of large stones, roots, stumps, or
other materials that interfere with sowing, compacting, and establishing turf.
Obtain approval from the Engineer before placing topsoil.
EXECUTION
Place conserved topsoil as available to a uniform depth over finished slopes, or as

specified in the contract documents.
ALLOWABLE SEEDING MONTHS

A.
3.3
A dry, free-flowing fertilizer suitable for application by a common

fertilizer spreader;
TOPSOIL
A.
3.2
1.
SOILS FOR REPAIRS

A.
3.1
Fertilizers may be supplied in one of the following forms:
Perform seeding when the temperature and moisture are favorable to germination
and plant growth. Seed preferably before June 1st and after October 1st of each
year. Seeding dates must be approved by the Engineer.
SEEDBED PREPARATION AND SOWING

A.
Clear the areas to be seeded of all debris, vegetation, and other material
determined by the Engineer to be detrimental to the preparation of a seedbed.
Once the area is cleared, disc, harrow, rake, or work the area by other suitable
methods, into a smooth, even seedbed. Assure the prepared seedbed surface is
firm enough to prevent seed loss from high winds or normal rainfall. If rolling is
required, perform rolling before seeding using a suitable roller, of a weight
appropriate to the soil conditions.
B.
Sow seed in the areas described in the contract documents at the specified
application rates.
Section 02910
SEEDING
Page 3of 5

3.4
C.
Sow seed using a force feed drill having a grass seed attachment, except of slopes
steeper than three to one or on areas too small to be seeded with a force feed drill.
In these areas, seed may be sown by power sprayers, blowers or other effective
methods. Use equipment in good working order.
D.
Seed at a depth of one-quarter inch or less and cultipack the seed.
E.
Do not sow seed in winds that prevent proper imbedment into the surface.
FERTILIZER
A.
3.5
CARE OF SEEDED AREAS

A.
Keep the seeded area moist until it has germinated and its continued growth is
assured. Prevent erosion during watering. Water is incidental to the item
Seeding.
B.
Protect all seeded areas from traffic or pedestrian use with warning barricades or
other Engineer approved methods.
C.
Maintain the seeded area, performing any required watering and mowing until the
seed is firmly established. Prevent weeds and other undesirable vegetation from
establishing in the seeded area. Mow weeds and rake and remove the clippings
from the areas.
D.
Replace any seeded areas failing to germinate which have died or been damaged
by construction activities. Replace such areas to meet the contract requirements.
A warranty period of 2 years applies to this item.
PART 4:
4.1
Spread and work fertilizer into the soil during the final seedbed preparation.
Apply fertilizer at the rate described in the contract documents.
MEASUREMENT
A.
SEEDING
1.
A.
Seeding will be measured by the finished and accepted area where turf
establishment is designated by the acre. The finished area is calculated
based on horizontal lengths and widths of actual areas seeded as measured
in the field and accepted.
TOPSOIL
1.
Placing conserved topsoil will be measured by the finished and accepted

Section 02910
SEEDING
Page 4of 5

area where placement of conserved topsoil is designated by the acre. The

finished area is calculated based on horizontal lengths and widths of actual
areas seeded as measured in the field and accepted.
2.
4.2
New topsoil will be measured by the cubic yard in the hauling vehicle.
PAYMENT
A.
for all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals necessary to acceptably
establish turf by seeding as specified in the contract documents.
END OF SECTION
Section 02910
SEEDING
Page 5of 5
SECTION 02950
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
PART 2:
2.1
GENERAL
Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to purchase and install
bicycle and pedestrian counters in the trail that will count the number of bicycle
and pedestrian users on the trail. After installation and testing, the counters and
all associated equipment and software will be submitted to Missoula Metropolitan
Planning Organization for continued operation and maintenance.
PRODUCTS
Provide trail counter equipment with the following minimum requirements:

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Weatherproof and compliant with the IP 68 weatherproof standard;

Battery operated with a minimum 5 year battery life for portable units, 1-2 year
battery life for permanent units;
Contain a clock capable of detecting and storing time in a 24 hour period
(minimally, 15 minute increments of data must be stored and retrievable by the
counting equipment);
Counter device must be capable of storing one year of data and store data on the
counter after retrieval;
Provide directional data (minimally, hourly counts should provide data by bicycle,
pedestrian, direction and totals for the site)
a.
Counter example:
North bound (11:00am 50 bicycles and 25 pedestrians) and
South bound (11:00am 40 bicycles and 20 pedestrians)
Total Count (11:00am is 90 bicycles and 45 pedestrians).

Data collected by the counter must be able to export into a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet. Counter and must be capable of connecting to a modem to
download data;
Counter must have a secondary data extraction method which allows the
utilization of standard GPRS networks to download counts from remote locations;
Counter must provide a way to download data to a retrieval device that can be
loaded to a networked personal computer.;
Detection Range of the counter should be between 4 to 6 feet and preferred up to
15 feet. Counter must include all installation equipment (including the box) to
enclose counter, screws, bands, cables, wires, etc.;
Counter specifications must not require greater than 12 inch spacing between
bicyclists and pedestrians to capture the data on the counter;
Counter must NOT have any speed restrictions on capturing data (such as only
traffic traveling greater than 20 miles per hour can be detected);
Section 02950
Page 1 of 2
L.
M.
N.
O.
PART 3:
3.1
B.
PART 4:
Verify that the counter and all associated equipment are functioning properly after
installation.
MEASUREMENT
A.
4.2
Install the trail counter per manufacturers recommendations.
TESTING
A.
4.1
Submit specifications for the trail counter, manufacturers recommended

installation instructions, construction materials, and an installation plan to the
engineer for approval prior to construction.
The contractor shall submit all associated hardware and software to the Owner
after the installation and testing is complete.
TRAIL COUNTER INSTALLATION

A.
3.3
EXECUTION
SUBMITTALS
A.
3.2
Counter must use passive infrared detection sensor technology not requiring
multiple sensors to be installed on both sides of detection location;
Infrared detector must be able to discriminate a 1 deg. C temperature differential
between subject to be counted and ambient air;
Counts must have an accuracy of +/- 5%; and
Counter must have an operating temperature range of -40 to 140 degrees F.
Counters will be measured per each counter installed and accepted.
PAYMENT
A.
to acceptably construct trail counters.
END OF SECTION
Section 02950
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 02960
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
PART 2:
2.1
2.2
2.3
GENERAL
Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to purchase and install or
modify all features associated with pedestrian signals and other electrical systems.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Furnish all electrical equipment that meets the contract and the following requirements:
NEMA;
The NEC;
The standards of the ASTM;
ANSI;
MDT; and
All state and local laws or ordinances that may apply
COMPOSITE PULL BOXES
A.
Furnish pull boxes and covers made of polymer concrete with fiberglass
reinforcement. Furnish pull boxes having continuous fiberglass cloth
reinforcement on the inside and outside perimeters. Furnish covers having a
minimum of 2 layers of fiberglass cloth reinforcement.
B.
Ensure the pull boxes and covers comply with all test provisions of the most current
ANSI/SCTE 77 for tier 15 applications. Furnish pull boxes and covers that have
been tested and certified by a nationally recognized third party independent testing
firm such as UL or Intertek Testing Services verifying that the boxes and covers
meet all test provisions of the ANSI/SCTE
C.
Furnish pull boxes that have markings showing the tier 15 rating labeled or
stenciled on the inside and outside of the box. Furnish covers that have markings
showing the tier 15 rating embossed in the top surface of the cover. Furnish covers
having pull slots rated for a minimum pull out of 3,000 pounds (1,360 kg).
D.
Furnish x 7-inch (M10 x 178 mm) lag thread hex head bolts to secure the cover
to the pull box.
PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS

Section 02960
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
Page 1 of 5
2.4
A.
Furnish tamper-proof pedestrian push buttons using a piezo type switch meeting
ADA requirements. The push button must be flush with the housing and be at least
2 inches (50 mm) in the smallest dimension. The push button housing must be
weatherproof, and electrically insulated to prevent shock under all weather
conditions. Furnish a dark olive green housing back plate to fit the pole curvature
and, when required, provide saddles to make a near fit. Furnish push button signs
shown in the contract.
B.
Accessible Pedestrian Signals (APS) (Tactile Push Buttons)

1.
Furnish APS that include the pedestrian pushbutton and housing
combination. The pushbutton must be in accordance with Subsection 703.10.
The housing must have a locator tone to indicate the location of the button.
The volume of the locator tone must be adjustable by digital means and must
automatically adjust to ambient noise level. The volume over ambient noise
level must be adjustable in increments of 5 decibels (dB). The button must
have a raised arrow, which can be adjusted to point toward the appropriate
crosswalk. The button and housing combination must also provide feedback
that a call for service has been placed. The feedback must be in the form of a
lit LED and an audible indication. The accessible signal must also provide
vibro-tactile information, in the form of the button vibrating during the
appropriate Walk signal. The pedestrian signals must operate without any
additional equipment in the signal cabinet, or additional signal conductors
from the cabinet.
2.
When voice messaging is required, provide accessible pedestrian signal
stations with custom voice messages that provide location information on a
button push, and street crossing message when the appropriate walk signal
activates. The voice messages will be in the following format:
Voice on location (VOL): Wait to cross (Street to be crossed) at

(Intersecting Street).
Walk Message: (Street name being crossed). Walk sign is on to cross

(Street name to be crossed).
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
A.
Optical Units.
1.
Furnish pedestrian signal indications which utilize LEDs in accordance with
the latest issue of the I.T.E Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indication
specification and the MUTCD. Furnish 16 x 18-inch (405 x 455 mm)
pedestrian indications that utilize LEDs for the UPRAISED HAND
symbol, the WALKING PERSON symbol and the countdown display.
Furnish indications that have the countdown display and pedestrian displays
in the same housing. Furnish indications with a countdown display that is at
least 9 inches (225 mm) in height. Furnish indications that have filled in
Section 02960
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
Page 2 of 5
2.
symbols to give the appearance of an incandescent indication. Furnish

indications that are compatible with the pedestrian signal housing.
Supply LED indications that have a guarantee to be replaced or repaired if
a signal indication fails to function as intended due to workmanship or
material defects within the first 60 months of operation. Furnish LED
indications that work with a conflict monitor utilizing NEMA-plus
functions, specifically dual indication.
B.
Signal Housing.
1.
Assemble the signal head housing sections together in a water tight
assembly. Each section must house an individual optical unit complete
with a one-piece hinged door, a mounting for the lens and other optical
system parts, watertight gaskets, and a non-corrodible door-lock.
2.
Construct the optical system so the individual components swing open for
access or removal. Ensure sections are interchangeable and constructed
so sections can be added or removed. Each section must have a round
opening in the bottom and top to receive a1-inch (38 mm) supporting
pipe frame. The housing, including the doors and end plates must be diecast aluminum, clean and smooth, free from flaws, cracks, blow holes, or
other imperfections. Hinges, pins, lens clips, and locking devices must be
non-corroding metal.
3.
Mount a terminal block inside at the back of the housing. Wire all sockets
with a white wire connected to the socket shell and a black wire to the
bottom or end terminal of the socket. Connect these wires to the terminal
block mounted in the housing.
4.
The terminal block must have studs to terminate all field wires and lamp
wires independently. Permanently identify the terminals.
5.
Use paint in accordance with Section 710. Factory-enamel signal heads
and fittings black or dark olive-green as to not require painting in the
field. Apply one coat of primer and two coats of enamel to signal heads
and other components, including the outside of visors and backplate
backs.
6.
Use the same color for like components in the same intersection.
7.
Furnish with each section of each vehicle signal head, a removable tunnel
visor (open bottom) of the appropriate size made from at least 0.050-inch
(1.3 mm) thick aluminum. Factory apply two coats of flat black enamel to
visor interiors, in accordance with this subsection.
C.
Backplates.
1.
Furnish and install back plates on all traffic signal heads to form a 5-inch
(130 mm) border around the signals. Make backplates from at least 0.058inch (1.5 mm) sheet aluminum. Factory apply 2 coats of flat black enamel
to front faces of backplates, in accordance with Subsection 703.08(B).
Furnish backplates with a 2-inch (50 mm) wide yellow strip of Type IX
Section 02960
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
Page 3 of 5
retro-reflective sheeting. Apply the sheeting around the outer edge of the
backplate.
D.
Mounting Brackets.
1.
Mount signal heads using brackets made from 1-inch (38 mm)
standard steel pipe and malleable iron or brass pipe fittings. The slip
fitter must fit over a 4-inch (103 mm) standard pipe. Provide each slipfitter with two rows of three set screws in each row to plumb the
assembly. Provide cadmium plated set screws.
2.
Provide each compartment with a terminal block with twelve
terminals, each with 2 pressure type connectors. Size each connector
to accommodate at least 5 No. 14 conductors.
3.
Provide the terminal compartment with an access opening to the terminal
block with a rain-tight cover. All slip-fitters and terminal compartments
must be made of non-frangible metal.
E.
Optically-programmed Traffic Signals.

1.
The traffic signals must be optically-programmed and visible only to a
specific area of the intersection. Meet all other contract requirements for
construction or signal heads.
2.
Use LED programmable visibility modules for optically-programmed
signals that are compatible with the signal heads.
PART 3:
EXECUTION
3.1
PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON

A.
Install the push button and sign on the crosswalk side of the pole with the
arrow pointing in the direction of the crosswalk.
B.
Use -inch (M6) coarse thread stainless steel bolts to mount pedestrian push
buttons to the side of signal poles.
3.2
ACCESSIBLE PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS

A.
Any additional hardware, control unit, signal cable or wiring required for
operation of each accessible pedestrian signal must be included as part of the
accessible pedestrian signals.
B.
At new traffic signal installations, do not activate accessible pedestrian
signals until the day of the scheduled signal turn-on. Department personnel
from the traffic engineering section must be present before activation to
program accepted sound/volume settings.
C.
At existing traffic signal installations, do not install accessible pedestrian
signals until Department personnel from the traffic engineering section are
present. Contact the Traffic Signal Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to
installation to schedule a representative from traffic engineering.
Section 02960
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
Page 4 of 5
D.
3.3
TESTING
A.
PART 4:
4.1
4.2
When voice messaging is required, submit a custom voice message detail

sheet with the electrical material submittals.
Verify that the counter and all associated equipment are functioning properly after
installation.
MEASUREMENT
A.
Composite pull boxes

1.
Composite pull boxes will be measured per each box installed and
accepted.
B.
Pedestrian Push Buttons

1.
Pedestrian push buttons will be measured per each button installed and
accepted.
C.
Pedestrian Signals
1.
Pedestrian signals will be measured per each signal installed and accepted.
PAYMENT
A.
for construction.
END OF SECTION
Section 02960
PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS
Page 5 of 5

SECTION 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
This work is furnishing and placing reinforcing steel or wire fabric meeting the
quality, type and size specified in the contract.
REFERENCED
ASTM A-615
ASTM A-705
AASHTO M 31
AASHTO M 32
AASHTO M 55
AASHTO M 54
PART 2:
2.1
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement
Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
Fabric Deformed Steel Bar or Rod Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement
PRODUCT
Furnish all new material meeting the following requirements.

A.
Bar Reinforcement
1.
Furnish deformed reinforcement steel meeting ASTM A 615, (AASHTO

M 31) or ASTM A705, Grade 40 or Grade 60.
a.
B.
Small quantities purchased from warehouses may, at the

Engineers direction, be accepted if bend tested under ASTM A615
or AASHTO M31. The test specimen must cold bend around a pin
without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Wire and Wire Mesh

1.
Furnish wire meeting cold-drawn steel wire AASHTO M32 (ASTM A82)
requirements.
2.
Furnish wire mesh for concrete reinforcement meeting AASHTO M55

(ASTMA A 185).
Section 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 1of 4

3.
PART 3:
3.1
3.3
EXECUTION
PROTECTION
A.
3.2
Furnish bar mats meeting AASHTO M54 (ASTM A 184).
Protect steel reinforcement from damage at all times. Place steel free from dirt,
detrimental scale, paint, oil and other foreign substance. Clean steel reinforcement
having easily removed rust, loose scale, and dust using an approved method.
FABRICATION
A.
Furnish four copies of shop details and placing drawings for all reinforcing steel
to the Engineer for approval. Once checked, the Engineer will return two
marked-up sets of prints or drawings for correction. The Engineers review is
only for general conformity with the plans. Checking the detailed dimensions is
the Contractors responsibility. The Engineers review does not relieve the
Contractors responsibility to furnish all material meeting the Contract
requirements. Detail Reinforcing, steel meeting the ACI Standard Details and
Detailing of Concrete Structures and the Manual of Engineering and Placing
Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures published by the American
Concrete Institute (ACI 315).
B.
Assure all bars are bent cold. Do not field bend any bar partially imbedded in
concrete except as specified on the plans.
C.
Ship bar reinforcement in standard bundles, tagged and marked meeting the
Details and Detailing of Concrete Structures (ACI 315) requirements.
D.
Concrete reinforcement and accessory details, not covered herein or on the

drawings, must meet Details and Detailing of Concrete Structures and the
Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete
Structures (ACI 315 and 315R) requirements.
PLACING AND FASTENING

A.
Accurately place and hold firm all steel reinforcement in the plan locations as
concrete is being placed.
B.
Support and fasten together all reinforcement to prevent displacement due to

construction loads. It is permissible to use on ground, where necessary, concrete
support blocks having a minimum 4 square inches (2580 MM2) bearing area and
having a compressive strength equal to the concrete being placed. Use approved
bar chairs and spacers over form work. For concrete surfaces exposed to the
weather in the finished structure, assure the portions of all accessories within
Section 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 2of 4

inch (12.7 mm) of the concrete surface are noncorrosive or protected against
corrosion.
C.
Overlap welded wire fabric for successive mats or rolls providing an overlap
measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet at least 2 inches
(50.8 mm). Extend the fabric across supporting beams and walls to within 4
inches (101.6 mm) of concrete edges. It may extend through contraction joints.
Adequately support the fabric during concrete placement to maintain its position
in the slab using the methods previously described or by laying the fabric on a
concrete layer of the required depth before placing the upper slab layer.
D.
Offset vertical bars in columns at least one bar diameter at lap splices. Furnish
templates for all column dowels.
E.
Obtain Engineer approval for all splices not shown on the plans. Mechanical
connectors for reinforcing bars may be used if approved.
F.
Do not use pebbles, pieces of broken stone, concrete rubble, broken brick or
building blocks, metal pipe, or wooden block to position the fabric.
G.
Follow the minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement below.

1.
Concrete deposited against ground: 76.2 mm (3 inches)
2.
Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground:

a.
b.
3.
#6 bars or larger
Smaller than #6 bars
50.8 mm (2 inches)
38.1 mm (1-1/2 inches)
Interior Surfaces:
a.
b.
Beams, girders and columns 38.1 mm (1-1/2 inches)

Slabs, walls and joists:
1)
2)
#11 bars or smaller

#14 and #18 bars
19.05 mm (3/4 inch)

38.1 mm (1-1/2 inches)
H.
For corrosive atmospheres or fire protection, see special provisions for minimum
covering requirements.
I.
Obtain Engineer approval of reinforcement placement before placing concrete.

Remove and replace concrete placed without Engineer approval of reinforcing.
J.
Straighten fabric reinforcement shipped in rolls into flat sheets before placing it.
Section 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 3of 4

3.4
WELDING
A.
PART 4:
4.1
When specified or approved, weld reinforcing steel meeting Reinforcing Steel

Welding Code (AWSD 1-4). Do not weld at bends in bars. Do not tack weld
crossbars without Engineer approval.
GENERAL
A.
Reinforcing steel used in the work is not measured. The cost of furnishing and
placing reinforcing steel is incidental and included in the unit price of other bid
items.
END OF SECTION
Section 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 4of 4

SECTION 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1:
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
GENERAL
Furnish structural concrete meeting all specified requirements that is composed of

Portland cement, aggregates, water. Furnish Ready-mixed concrete meeting
ASTM C94 unless otherwise specified.
REFERENCES
ASTM C-94
ASTM C-150
ASTM C-618
ASTM C-989
ASTM C-595
ASTM C-157
ASTM C-33
ASTM C-260
ASTM C-494
ASTM C-1017
ASTM D-98
ASTM C-138
Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

Specification for Portland Cement
Specification for Coal Flyash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete
Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars
Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cements
Specification for Concrete Aggregates
Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in producing
Flowing Concrete
ASTM C-172
ACI 301
ACI 305
ACI 306
Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete
Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
Standard Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings
Hot Weather Concrete
Cold Weather Concrete
ACI 318
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
ASTM C-173
ASTM C-231
ASTM C-31
ASTM C-39
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 1 of 15

1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
PART 2:
2.1
Codes and Standards: The codes and standards referred to in this section are
declared to be part of this specification as if fully set forth herein. In addition, the
following ACI Standards are incorporated in their entirety, unless specifically
required otherwise:
1.
ACI Standard 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings,

American Concrete Institute, Edition.
2.
ACI Standard 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced

Concrete, American Concrete Institute, current edition.
3.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Manual of Standard Practice.
4.
International Building Code of I.C.B.O.
Concrete Testing: The Contractor shall employ at his expense an independent

testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and/or perform the mix design
prior to placing any concrete. The Owner will perform all acceptance testing
during the onsite placement of the concrete. Retesting or additional testing of
concrete or materials failing to meet the requirements of these specifications shall
be done by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
PRODUCT
CLASSIFICATION
A.
Concrete is classified as set forth below. Place the specified class of concrete for
each structure element as specified. Concrete with prefixes C contain 1-1/2
inch (38.1 mm) size aggregate and those with M contain 3/4 inch size
aggregate. Concrete with prefixes M may be substituted for concrete with
prefixes C. Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, all concrete
shall be M-4000.
1.
Use M-4000 concrete for curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways,

approaches, curb turn fillets and valley gutters and structural concrete.
2.
Use M-3000 concrete for manholes, storm drain inlets and miscellaneous
or C-3000 Concrete Construction class.
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 2 of 15

B.
2.2
3.
M-3000 is concrete with 3/4 inch maximum aggregate and a 28-day

compressive strength of 3000 pounds per square inch (psi).
4.
M-4000 is concrete with 3/4 inch maximum aggregate and a 28-day

compressive strength of 4000 pounds per square inch (psi).
5.
C-3000 is concrete with 1-1/2 inch maximum aggregate and a 28-day

compressive strength of 3000 psi.
If concrete strength or durability requirements established by design exceed the

above strength classifications, the Engineer may specify additional concrete
classifications to meet those requirements.
COMPOSITION OF CONCRETE
A.
Upon receipt of the notice of award of the contract, furnish the Engineer with
names of suppliers and locations of sources of materials proposed for use.
1.
Materials
a.
Cementitious Material: Cementitious material consists of Portland

cement meeting ASTM C 150, with or without the addition of
cementitious or pozzolanic mineral admixtures meeting, ASTM
C618 or ASTM C989, or blended hydraulic cement meeting
ASTM C595 or ASTM 1157. Unless otherwise specified, assure
cementitious material meets ASTM C 150 Type I or Type II.
Assure cementitious material used in concrete is the same brand
and type and from the same plant of manufacture as the
cementitious material used in the concrete represented by the
submitted field test date or used in the trial mixtures.
b.
Aggregates: Assure aggregates meet ASTM C33. When a single

size or a combination of two or more sizes of coarse aggregates are
used, assure the final gradation meets the grading requirements of
ASTM C33. Obtain concrete aggregates from the same source and
use the same size ranges as the aggregates used in the concrete
represented by submitted historical data, or used in trial mixtures.
c.
Water and Ice: Use concrete mixing water and water to make ice
meeting requirements of ASTM C94.
d.
Admixtures: Use admixtures meeting the following requirements:
1)
2)
3)
Air entraining, admixtures ASTM C260

Chemical admixtures ASTM C494
Chemical admixtures for use in producing, flowing
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 3 of 15

4)
5)
2.
Change of materials
a.
B.
concrete ASTM C1017

Calcium Chloride ASTM D98
Use admixtures in the concrete that are the same as those
used in the concrete represented by submitted field test data
or in trial mixtures.
When brand, type, size, or source of cementitious materials,

aggregates, water, ice or admixtures are requested to be changed,
submit new field data or data from new trial mixtures or furnish
evidence that indicates that the change will not adversely affect the
relevant properties of the concrete for acceptance before using the
concrete.
Performance and Design Requirements

1.
Assure the cementitious material content is adequate to meet the specified

requirements for strength, water-cement ratio and finishing requirements.
For concrete used in floors, assure the cement content is at least that
indicated in Table 2.1. Acceptance of a lower cement content is
contingent upon verification that concrete mixtures with a lower cement
content will meet the specified strength requirements and will produce
concrete with equal finish quality, appearance, durability, and surface
hardness. When a history of finishing quality is not available, evaluate the
proposed mixture by placing concrete in a slab at the job using job
materials, equipment and personnel. Assure the slab is at least 8 feet (2.
m) square and has an approved thickness. Slump cannot exceed the
specified slump. Submit evaluation results for acceptance.
TABLE 2.1
MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT REQUIREMENTS
Nominal Maximum size
of aggregate, in (mm)
1-1/2 (38-1)
1 (25.4)
3/4 (19-05)
3/8 (9-5)
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 4 of 15
Minimum cement content

lb/yd3 (kg/m3)
470* (163.0)
520 (180.3)
540 (187-3)
641 (222.3)

* Minimum cement content is 520 lb/yd3 and maximum

H2O/cement ratio of 0.45 if concrete will be exposed to freezing and
thawing and/or in the presence of deicing chemicals.
2.
Furnish concrete at the point of delivery having a slump of 4 inches (max)

determined by ASTM C 143. Meet slump tolerances in ACI 117. When a
plasticizing admixture is used meeting ASTM C 10 17 or when a Type F
or G high range water reducing admixture meeting ASTM C494 is
approved to increase the concrete slump, assure the concrete has a slump
of 2 to 4 inches before the admixture is added and a maximum slump of 8
inches at the point of delivery after the admixture is added.
3.
Assure the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate does not exceed
three fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars, onefifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms or one-third of the
thickness of slabs or toppings.
4.
Concrete must be air entrained. Measure air content under ASTM C 138,
C 173 or C231. Unless otherwise specified, ASTM C231 shall be used.
TABLE 2.2
TOTAL AIR CONTENT* OF CONCRETE
FOR VARIOUS SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATE
Total air content, percent

Nominal maximum
Severe
Moderate
Mild
Size of aggregate mm, (in.)
exposure
exposure
exposure
Less Than 9.53 (3/8)
9
7
8
9.53 (3.8)
7.5
6
4.5
12.7 ()
7
5.5
4
19-05 (3/4)
6
5
3.5
25.4 (1)
6
4.5
3
12.7 (1-1/2)
5.5
4.5
3
50.8 (2)
5
3.5
1.5
76.2 (3)
4.5
3.5
1.5
152.4 (6)
4
3
1
* Measure in accordance with ASTM C 138, C 173, or C 231.
Air content tolerance is +/- 1 - 1 percent
a.
When admixtures are specified in the Contract documents for

particular parts of the work, use types specified. Use of calcium
chloride or other admixtures containing chloride ions is subject to
the limitations in Table 2.3 Chloride Ion Concentration. When
approved, use calcium chloride in solution form only, when
introduced into the mixture.
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 5 of 15

1)
Assure the maximum water soluble chloride ion

concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42
days attributed to the ingredients including water,
aggregates, cementitious materials and admixtures do not
exceed the limits of Table 2.3. Use tests to determine water
soluble chloride ion content meeting AASHTO T260. The
type of member described in Table 2.3 applies to the work
as indicated in the Contract Documents.
TABLE 2.3
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHLORIDE ION CONTENT
Type of Member
Prestressed concrete
Reinforced concrete exposed to
chloride in service
Reinforced concrete that will be dry or
protected from moisture in service
Other reinforced concrete construction
Maximum water soluble chloride (CI) Content in

concrete, percent by weight of cement
0.06
0.15
1.00
.30
b.
When the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the
period from midnight to midnight is expected to drop below 40F
(40C) for more than three successive days, deliver concrete in
accordance with ASTM C-94.
c.
Furnish the compressive strength and the water-cement or water

cementitious, material ratio of concrete for each portion of the
work as specified in the Contract documents.
1)
If cementitious or pozzolanic mineral admixtures meeting,

ASTM C618 or ASTM C989 are used, the cement portion
of the water-cement ratio must be the total weight of
cementitious material.
2)
The maximum weight of fly ash, pozzolan or ground

granulated blast-furnace slag included in the calculation of
water-cementitious material ratio cannot exceed the
following percentages of the total weight of Portland
cement plus fly ash, pozzolan and ground granulated blastfurnace slag:
3)
The combined weight of fly ash and pozzolan meeting

ASTM C618 cannot exceed limits in ACI 318. The fly ash
and pozzolan present in an ASTM Type IP or IPM blended
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 6 of 15

cement meeting ASTM C595 must be included in the

calculated percentage.
2.3
The weight of ground granulated blast-furnace slag meeting

ASTM C989 cannot exceed 50 percent of the total weight
of cementitious material. The slag used in manufacture of
a Type IS or ISM blended hydraulic cement meeting
ASTM C595 must be included in the calculated percentage.
5)
If fly ash or pozzolan is used in concrete with ground

granulated blast-furnace slag, the Portland cement
constituent meeting ASTM C 150 cannot be less than 50
percent of the total weight of cementitious material. Fly
ash or pozzolan must not constitute more than 25 percent of
the total weight of cementitious material.
6)
Strength requirements are based on the 28-day compressive

strength determined on 6" x 12" (150mm x 300mm)
cylindrical specimens made and tested under ASTM C31
and C39 respectively.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory
trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch
method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Engineer for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
B.
Submit written reports of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have
been reviewed and approved.
PART 3:
3.1
4)
EXECUTION
CONCRETE MIXES
A.
Job-Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum type batch
match mixer. For mixers of one cu. Yd., or small capacity continue mixing at
least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer,
before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu.
Yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 2.5 minutes for each
additional cu. yd., or fraction thereof.
B.
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating
project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, batch
quantities, and amount of water introduced.
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 7 of 15

3.2
C.
Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein

specified.
D.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete,

a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C94 may be required.
E.
When air temperature is between 85F (30C) and 90F (32C), reduce mixing
and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is
above 90F (32C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
CONSISTENCY
A.
3.3
Assure concrete is of such consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel,
but individual particles of the coarse aggregate, when isolated, show a coating of
mortar containing its proportionate quantity of sand. The consistency of the
concrete will be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly place the
concrete in its final position and not by the difficulty in mixing or transporting.
Use the minimum quantity of mixing water necessary to provide workability
within the ranges of slump specified.
MIXING
A.
Thoroughly mix concrete to assure a uniform distribution of the materials

throughout the mass. Mix concrete only in quantities required for immediate use
and place it within the time limits specified. Waste all concrete which initial set
has begun. Retempering of concrete is prohibited. Aggregates, or bags of cement
containing lumps or crusts of hardened material shall not be used. Mix Concrete
in an approved truck mixer meeting the requirements of ASTM C94 herein.
B.
The capacity of the plant and the transportation equipment must ensure delivery at
a rate that will permit proper handling, placement and finishing at the point of
delivery. Maintain the concrete delivery rate to provide for the continuous
operation of placing, handling and finishing concrete as is practical. Maintain the
interval between delivery of loads so that layers or lifts of concrete in place do not
harden before succeeding layers or lifts are placed. In general, no lift or layer of
concrete can remain exposed for more than 20 minutes before being covered by
fresh concrete.
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 8 of 15

3.4
C.
The volume of mixed concrete in the mixing drum shall not exceed the
manufacturers rating, on the capacity plate.
D.
During freezing weather, other approved methods of measuring water will be

permitted.
E.
A recording water metering device is always required at the primary point of the
batching operation.
F.
Do not add water to concrete in transit. Water may be introduced into the mixer
at the job site under direction of the Engineer, if the specified water-cement ratio
is not exceeded. Water must be added in accordance with ASTM C94. Assure
the drum revolves continuously after the introduction of the cement and water
until the concrete is discharged.
G.
Begin mixing immediately after introduction of the cement and water and
continue for at least 70 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed. This minimum
revolution count will be waived when the concrete is produced at a central mixing
plant. Not more than 100 drum revolutions can exceed 6 revolutions per minute.
All other revolutions must be at agitating speed of not less than 2 or more than 6
revolutions per minute.
H.
Discharge the concrete at the job and place in its final position within 1 - hours
after the introduction of the mixing water and cement. When the air temperature
is 90F (30C) or above, place the concrete in its final position within 1 hour after
the introduction of the mixing, water and cement. Concrete mixes with an
approved set retarding admixture may be held an additional hour beyond limits
specified above.
I.
No mixed or agitated concrete that has remained in the drum of the truck mixer
more than 10 minutes without agitation can be used. If the Engineer determines
the concrete has not suffered any detrimental effects. It may be used, after
remixing for a minimum of 20 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed, if it can
still be placed in the forms within the specified time limits.
J.
Provide a revolution counter on each truck that registers the number of

revolutions of the drum.
K.
Mount the counter so it can be easily read by both the operator and the Engineer.
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Thoroughly compact concrete into its final position. Assure it is thoroughly

consolidated around fittings and embedded items. Assure all reinforcement and
embedded items are accurately placed as shown on the plans and are clean and
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 9 of 15

free from coatings of dried mortar, detrimental rust, scale, oil or foreign matter.
Place concrete meeting the applicable requirements of Sections 02528 and 02529.
3.5
CURING CONCRETE
A.
Thoroughly cure concrete surfaces subject to premature drying by covering as

soon as possible with canvas, plastic sheets with sealed joints, burlap and sand or
other satisfactory materials and keep concrete moist. If the concrete surfaces are
not covered, keep them moist by flushing or sprinkling. Continue curing for at
least 7 days after placing the concrete. Concrete surfaces placed against forms
may be cured by leaving the forms in place for at least 7 days, when approved.
B.
Protect concrete against freezing or other conditions detrimental to strength

development meeting the applicable requirements of this specification.
C.
To aid finishing, side forms on ornamental work, curbs and sidewalks, railing and
parapets may be removed after 12 hours, not to exceed 48 hours, depending on
weather conditions. Continue moist curing during the concrete finishing
operation.
D.
Untreated forms and existing concrete must be kept continuously wet for at least 1
hour before any concrete is placed. Keep wet until covered with concrete except
that adequately treated forms must be thoroughly washed with a water spray
immediately before placing the concrete.
E.
The curing of concrete, by either water curing or membrane curing, must be as

follows unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1.
Water Curing
a.
Keep all concrete top surfaces continuously moist after finishing,

with a fine water spray, until the concrete has set. Cover the moist
concrete with water or an approved curing covering.
b.
Cure concrete deck slabs and concrete floors for at least 7 days.
Cure by placing burlap, cotton mats or other absorptive material as
close behind the finishing operation as possible without marring
the finished surface. Keep the absorptive material continuously
moist for the full time it is used. The absorptive material may be
kept in place for the entire curing period or it may be removed as
soon as practical and the entire surface covered with approximately
1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) of sand, kept continuously moist for the
entire curing period.
c.
Remove forms and repair surface irregularities without interfering

Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 10 of 15

with any of the curing requirements. As soon as the vertical forms

have been removed and the surface irregularities repaired, cover
the concrete with absorptive material, kept continuously wet for
the balance of the curing a period.
2.
Impervious Membrane Curing

a.
Assure membrane curing compounds are delivered to the job in the

manufacturers original container, clearly labeled to show the
name of the manufacturer and the contents. The clear curing
compound must be sufficiently transparent and free from
permanent color that would change the color of the natural
concrete. Use clear compound containing a fugitive dye having
color sufficient to render the film visible on the concrete for at
least 4 hours after application. The concrete surface must maintain
its natural color after curing.
b.
Use a compound ready for use as shipped by the manufacturer.

Dilute following the manufacturers recommendations. Use curing
compound only with written approval. Sampling will not be
required if manufacturers certification is available. Apply the
curing compound under pressure with a spray nozzle to cover the
entire exposed surface thoroughly and completely with a uniform
film not exceeding manufacturers specifications. Maintain the
required pressure in the spray machine to force the material to
leave the nozzle in a fine mist. Keep all concrete surfaces moist
with a fine water spray or with wetted burlap until the sealing
compound is applied. Keep the curing compound application close
to the finishers of the top surface of concrete at all times. Seal the
concrete immediately after the finishing operations have been
completed, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
c.
If it is necessary to allow workers or equipment on the surface

before the 7 day curing period is completed, cover the top surface of
sealed concrete with a protective cushion for runways. Use a
cushion consisting of a moist, 1-inch (25mm) minimum thick layer
of fine sand, or layers of moist burlap that will prevent damage to
the finished concrete. Cover the approved cushion with four by
eight foot sheets of 3/4 inch (19mm) plywood laid over the cushion.
Do not place the cushion material for at least 8 hours after the final
application of the curing compound. Obtain the Engineers written
approval for any other proposed cushion material before use.
Layers of plastic, visqueen or canvas are not an acceptable cushion
material.
d.
Keep concrete, which has not completed its curing period,

continuously moist during the stripping and surface repair
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 11 of 15

operations. Remove all surface irregularities, repair all

depressions, voids or holes, including those formed by trapped air,
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Immediately apply the curing
compound before the surface has had an opportunity to dry out.
Keep concrete, from which forms have been stripped, continuously
moist until surface repair and finishing are completed and the
impervious membrane curing has been applied.
3.6
WEATHER AND NIGHT LIMITATIONS

A.
General
1.
Stop concreting operations when darkness prevents obtaining the specified

placing, and finishing work. Night operations may be conducted with
written approval and when approved artificial lighting is provided.
2.
Cold weather concreting is governed by ACI 306 unless otherwise

specified herein. Hot weather concreting methods is governed by ACI 305
unless otherwise specified herein. Except by specific written
authorization, stop concreting operations when a descending air
temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat falls below 40F
(4C), or do not resume until an ascending air temperature in the shade
and away from artificial heat reaches frozen foundation course or
subgrade.
3.
Assume all risk of placing concrete in cold weather. Placing concrete

during cold weather does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility
for obtaining the specified results. Remove and replace all concrete
injured by frost at Contractor expense.
4.
Before any concrete is placed, remove all ice, snow and frost completely
from the formwork receiving the concrete.
5.
Heating and Placing Concrete

a.
6.
When concreting is authorized during cold weather, assure

concrete temperature meets ASTM C94.
Protection of Concrete
a.
During the curing period, if the air temperature is anticipated to fall

below 32F (0C), provide an approved blanket type insulating
material along the work for covering all concrete that has been in
place for 7 days or less. If, at any time, the ambient temperature
drops to 32F (0C) or less, protect the concrete using a method
approved by the Engineer. The minimum method of protection
under such conditions is as follows: between two layers of plastic
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 12 of 15

sheeting, the insulating materials, with the exception of

commercial blankets, must be spread loosely to a minimum depth
of 6 inches (150mm), but in all cases, to the depth required to
prevent freezing of, or frost damage to, the concrete. Maintain the
blanketing material at least until the end of the regular specified
curing, period which is not less than 7 days. The Engineer may
direct leaving the blanketing material in place for an additional
period if the recorded temperatures indicate that additional curing
may be necessary. If during the construction period the mean daily
temperature is expected to fall below 40F (4C) for 3 consecutive
days, furnish approved heating enclosures and devices capable of
maintaining the surface temperature of the concrete in place
between 55F (13C) and 80F (26C). The curing, period under
these conditions is 7 days when Type I-II cement is used and 5
days when a pre-approved high early strength mix is used. At
the close of the curing period, the heat may be reduced so that the
temperature inside the housing does not decrease faster than 15
per hour until the temperature inside the housing is the same as
outside.
3.7
b.
A Contractor may, at their own expense, field cure concrete

cylinders with their in-place concrete and discontinue protection
when those field cylinders reach 70 percent of design strength as
indicated by the 28 day requirement of these specifications.
c.
Perform all concrete protection using methods consistent with

ACI-306-1-87 and approved by the Engineer.
TESTING
A.
All concrete must be tested by an ACI Grade I or equivalent certified testing

technician.
1.
Materials
a.
2.
Standard Slump Tests

a.
3.
The Engineer or their representative must have access to the ready

mix production facility for sampling constituent materials during
production to assure the materials meet these specifications and
represent those stated on the approved mix design.
A slump test will be made each time that strength specimens are
made. Slump tests are performed meeting ASTM C143 Method
of Test for the Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
Compression Tests
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 13 of 15

a.
A minimum of three specimens 6 inch (150 m) in diameter, shall

be made and tested for every concrete placement. Mold and test
one set of test cylinders for every 50 yards (76.5 cubic meters) of
concrete or fraction thereof placed each day. On a given project, if
the total volume of concrete is such that frequency of testing
required above would generate less than 5 strength tests for a given
class of concrete, make tests from at least 5 randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 batches are used. Cure
these cylinders under laboratory conditions except that additional
test cylinders cured entirely under field conditions may be required
by the Engineer to check the adequacy of curing and protection of
the concrete.
b.
Take samples for strength tests in accordance with ASTM C172,

entitled Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
c.
Mold test cylinders and laboratory-cure in accordance with ASTM

C31. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39, entitled
Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens, ASTM C39, using an independent testing laboratory,
as approved by the Engineer.
d.
Of each of the 3 cylinders take for a pour, test 1 for information

strength at 7 days and test 2 for acceptance strength at 28 days. To
meet this specification, average strength of two cylinders from the
same sample, tested at 28 days or the specified earlier age, is
required for each strength test. Strength level of an individual
class of concrete is considered satisfactory if both of the following
requirements are met:
1)
2)
The average of all sets of 3 consecutive tests equal or

exceed the specified strength.
No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) falls
below specified strength by more than 500 psi (3400 kPa).
e.
Cure field cured cylinders under field conditions meeting Section

7.4 of Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field (ASTM C31).
f.
Mold field cured test cylinders at the same time and from the same
samples as laboratory cured test cylinders. Improve procedures for
protecting and curing concrete when strength of field cured
cylinders at the test age designated for measuring specified
strength is less than 85 percent of that of companion laboratory
cured cylinders. When laboratory cured cylinder strengths are
appreciably higher than the specified strength, field cured cylinder
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 14 of 15

strengths need not exceed the specified strength by more than 500
psi even though the 85 percent criterion is met.
4.
g.
The strengths of any specimens cured on the job are to indicate the
adequacy of protection and curing of the concrete and may be used
to determine when the forms may be stripped, shoring removed or
the structure placed in service. When the strengths of the job cured
specimens are below those specified above, the Contractor must
improve the procedures for protecting and curing the concrete.
h.
When concrete fails to meet the requirements above or when tests

of field cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and
curing, the Owners representative may order tests on the hardened
concrete under Chapter 17.3 of ACI-301-84 or order load tests in
Chapter 20 of the ACI Building Code (ACI 318-83) for that
portion of the structure where the questionable concrete has been
placed. In the event the load or core tests indicate that the structure
is unsatisfactory, make all modifications as directed by the
Engineer to make the structure sound. If the load or core tests
indicate the concrete is satisfactory, all cost of testing shall be paid
by Owner.
Air Content Tests

a.
5.
Temperature
a.
PART 4:
4.1
The Engineer shall during each strength test, check the air content
by either the Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method (ASTM C231), Method of Test
for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method (ASTM C173) or Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield
and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete (ASTM C138).
Test hourly when air temperature is 40F (4C) and below, and
when 80F (27C) and above; and each time a set of compression
test specimens is made.
GENERAL
A.
Structural concrete used in the work is not measured. The cost of furnishing and
placing structural concrete is incidental and included in the unit price of other
items listed in the bid schedule.
END OF SECTION
Section 03310
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 15 of 15
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
THE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIAL PROVISIONS THAT ARE SUPPLEMENTAL TO MDT 2014
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION. WORK UNDER
THIS SECTION SPECIFICALLY REFERS TO THE RETROFIT OF BUCKHOUSE BRIDGE
AND DOES NOT APPLY TO OTHER WORK ON THE CONTRACT.
1. CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT ON EXISTING STRUCTURES (REVISED 3-19-03)
A. Description. Section 107.08 of the Standard Specifications states:
"Do not use existing bridges . . . as work platforms, work bridges, or to support or move
equipment without the Project Manager's written approval. Approval will be granted only where
load analysis and review of traffic control, safety, and convenience show it to be in the public
interest."
MDT will base approval on the submittal described below. Any load over the legal limit
or that will apply a load of 18 metric tons or more requires a submittal of this type. Construction
loads on bridges with posted load limits also require submittals.
B. Submittal. The Department lists the following requirements for a minimal submittal.
MDT will not start a review of a submittal that contains less than the following information, and it
will deny requests to use the structure as a work platform if the submittal contains less
information than listed. Provide three sets of the following to the Project Manager:
1)
Written Report. Provide a report containing a narrative summarizing the results
of an analysis of loading cases and their effects on the structure. Describe the potential to
cause problems for combinations of effects not in the analysis. Provide summaries of the
analysis technique and the factors of safety against overturning and against exceeding
operating stress levels in the structure from the limiting cases of the study. Describe special
measures necessary to protect the structure through all phases of the equipment's positioning
and use. Estimate additional costs to the Department from allowing this approach, and estimate
potential savings to the contractor. Estimate the work's duration.
2)
Engineering Analysis. Provide clearly delineated loading conditions and the work
done to support conclusions. Provide documentation sufficient to allow the Department to justify
the decision to permit the contractor to use the structure as a work platform. Investigate an
envelope within which the equipment may function without damaging the structure or
endangering workers or the public. MDT proposes the following topics as the minimum
information necessary. Providing additional information to increase the Department's
understanding of the risks involved and the extent of the analysis may decrease the
Department's response time.
a) Load Cases
(1) Investigate different loading combinations, with different configurations and turning
angles. Include the distribution of dead load and changing center-of-gravity of the equipment
with and without load at different boom extensions, rotations, and elevations. Include traffic live
load if the structure will carry traffic during equipment operations.
-1-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
(2) The factor of safety against overturning of the equipment changes with the addition
of wind loads on the load, the boom, and on the equipment itself, depending on the direction
and strength of the wind in relation to the direction of the boom and its motion. Analyze these
effects through calculations.
(3) The rate of turn of the boom generates a proportional centrifugal force in any load it
carries. Analyze the effects.
(4) Sudden braking of the load vertically or of the boom in rotation can generate impact
loads that increase the outrigger pressures. Include these effects.
(5) Deflection of a girder under the outriggers on one side could increase the loads by
taking the equipment out of level, concentrating the load effects on that side. Combined with
some of the other loading conditions, the result could have a significant effect on the structure
loading. The report must discuss whether it does.
(6) In the case of truss bridges carrying traffic during crane operations, provide a
summary table of rating factors and ratings for each truss member. Rate each member for a
Type 3 and for a Type 3S2 truck and for a combination of live load and crane loads combined
with other appropriate loads. (See AASHTO "Manual for Condition Evaluation of Bridges.")
Use Load Factor Design methods to analyze prestressed concrete beams. Use
Allowable Stress methods (working stress) for all other analyses.
b) Structural Effects. Combine dead loads with different live load conditions and other
loads in AASHTO load combinations. Identify critical members and load combinations in the
narrative. Tabulate the factor of safety against overturning and against operating ratings for
each load case and at each of the equipment's supports. Include assessments of modifications
to the factors of safety generated by any measures proposed to reduce the equipment's effects
on the structure.
c) Operation Restrictions. Certain combinations of loads may exceed the structure's
operating capacity or endanger workers and the public. Determine the conditions under which
the equipment may not operate. Limits on outrigger extension, padding under outriggers,
rotation speed, lifting speed, boom extension, boom elevation, or other factors that might cause
or cure a problem must appear in the narrative.
3)
Equipment Installation Drawing(s). Provide an engineering drawing or drawings
detailing the dimensions of the equipment from different perspectives (plan, elevation, etc.), and
clearances to relevant portions of the structure and to traffic flow. Show the equipment in
operating position for different phases of the work, and show distances to individual supporting
members and to substructure units or other structural items potentially affected by the
equipment's operation.
4)
Reports. The written report, the engineering analysis, and the equipment
installation drawings must each bear the stamp and the signature of a Professional Engineer
licensed to practice in Montana. The Department may require further information from the
-2-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
contractor in order to complete its review. Acceptance of the submittal does not obligate the
Department to allow use of the structure as a work platform.
Do not place loads in excess of 18 metric tons on the bridge prior to receiving approvals
for the Report, the Engineering Analyses and the Drawings.
C. Basis of Payment. Consider all costs associated with this provision and its
requirements incidental to performance of the work. Include the costs in the cost of other items.
2. CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING SUBMITTALS (REVISED 3-17-08)
A.
Description. Assume responsibility for the quality of engineering submittals.
Submit engineering submittals meeting the Departments requirements. The Department will
perform one engineering review of a given submittal at no cost to the contractor. The contractor
will assume the cost for the Departments review of any subsequent revisions of the same
submittal.
B.
Submittal. Submit to the Project Manager, three copies of engineering drawings
and calculations that meet the requirements of the contract, the standard of professional
practice, and specific conditions of the project. The Department will review the submittal and
either approve it or return it for correction within twenty state working days (see Section 2-16117, MCA) after receiving it, or it will extend the contract time by one day for each day over
twenty days.
1)
Unit System. Use the system of units employed by the plans for all engineering
submittals. The Department may waive this requirement on a case-by-case basis for work
performed on bridge rehabilitation projects. Secure approval for this waiver in writing in
advance of submitting drawings or calculations to the Department for review. The Department
will reject an engineering submittal that does not use the required unit system unless it has
previously approved a waiver specific to that submittal.
2)
Corrections. If the Department requires corrections, make them and submit the
corrected engineering work to the Department. The Department will review the revised
submittal and approve it or return it for correction within thirty state working days of receiving it,
or it will extend the contract time by one day for each day over thirty days.
3)
Review Costs. The Department will perform an engineering review of the first
submittal at no cost to the contractor. If the Department determines that the submittal fails to
meet the requirements of Section B of this specification, it will return the submittal for correction.
The Department will perform reviews of re-submittals with its own personnel when possible. If
Department staff does not have time available to perform reviews, at the Departments sole
option it may hire a consultant engineer from outside the Department to finish the review
process.
The Department will bill the contractor for reviews of re-submittals at the rate of $100 per
hour for its staff time and at the rate charged by a hired engineering firm for its staff time, if the
-3-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
Department hires one. The Department will subtract the billed charges from contractor
payments.
C.
Basis of Payment. Consider all costs associated with this provision incidental to
performance of the work. Include the cost in the cost of other items.
3. BRIDGE CONCRETE BARRIER CAST-IN-PLACE
A.
Description. Place bridge Concrete Barrier in the locations and to the
dimensions shown on the plans and meeting the requirements of this specification.
B.
Materials. Use Concrete Class Deck.
C.
Construction. Construct concrete barrier rail on the bridge to meet the plan
locations and dimensions.
Place the barrier with a uniformly smooth appearance on all faces, without bulges, sags,
tears or other irregularities and that matches the grade of the deck.
Slip forms. When using slip forms, perform a dry run, moving the slip form the
length of the barrier to place, verifying that the placement of the reinforcing steel and the form
provide the clearances required on the plans. Perform the dry run in the presence of the Project
Manager. Do not place barrier concrete without the Project Managers prior approval of the dry
run. Finish the barrier with vertical strokes of a soft brush and apply a curing compound. Use
flaggers to slow traffic on the bridge to speeds of no more than 35 miles per hour (55 kilometers
per hour) during concrete placement and for two hours after placement. Operate the slip form
at a uniform rate, controlling forward motion to produce well-compacted concrete, free from
surface pits and requiring no surface repairs. Use concrete with a consistency that will maintain
the barrier shape without support after slip-forming.
Reflectors. Apply reflectors to the tops of the barrier at a spacing of 30 feet (9.15 m),
with the reflective side facing traffic. See Detailed Drawing 606-66 for more information on the
reflectors.
Pay factors. The Project Manager will verify the surface smoothness of both inside and
outside faces and the top of the finished barrier. Barrier with deviation from a straight line less
than -inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m) on all three surfaces will receive full payment. For barrier
exceeding that requirement on one or more of those surfaces, the Project Manager will
authorize payment for the barrier according to the following schedule. In the case of more than
one defect within a 10-foot (3 m) segment, or with defects on more than one surface, the Project
Manager will add the defects and will determine the pay factor based on the sum of the defects.
Deviation from straight line
Pay factor
Less than -inch (6 mm)
1.0
From -inch to -inch (6 mm to 19 mm)
0.80
From -inch to 1- inch (19 mm to 31 mm)
0.60
-4-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
If the Project Manager determines that the barrier surface variation exceeds the values
in the table, remove the barrier and replace it at no cost to the Department. The Project
Manager will specify the segment or segments to reconstruct, and will specify removal areas in
lengths of 10 feet (3 m) minimum.
D.
Method of Measurement. The Project Manager will measure bridge barrier by
the volume (cubic yard) of concrete used in one linear foot measured along the top of the
finished barrier. Include the costs of reflectors, conduit, cover plates and all other hardware, as
well as all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in the unit price per cubic yard
bid for Concrete Class Deck, except reinforcing steel. Include the costs associated with the
reinforcing steel in the unit price per pound (kilogram) bid for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coated.
E.
Basis of Payment. The Department will pay the unit price bid per cubic yard for
Concrete Class Deck for the volume of concrete used in the barrier. The amount paid will
include any appropriate adjustments outlined in Section C. of this specification. That price will
include payment for all costs associated with placing the barrier.
4. JOINT SEALS SILICONE (REVISED 4-25-2011)
A.
Description. This work is the furnishing and installation of a silicone joint system
at the specified locations.
B.
Materials.
1)
Nosing material. Use a polymer-based material compatible with the silicone
sealant. Where nosing is monolithic with reinforcement embedded in the bridge deck a Portland
based cement will be accepted.
2)
Silicone Sealant. Use a rapid-curing, high movement, ultra-low modulus, selfleveling, two-component silicone sealant in conjunction with a closed cell expanded
polyethylene backer rod. Do not use asphalt-based or one-part silicone sealants. Use a joint
sealant that accommodates movements of +100/-50 percent of joint opening size (100%
tension, 50% compression).
3)
Furnish a joint system that functions properly between -40 oF to 113 oF.
C.
Construction Requirements.
1)
Submit two copies of the product documentation for the joint system being used
to the Project Manager at least fourteen calendar days prior to starting the work. Include the
following information in the submittal:
a)
Product specifications
b)
Material safety data sheet
c)
Manufacturers recommended application procedure
d)
Contractors work plan for installing the joint system
-5-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
Do not install the joint system until written authorization is received from the Project
Manager.
2)
Sandblast the joint opening and prime the prepared surfaces. Keep all joint
surfaces clean and dry prior to and during joint installation. Use primer materials that are
recommended for usage with the silicone joint sealant. Size and install the backer rod and
install the joint sealant and wear resistant nosing according to the manufacturers
recommendations.
3)
Install the joint system when the air temperature is between 40 F and 75 F.
Install at a higher temperature only with approval from the Project Manager.
D.
installed.
Method of Measurement. Measure the silicone joint system by the feet of joint
E.
Basis of Payment. Payment for the completed and accepted quantities is made
under the following:
Pay Item
Pay Unit
Joint Seals - Silicone.
Feet
Payment at the contract unit price is full compensation for all resources necessary to
complete the item of work under the contract.
5. POLYMER OVERLAY
A. Description. This work is the preparation of concrete sidewalk surfaces and the
furnishing and applying two layers of a two-component polymer overlay system to the bridge
sidewalk shown on the plans.
B. Materials. Furnish materials specifically designed for use over concrete bridge decks.
-6-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
1)
Polymer Resin. Use a polymer resin base and hardener composed of twocomponent, 100% solids, 100% reactive, thermosetting compound meeting the following
properties.
Property
Requirements
Test Method
15 - 45 minutes @
Gel Time A
ASTM C881
73 to 75 F
Viscosity A
7 - 70 poises
ASTM D2393, Brookfield

RVT, Spindle No. 3, 20
rpm
Shore D Hardness B
60-75
ASTM D2240
Absorption B
1% maximum at 24 hr
ASTM D570
Tensile Elongation B
30% - 70% @ 7 days
ASTM D638
Tensile Strength B
>2000 psi @ 7 days
ASTM D638
Chloride Permeability
<100 coulombs @ 28
days
AASHTO T277
B
A
Uncured, mixed polymer binder
Cured, mixed polymer binder
2)
Aggregates. Furnish natural or synthetic aggregates that have a proven record
of performance in applications of this type. Furnish aggregates that are non-polishing, clean,
free of surface moisture, fractured or angular in shape; free from silt, clay, asphalt, or other
organic materials; and meet the following properties and gradation requirements:
-7-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
Aggregate Properties:
Property
Moisture Content
at time of
placement
Requirement
Test Method
of the measured aggregate absorption,

%
ASTM C566
6.5
Mohs Scale
100% with at least 1 fractured face & 80%

with at least 2 fractured faces of material
retained on No.16
ASTM 5821
1%
ASTM C128
Hardness
Fractured Faces
Absorption
Gradation:
Sieve Size
% Passing by
Weight
No. 4
100
No. 8
30 75
No. 16
05
No. 30
01
3) Required Properties of Overlay System

The required properties of the overlay system are listed in the table below:
Property
Requirement A
Test Method
Minimum
Compressive
1,000 psi @ 8 hrs
ASTM C 579
Method B,
Strength at 8 Hrs. (psi)
5,000 psi @ 24
hrs
Thermal Compatibility
No Delaminations
ASTM C 884
Minimum Pull-off
Strength
250 psi @ 24 hrs
ACI 503R,
Appendix A
Based on samples cured or aged and tested at 75F
-8-
Modified B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
Plastic inserts that will provide 2-inch by 2-inch cubes shall be placed in the oversized
brass molds.
C. Construction Requirements.
1) Manufacturers Representative. Provide a manufacturers representative on site for

the duration of the work, to provide expert assistance on storage, mixing, surface preparation,
application, clean-up and disposal of materials.
2) Submittals. Submit two copies of the following to the Project Manager. The
department will have 20 calendar days for review of the submittal. Do not begin work until the
Owners review is complete.
a) Product data sheets and specifications from the manufacturer, and certified test
reports. The Project Manager may request samples of the polymer and/or aggregate, prior to
application, for the purpose of acceptance testing by the department. Product data sheets and
specifications from the manufacturer consists of literature from the manufacturer showing
general instructions, application recommendations/methods, product properties, general
instructions, or any other applicable information.
b) Product history/reference projects and a certified test report from an independent
testing laboratory showing compliance with the requirements of the specifications. The product
history/reference projects consist of a minimum of 5 bridge/locations where the proposed overlay
system has been applied in Montana or other locations with a similar climate. Include contact
names for the facility owner, current phone number or e-mail address, and a brief description of
the project.
3)
Material Delivery and Storage. Store resin materials in their original containers in
a dry area. Store and handle materials according to the manufacturers recommendations. Store
all aggregates in a dry environment and protect aggregates from contaminants on the job site.
4)
Pre-installation Conference. Conduct a pre-installation conference with the
manufacturer's representative prior to construction to establish procedures for maintaining
optimum working conditions and coordination of work. Furnish the Project Manager a copy of
the recommended procedures and apply the overlay system according to the manufacturers
instructions. The manufacturer's representative familiar with the overlay system installation
procedures must be present at all times during surface preparation and overlay placement to
provide quality assurance that the work is being performed properly.
5)
Surface Preparation. Determine an acceptable shotblasting machine operation
(size of shot, flow of shot, forward speed, and/or number of passes) that provides a surface
profile meeting CSP 5 according to the International Concrete Repair Institute Technical
Guideline No. 03732. Continue adjustment of the shotblasting machine until the surface is
acceptable to the Project Manager and the manufacturers representative.
-9-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
Thoroughly blast-clean with hand-held equipment any areas inaccessible by the shotblasting
equipment. Do not perform surface preparation more than 24 hours prior to the application of
the overlay system.
Prepare the vertical concrete surfaces adjacent to the sidewalk a minimum of 2 above the
overlay by sand blasting, using wire wheels, or other approved method to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager and the manufacturers representative.
Just prior to overlay placement, clean all dust, debris, and concrete fines from the prepared
surfaces including the vertical surfaces with compressed air. When using compressed air, the
air stream must be free of oil. Completely remove any grease, oil, or other foreign matter that
rests on or has absorbed into the concrete. If any prepared surfaces (including the first layer of
the polymer overlay) are exposed to rain or dew, lightly sandblast (breeze blast) the exposed
surfaces.
Protect drains, expansion joints, access hatches, or other appurtenances on the sidewalk from
damage by the shot and sand blasting operations and from materials adhering and entering.
Tape or form all construction joints to provide a clean straight edge.
Create a transitional area approaching transverse expansion joints and ends of the sidewalk
using the shotblasting machine or other approved method. Remove 5/16 to 3/8 of concrete
adjacent to the joint or end of sidewalk and taper a distance of 3 feet.
The Project Manager will approve the final surface profile and sidewalk cleanliness prior to the
contractor placing the polymer overlay.
6)
Overlay Application. Perform the handling and mixing of the polymer resin and
hardening agent in a safe manner to achieve the desired results according to the manufacturers
instructions. Do not apply the overlay system if any of the following exists:
a) Ambient air temperature is below 50o F;
b) Sidewalk temperature is below 50o F;
c) Moisture content in the sidewalk exceeds 4.5% when measured by an electronic
moisture meter or shows visible moisture after 2 hours when measured in accordance with
ASTM D4263;
d) Rain is forecasted during the minimum curing periods listed under C) 9;
e) Materials component temperatures below 50oF or above 99oF;
f)
The sidewalk temperature exceeds 100oF.
g) If the gel time is 10 minutes or less at the predicted high air temperature for the day.
After the sidewalk has been shotblasted and during the overlay curing period, only necessary
surface preparation and overlay application equipment will be allowed on the sidewalk. Begin
overlay placement as soon as possible after surface preparation operations.
-10-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
12/19/2014
Use a polymer overlay consisting of a two-course application of polymer and aggregate, with
each of the two courses consisting of a layer of polymer covered with a layer of aggregate in
sufficient quantity to completely cover the polymer. Apply the polymer and aggregate according
to the manufacturers requirements. Apply the overlay using equipment designed for this
purpose. Use an application machine that features positive displacement volumetric metering
and is capable of storing and mixing the polymer resins at the proper mix ratio. Disperse the
aggregate using a standard chip spreader or equivalent machine that can provide a uniform,
consistent coverage of aggregate. If the Project manager determines that the first course
application does not receive enough aggregate before the polymer gels, remove and replace
the first course. If the Project manager determines that the second course contains insufficient
aggregate, it may be left in place, but will require an additional application before opening to
traffic.
After completion of each course, cure the overlay according to the manufacturers instructions.
Follow the minimum cure times listed below or as prescribed by the manufacturer. Remove the
excess aggregate from the surface treatment by sweeping, blowing, or vacuuming without
tearing or damaging the surface; the material may be re-used if approved by the Project
Manager and manufacturer. Apply all courses of the overlay system before opening the area to
traffic. Do not allow traffic on the treated area until directed by the Project Manager.
After the first layer of coating has cured to the point where the aggregate cannot be pulled out,
apply the second layer. Prior to applying the second layer, broom and blow off the first layer with
compressed air to remove all loose excess aggregate.
Prior to opening to traffic, clean expansion joints and joint seals of all debris and polymer, and
remove loose aggregates from the sidewalk and approach pavement.
7) Application Rates. Apply the polymer overlay in two separate courses in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions, but not less than the following rate of application.
Course
Minimum Polymer
Rate A (GAL/100 SF)
Aggregate B
(LBS/SY)
2.5
10+
5.0
14+
The minimum total applications rate is 7.5 GAL/100 SF.
Apply sufficient quantity of aggregate to completely cover the polymer.
-11-
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
8)
12/19/2014
Minimum Curing Periods. As a minimum, cure the coating as follows:

Average temperature of sidewalk, polymer
and aggregate components in F
Course
50-54
55-59
60-64
65-69
70-74
75-79
80-84
85-99
6 hrs.
5 hrs.
4 hrs.
3 hrs.
2.5 hrs
2 hrs
1.5 hrs.
1 hr.
8 hrs.
6.5 hrs.
6.5 hrs.
5 hrs.
4 hrs.
3 hrs.
3 hrs.
3 hrs.
9)
Repair of Polymer Overlay. Repair all areas of unbonded, uncured, or damaged
polymer overlay at Contractors expense. Submit repair procedures from the manufacturer to
the Project Manager for approval prior to the repair.
D. Method of Measurement. Sidewalk surface preparation is measured by square yard
of sidewalk surface area treated. Polymer Overlay is measured by square yard of sidewalk
surface area treated.
E. Basis of Payment. Payment for the completed and accepted quantities is made
under the following:
Pay Item
Prepare Deck
Polymer Overlay
Pay Unit
Square Yard
Square Yard
Payment at the contract unit price is full compensation for all resources necessary to complete
the items of work under the contract.
-12-

M2LT Project Manual &amp; Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M2LT Project Manual &amp; Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Manual &

DJ&A, P.C. Engineers. Planners. Surveyors.

Section 00100 6th Edition

Section 00100 6th Edition

ARTICLE 1- DEFINED TERMS

Bidder - The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to OWNER

Successful Bidder - The lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid

ARTICLE 2- COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

ARTICLE 3- QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA

Subsurface and Physical Conditions

The Special Provisions identify:

Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface

Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.02.A will be made

information and data furnished to OWNER by owners of such Underground

Hazardous Environmental Condition

The Special Provisions identify those reports and drawings relating to a

Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.03.A will be made

Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective

thereof related to price) for such work.

Paragraph 6.13.C of the General Conditions indicates that if an Owner safety

It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

Carefully study all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

Agree at the time of submitting its bid that no further examinations,

Correlate the information know to Bidder, information and observations obtained

Promptly give OWNER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or

The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that

ARTICLE 5 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

ARTICLE 6- SITE AND OTHER AREAS

ARTICLE 7-INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

ARTICLE 8-BID SECURITY

A Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in an amount of

ARTICLE 9- CONTRACT TIMES

ARTICLE 10- LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

ARTICLE 11- SUBSTITUTE AND OR-EQUAL ITEMS

ARTICLE 12 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS

ARTICLE 13- PREPARATION OF BID

ARTICLE 14- BASIS OF BID; EVALUATION OF BIDS

ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITTAL OF BID

Alternative Bids will not be considered unless called for.

Bids by telephone, telegraph, fax or other telecommunication systems will not be

ARTICLE 16- MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

ARTICLE 17- OPENING OF BIDS

ARTICLE 18 BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

ARTICLE 19- AWARD OF CONTRACT

ARTICLE 20 CONTRACT SECURITY

Section 00200 6th Edition

ARTICLE 21- SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

ARTICLE 22- STATE LAWS AND REGULATIONS

Section 00200 6th Edition

CONTRACT IDENTIFICATION AND NUMBER:

Missoula to Lolo Trail

THIS BID SUBMITTED TO:

Section 00300 6th Edition

Section 00300 6th Edition

SOIL EROSION CONTROL

CLEARING AND GRUBBING

REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT, ASPHALT

REMOVAL OF CURB AND GUTTER

REMOVAL OF UTILITY POLE

RECYCLED ASPHALT BASE

MINOR HOT ASPHALT PAVEMENT

PERMANENT TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT

M2LT Project Manual & Specifications

M2LT Project Manual & Specifications